Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
32A-174 (3)
PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Prepare areas where music system will be installed. B. Coordinate the exact locations and requirements prior to running conduits. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Owner's separate Contractor installs music system. B. General Contractor Responsibility: 1. Coordinate installation of the system with other interrelated work as required. 2. Prepare areas where Owners separate contractor's devices will be installed. C. Sound system speakers are not allowed in the Manager's office. --- END OF SECTION --- Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion MUSIC SYSTEM 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\16770NorthamptonMA.doc 16770-2 SECTION 16770 MUSIC SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 General Requirements. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide a complete commercial music system conduit system with power requirements, boxes,pull tapes,plywood terminal board. B. Preparation of areas scheduled for installation of music system. C. Coordination of music system installation. D. Conduit, pull wiring and junction boxes. E. Music system is furnished and installed by Owners separate Contractor 1.3 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. The Owner will award a separate contract for the installation of the music system as indicated on the drawings and responsibility schedule. B. Site G.C. shall cooperate fully with the Owner's separate music system contractor so that work under that contract may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying Work under this Contract. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MUSIC SYSTEM A. Owner's separate Contractor furnishes all materials except conduit. 2.2 G.C. FURNISHED MATERIAL A. All outlet boxes, conduits,pull tapes, cover plates,power supplies, grounding shall be in accordance with these specifications and the applicable sections of Division 16. 1. Service conduit shall be RMC(or PVC) in building interior. 2. Distribution conduit shall be EMT. 3. Conduit shall only be required where required by local building codes. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion MUSIC SYSTEM 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\16770NorthamptonMA.doc 16770-1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. General Contractor shall prepare area and provide all conduits indicated on plans. B. Contact Talbots P.O.S. Contractor to coordinate the exact locations and requirements prior to running conduits. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Owner's separate Contractor installs P.O.S. system. B. General Contractor Responsibility: 1. Install all conduit and pull wire from the following locations: a. Cash wrap stations to Records Room. b. Area above the Stock Room door(stock room side)to the Records Room computer area. 2. Coordinate installation of the system with other interrelated work as required. 3. Prepare areas where Owners separate contractor's devices will be installed. ---END OF SECTION--- Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion P.O.S. DATA SYSTEM 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\16744NorthamptonMA.doc 16744-2 SECTION 16744 P.O.S. DATA SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 General Requirements. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Preparation of areas scheduled for installation of P.O.S. system. B. Coordination of P.O.S. system installation. C. Conduit,pull wiring and junction boxes. D. P.O.S. system is furnished and installed by Owners separate Contractor 1.3 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. The Owner will award a separate contract for the installation of the P.O.S. system as indicated on the drawings and responsibility schedule. B. Site G.C. shall cooperate fully with the Owner's separate P.O.S. system contractor so that work under that contract may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying Work under this Contract. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 P.O.S. SYSTEM A. Owner's separate Contractor furnishes all materials except conduit. 2.2 G.C. FURNISHED MATERIAL A. All outlet boxes,conduits,pull tapes, cover plates,power supplies, grounding shall be in accordance with these specifications and the applicable sections of Division 16. B. Conduit shall be a minimum 1-inch. C. Provide a nylon pull cord in those conduits greater than 25 feet in length. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion P.O.S. DATA SYSTEM 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\16744NorthamptonMA.doc 16744-1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. General Contractor shall prepare area and provide all conduit indicated on plans. B. Contact Talbots Telephone Contractor to coordinate the exact telephone service entrance location and requirements prior to running conduits. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. G.C. shall provide telephone conduits from the following locations to the telephone panel: 1. Red phone. 2. Receiving desk 3. Records room 4. Cash wrap. B. Owner's separate Contractor installs telephone system. C. General Contractor shall coordinate installation of the system with other interrelated work as required. D. General Contractor shall prepare areas where Owners separate contractor's devices will be installed. ---END OF SECTION--- Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion TELEPHONE SYSTEM 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\16741NorthamptonMA.doc 16741-2 SECTION 16741 TELEPHONE SYSTEM PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 General Requirements. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide a complete commercial telephone conduit system with power requirements,boxes, pull-tapes,plywood terminal board. B. Preparation of areas scheduled for installation of telephone system. C. Coordination of telephone system installation. D. Telephone system is furnished and installed by Owners separate Telephone Contractor 1.3 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. The Owner will award a separate contract for the installation of the telephone system as indicated on the drawings and responsibility schedule. B. Site G.C. shall cooperate fully with the Owner's separate telephone system contractor so that work under that contract may be carried out smoothly,without interfering with or delaying Work under this Contract. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 TELEPHONE SYSTEM A. Owner's separate Contractor furnishes all materials except conduit. 2.2 G.C. FURNISHED MATERIAL A. All outlet boxes,conduits,pull tapes,cover plates,power supplies,grounding shall be in accordance with these specifications and the applicable sections of Division 16. 1. Conduit shall be 1-inch diameter. 2. Service conduit shall be RMC (or PVC) in building interior. 3. Distribution conduit shall be EMT. 4. Provide a nylon pull cord in those conduits greater than 25 feet in length. B. Outlet boxes shall be standard for wall type. C. Cover plates shall be blank. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion TELEPHONE SYSTEM 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\16741NorthamptonMA.doc 16741-1 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Owner's separate contractor shall install system. B. General Contractor shall coordinate installation of the system with other interrelated work as required. --- END OF SECTION --- look Amokk Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion INTRUSION DETECTION 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\16721NorthamptonMA.doc 16721-2 SECTION 16721 AOWI INTRUSION DETECTION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the General Conditions of the Contract and Division I General Requirements. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Preparation of areas scheduled for installation of intrusion detection system. B. Coordinate intrusion detection system installation. 1.3 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. The Owner will award a separate contract for the installation of the intrusion detection system as indicated on the drawings and responsibility schedule. B Site G.C. shall cooperate fully with the Owner's separate intrusion detection system contractor so that work under that contract may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying Work under this Contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Commercial Burglar Alarm System: Furnished by Owner's separate contractor. 2.2 CONDUIT AND PULL WIRES A. General Contractor provides conduit and pull wires as indicated on electrical drawings. B. Conduit shall be a minimum of 3/4-inch. C. Provide a nylon pull cord in those conduits greater than 25 feet in length. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. General Contractor shall prepare areas where Owners separate contractor's devices will be installed. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion INTRUSION DETECTION 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\16721NorthamptonMA.doc 16721-1 C. After the system has been inspected and approved, a copy of the approval form shall be sent to the Owner. END OF SECTION Talbots Store No.335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion FIRE AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29,2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\16720NorthamptonMA.doc 16720-9 2.7 MANUAL FIRE ALARM PULL STATION PROTECTOR A. In Sales Area,high traffic areas and in areas frequently occupied by children,provide pull station device guards to assure protection from accidental bumps, etc. 1. "STOPPER I1 Pull Station Protector"as manufactured by Safety Technology, Inc., Waterford, MI, (800) 888-4784. Flush or surface mount as appropriate for condition and pull station device. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION A. Install the fire alarm and detection system in conformance with local and national codes and NFPA-72 standards and in accordance with these specifications and the Drawings. 1. Install all wiring in conduit. 2. Install all components as indicated and in accordance with manufacturer's wiring diagrams, instructions and recommendations. B. Make all fire alarm wiring continuous from terminal to terminal or from terminal to device pigtail lead. 1. Circuit splices not permitted. 2. Wiring joints, only when required at device pigtail leads shall utilize Scotchlog insulate conical spring connector. C. All fire detection and alarm system devices, control panels and remote annunciators shall be flush mounted when located in finished areas and may be surface mounted when located in unfinished areas. D. All conduit,junction boxes, conduit supports and hangers shall be concealed in finished areas and may be exposed in unfinished areas. E. Smoke detectors shall not be installed prior to the system programming and test period. 1. If installation is performed during construction, cover all smoke detection devices with plastic bags immediately after installation to maintain cleanliness. F. Color-code all wiring by type of device. G. Ground Connection: A ground connection shall be installed from the ground terminal of the fire alarm box to the electrical equipment ground of the building. 3.2 TESTING AND INSPECTIONS A. The completed system shall be inspected by the electrical inspector for compliance with the NEC and by a UL certified and local Fire Department approved testing service. Utilize the shopping center's testing and Service Company when one exists. 1. Entire system shall test free from opens, grounds, and short circuits. B. Testing shall be witnessed, and the Owner shall make final acceptance. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion FIRE AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29,2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\16720NorthamptonMA.doc 16720-8 5. Detector Base: Molded construction equipped with terminal screws for all wiring connections,designed for mounting on any standard 4-inch square outlet box for owk concealed wiring. 6. UL listed to Standard 268 and shall be documented as compatible with control equipment to which it is connected. 7. Detector with a flashing status indicating LED for visual supervision. When detector is actuated, flashing LED will latch on steady and at full brilliance. 8. Removal of detector head will interrupt supervisory circuit of zone circuit and cause a trouble signal to be initiated. a. Detector head easily disassembled to facilitate cleaning. D. Automatic Smoke Detectors For Ductwork: With appropriate air duct accessory for installation in ducts. 1. Duct smoke detectors shall be a 24 VDC type with visual alarm and power indicators, and a reset switch. 2. Duct smoke detectors shall utilize photoelectric type detector operating on light scattering photodiode principle. Detector to be designed to ignore invisible airborne particles or smoke densities that are below factory set alarm point. 3. Duct housing mounted directly to outside of duct with a sampling tube extended across duct to sample air movement. a. Duct housing couplings slotted to insure proper alignment of sampling and exhaust tubes. 4. Detector shall have an alarm LED visible through front cover. 5. UL listed to Standard 268A and shall be documented compatible with control equipment to which it is connected. 6. Provide 8-inch square access door with rubber gasket in duct approximately 2-feet upstream from smoke detector for testing and servicing. 7. All air supply systems of 2000 CFM or greater capacity require smoke detectors located down stream of filters and ahead of any branch connection. 8. Duct smoke detectors shall be furnished, wired and connected under Division 16. HVAC contractor shall furnish the necessary duct openings and installation of the duct smoke detectors. 9. Smoke detectors will be self-contained and upon activation shall shut down respective supply fan and provide local alarm. 10. Provide test switch located in stockroom. E. Main Sprinkler waterflow detector(See Specification Section 15300): Provide alarm wiring circuit and make connections from switch terminals to fire alarm system. F. Sprinkler and Standpipe Flow Alarm Switches(See Specification Section 15300): Provide alarm wiring circuit and make connections from switch terminals to fire alarm system. G. Coordinate with the Tenant Criteria for specific Landlord requirements and local code requirements. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion FIRE AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29,2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\16720NorthamptonMA.doc 16720-7 2.5 ALARM SIGNAL DEVICES A. Programmable Electronic Sounders: 1. Electronic sounders shall operate on 24 VDC nominal. 2. Electronic sounders shall be field programmable without the use of special tools, to provide slow whoop, continuous, or interrupted tones with an output sound level of at least 90 DBA measured at 10 feet from the device. 3. Shall be flush or surface mounted as show on plans. B. Strobe lights shall meet the requirements of the ADA,UL Standard 1971 and shall meet the following criteria: 1. The maximum pulse duration shall be 2/10 of one second. 2. Strobe intensity shall meet the requirements of UL 1971. 3. The flash rate shall meet the requirements of UL 1971. C. Audible/Visual Combination Devices: 1. Shall meet the applicable requirements of Section A listed above for audibility. 2. Shall meet the requirements of Section B listed above for visibility. D. Audio and visual devices shall be wired separately to allow individual control of either circuit and silencing of only the audible alarm. 2.6 SIGNAL INITIATING DEVICES A. Manual fire alarm stations: Non-coded,general and evacuation alarms. 1. Pull-type with handle that shall lock in a protruding manner to facilitate quick visual identification of activated station. 2. High impact red Lexan with operating directions in white letters, semi-flush mounted at 4 feet above finished floor. B. Automatic Heat Detectors: Fixed temperature type of combination rate-of-rise and fixed temperature type. 1. Rated at 135 deg F for ordinary areas where normal ceiling temperatures do not exceed 100 deg F,or rated 190 deg F for up to 150 deg F ceiling temperatures. 2. Quantity and spacing: a. Smooth ceilings: In accordance with UL rating. b. Non-smooth ceilings: In accordance with State Fire Marshal's requirements. 3. Provide in areas required by NFPA-72E C. Automatic Smoke Detectors: Ionization type, dual chamber products of combustion detectors. 1. Operate on ionization principle, activated by presence of combustion products or gasses. 2. Operating characteristics shall allow detector to remain stable under varying conditions of vibration, mechanical shock, supply voltage, ambient temperature, airflow and barometric variations. 3. Not more than 1.0 micro-curies of radioactive material in each. 4. Low voltage, solid-state design employing voltage and RF transient suppression as well as a smoke verification circuit to minimize nuisance alarms. a. Operating power supplied from basic 24 volt DC zone circuit. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion FIRE AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29,2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\16720NorthamptonMA.doc 16720-6 3. All wire and cable shall be listed and/or approved by a recognized testing agency for use with a protective signaling system. 4. Wire and cable not installed in conduit shall have a fire resistance rating suitable for the installation as indicated in NFPA 70 (e.g., FPLR). 5. Wiring used for the multiplex communication loop shall be twisted and shielded and support a minimum wiring distance of 10,000 feet. The system shall support up to 1,000 ft. of untwisted, unshielded wire. The system shall permit use of IDC and NAC wiring in the same conduit with the communication loop. 6. All field wiring shall be completely supervised. 7. The Fire Alarm Control panel shall be capable of T-Tapping Class B (NFPA Style 4) Signaling Line Circuits(SLC's). Systems,which do not allow or have restrictions in, for example, the amount of T-Taps, length of T-taps etc., are not acceptable. C. Terminal Boxes,Junction Boxes and Cabinets: 1. All boxes and cabinets shall be UL listed for their use and purpose. D. Initiating circuits shall be arranged to serve like categories(manual, smoke,water flow). Mixed category circuitry shall not be permitted except on signaling line circuits connected to intelligent reporting devices. 2.4 PRIMARY NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES A. Provide flush mounted combination Audio/Visual signaling appliances as required. Stand- alone devices may be used to augment combination units where necessary or indicated. Minimum audible and visual characteristics are as follows: 1. Visual Signals: Synchronized flashing xenon strobes in compliance with the Americans with Disabilities Act Applications Guidelines(ADAAG). Visual signals shall have a minimum effective intensity rating of 75 candelas. Minimum of one flash (maximum of three)per second across the listed voltage range. a. Exterior Strobe: Provide a flashing exterior strobe beacon activated upon a fire alarm with a minimum 150,000 candlepower light output were indicated and as required by the Fire Department. The device shall be properly installed on a weatherproof backbox. 2. Audible Horn Signals: NFPA synchronized horn signal as indicated under materials- Fire Command Center. Minimum 85 dB at ten feet or 15 dB above ambient with multiple adjustments up to 120 dB. Provide appropriate sound levels. Horn shall be red. Provide surface mount backboxes when required. 3. Sprinkler System Devices: Coordinate the following work to ensure the required installation and wiring of all waterflow pressure,PIV and tamper switches is accomplished in a manner that will result in a complete operable and tested sprinkler system. Each device shall be a separate and distinct monitor point as follows: a. Waterflow switches will initiate the building alarm sequence. b. Pressure Switches will actuate a supervisory trouble condition. C. Tamper switches will activate a supervisory trouble condition. d. Post indicator valves(PIV)will activate a supervisory trouble condition. Talbots Store No.335,Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion FIRE AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\16720NorthamptonMA.doc 16720-5 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL, GENERAL A. All equipment and components shall be new, and the manufacturer's current model. The materials, appliances, equipment and devices shall be tested and listed by a nationally recognized approvals agency for use as part of a protective signaling system,meeting the National Fire Alarm Code. B. All equipment and components shall be installed in strict compliance with manufacturers' recommendations. Consult the manufacturer's installation manuals for all wiring diagrams, schematics, physical equipment sizes, etc.,before beginning system installation. C. All Equipment shall be attached to walls and ceiling/floor assemblies and shall be held firmly in place (e.g., detectors shall not be supported solely by suspended ceilings).Fasteners and supports shall be adequate to support the required load. 2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Existing Fire-Lite miniscan panel is to remain in use. All new components shall be compatible with existing system. 2.3 CONDUIT AND WIRE: A. Conduit:. 1. Conduit shall be in accordance with The National Electrical Code (NEC), local and state requirements. 2. Where possible, all wiring shall be installed in conduit or raceway. Conduit fill shall not exceed 40 percent of interior cross sectional area where three or more cables are contained within a single conduit. 3. Cable must be separated from any open conductors of Power, or Class 1 circuits, and shall not be placed in any conduit,junction box or raceway containing these conductors, as per NEC Article 760-29. 4. Wiring for 24 volt control,alarm notification, emergency communication and similar power-limited auxiliary functions may be run in the same conduit as initiating and signaling line circuits. All circuits shall be provided with transient suppression devices and the system shall be designed to permit simultaneous operation of all circuits without interference or loss of signals. 5. Conduits shall not enter the Fire Alarm Control Panel,or any other remotely mounted Control Panel equipment or backboxes, except where conduit entry is specified by the FACP manufacturer. 6. Conduit shall be 3/4-inch minimum. B. Wire: 1. All fire alarm system wiring shall be new. 2. Wiring shall be in accordance with local, state and national codes(e.g.,NEC Article 760) and as recommended by the manufacturer of the fire alarm system. Number and size of conductors shall be as recommended by the fire alarm system manufacturer, but not less than 18 AWG for Initiating Device Circuits and Signaling Line Circuits, and 14 AWG for Notification Appliance Circuits. "'"ft�. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion FIRE AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29,2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\16720NorthamptonMA.doc 16720-4 G. Audible signals shall be synchronized. H. Visual signals shall be synchronized. I. Ability to disable any automatic initiating circuit to minimize false alarms when work is occurring in those areas. 1.6 SERVICE ORGANIZATION QUALIFICATIONS: A. Offer an annual maintenance contract including complete service and equipment cost for maintenance of complete system. 1.7 RELATED WORK A. Coordinate work in this Section with all related trades. Provide interface work as indicated and required for a fully functional system. Work or equipment in other Sections and related to the fire alarm and protective system shall include,but not be limited to: 1. Sprinkler water flow, tamper and supervisory switches shall be provided under Division 15,but wired and connected to the fire alarm system under this Section. 2. Duct smoke detectors shall be furnished, wired and connected under this Section. Division 15 shall furnish the necessary duct openings and installation of the duct smoke detectors. 3. Security system interface: Programmable relays are to be provided for each zone. Provide wiring for each zone and a common alarm contact to the Main Security Control Panel. Provide wiring to terminal strip in a junction box,with nameplate, to each location indicated on the Drawings and to each remote security panel. Provide a common alarm contact and a contact for that zone. Final connection to the security system shall be under that Section of work. 1.8 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. Entire system shall be approved by State Fire Marshal: a. Wiring diagrams and riser diagram. b. Description of system operation. 2. Provide a copy of the "As-Builts" (full size and 11 x 17 size). B. Manuals: Provide two sets of all equipment and system operating procedures and maintenance requirements. As a minimum,provide other information listed below for inclusion in the operation and maintenance manuals. 1. All equipment specifications. 2. Copies of all warranties for equipment. C. Inspection and approval certificates Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion FIRE AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29,2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\16720NorthamptonMA.doc 16720-3 f. No. 38 Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes. g. No. 346 Water flow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. Ante h. No. 1971 Visual Notification Appliances. 3. NFPA-90A 4. NFPA-101 5. National Electrical Code Article 760. 6. Local and State Building Codes. 7. All requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All equipment, devices, cables, etc., shall be NRTL listed and approved by Factory Mutual for the purpose of fire alarm systems. B. Comply with all local Fire Department Regulations and requirements of fire authorities having jurisdiction. C. Evacuation signaling devices and placement shall comply with the requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act Application Guidelines (ADAAG). D. Equipment shall not be modified or installed to alter or void UL label or listing. 1.5 DESIGN CRITERIA A. Activation of any signal initiating device shall cause the following: 1. General alarm bells and chimes shall sound. 2. General alarm lights shall flash. 3. Specific zone light at remote panel shall illuminate and audible alarm shall sound. 4. Specific zone light at control panel shall illuminate and audible alarm shall sound. B. Alarm light and trouble signal operate until alarm condition is corrected and control panel is manually reset. C. All fire alarm signals are automatically locked in at control panel and remote annunciators until manually reset at control panel and originating device is returned to normal. D. Audible alarm signals shall be silenceable from control panel allowing for re-initiation following a subsequent alarm. Silencing of alarm signals shall not impair ability of system to continue to perform as specified. 1. Silencing the audible signal shall leave the visual alarm operating. E. Activation of any system trouble shall initiate the following: 1. Common audible trouble signal shall sound and common trouble light shall illuminate at remote annunciators. 2. Common audible trouble signal shall sound and common trouble light shall illuminate control panel. F. The silencing of an alarm condition in any zone shall not prevent the resounding of alarm devices should a subsequent alarm condition occur. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion FIRE AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29,2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\16720NorthamptonMA.doc 16720-2 SECTION 16720 FIRE AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 General Requirements. 1.2 SUMMARY A. A complete automatic and manual zoned, general alarm and non-coded evacuation alarm, electrically supervised, closed-circuit 24 volt DC intelligent fire detection and alarm system compatible with Landlords fire alarm system. B. Supervised wiring and all operations, hardware, software and required programming as described herein and indicated on the Drawings. C. The system shall include,but not be limited to the following: 1. Non-coded general alarm manual stations. 2. Automatic smoke detectors. 3. Ductwork automatic smoke detectors. 4. Automatic heat detectors. 5. Flashing general alarm lights. 6. Synchronized AudioNisual evacuation signaling. D. Secure and pay for all necessary licenses, inspections,certificates,permits, insurance, documents and any other charges required for execution of work under this section. Give all requisite notices. E. Work shall include the costs of a UL certified and Fire Department approved testing and service group for testing and servicing of the completed system and for first year testing as required herein. Hire the building's testing and Service Company when one exists. 1.3 APPLICABLE STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS: A. The specifications and standards listed below form a part of this specification. The system shall fully comply with the latest issue of these standards. 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)-USA: a. No. 72 National Fire Alarm Code. b. No. 101 Life Safety Code. 2. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)-USA: a. No. 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. b. No. 864 Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. C. No. 268A Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications. d. No. 521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective e. No. 464 Audible Signaling Appliances. Talbots Store No.335,Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion FIRE AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29,2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\16720NorthamptonMA.doc 16720-1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install lamps in each fixture. Provide complete installation. B. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming. C. Vacuum light coves and wipe down lamps in light cove,one to five days prior to Talbots occupancy. D. Replace burned out lamps with new lamps of identical type and wattage. END OF SECTION Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/ Voman Expansion LAMPS 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\16501NorthamptonMA.doc 16501-3 Talbots Type Description Manufacturers Designation LP-G 100 watt incandescent(frosted) PH37474-4 LP-H 60 watt incandescent B10-1/2) PH31116-7 LP-I 20 watt MRC-11 (10 degree spot halogen) PH37821-6 LP-J 100 watt High Press Sodium PH36827-0 LP-K 20 watt fluorescent(T-12 24" long) PH31388-2 LP-L 30 watt fluorescent(T-12 36" long) PH31371-8 LP-M 40 watt fluorescent(T-12 48" long) PH27299-7 LP-N 59 watt fluorescent(T-12 72" long) PH30753-8 LP-P 13 watt fluorescent(2 pin compact) PH38312-5 LP-R 26 watt fluorescent(2 pin compact) PH38323-2 LP-S 31 watt fluorescent(T-8 U-shape) SY21878 LP T 7 watt fluorescent(2 pin compact) PH34256-8 LP-U 8 watt fluorescent(T-5 12" long) PH33252-8 LP-W 9 watt mini incandescent(T-5, 12 volt) PH20291-1 LP-X 60 watt PAR30S (40 degree flood halogen) PH35758-2 LP-Y 60 watt PAR38 (25 degree flood halogen) PH23065-6 LP-Z 40 watt fluorescent compact(PL-L) PH30043-4 LP-01 39 watt PAR 30 (10 degree spot metal halide) PH22329-7 LP-02 25 watt fluorescent(T-8 36" long) PH36814-2 LP-03 95 watt fluorescent(T-12 8' long) PH22117-6 LP-04 32 watt fluorescent(T-8 48" long) PH24670-2 LP-05 17 watt fluorescent(T-8 24" long) PH36791-2 LP-06 26 watt compact fluorescent(4 pin) PH38336-4 LP-07 9 watt miniature Lamp No. 88 Emergi-Lite IE138 LP-08 100 watt clear incandescent PH22978-1 LP-09 70 watt PAR 38 (15 degree spot metal halide) PH22250-2 LP-10 18 watt compact fluorescent (2 pin) PH38332-3 LP-11 42 watt fluorescent (4 pin, 3-tube) PH26875-5 LP-12 150 watt frosted incandescent PH37417-3 LP-13 60 watt frosted incandescent PH22245-5 LP-14 18 watt PAR 36 (12-V, incandescent) PH21485-8 LP-15 70 watt metal halide(ED-17) PH2O884-3 LP-16 150 watt metal halide(ED-17) PH35463-9 LP-17 40 watt fluorescent(T5 circular) PH29016-3 LP-18 5.4 watt miniature incandescent Lamp No. 7613 PH21438-7 LP-19 8 watt miniature incandescent Emergi-Lite 138 LP-20 18 watt miniature incandescent Lamp No. 921 PH2O294-5 LP-21 6 watt miniature Lamp No. 939 (6 volt) GE16975 LP-22 8 watt miniature Lamp No. 785 (6 volt) GE43762 LP-23 20 watt incandescent(T 6 ''/2) PH24839-3 LP-24 15 watt fluorescent(T-8 18" long) PH36720-1 LP-25 30 watt fluorescent(T-8 36" long) PH38691-2 LP-26 70 watt metal halide(T-6) PH28137-8 LP-27 39 watt metal halide(T-6) PH22328-9 PH=Philips SY= Sylvania GE= General Electric Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion LAMPS 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\16501NorthamptonMA.doc 16501-2 SECTION 16501 LAMPS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the General Conditions of the Contract, and Division 1 General Requirements. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Installation of lamps for installed permanent interior and exterior luminaries. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Accept inside delivery of Talbots furnished items. B. Protect materials from damage during storage on site. 1.4 CONSTRUCTION LAMPING A. The General Contractor may use permanently installed light fixtures for temporary lighting during construction. Use of these fixtures shall require G.C. to furnish his own lamps. Talbots lamps furnished under this section shall not be used except to lamp fixtures immediately before Talbots final acceptance. 1.5 EXTRA MATERIAL A. Talbots will furnish extra lamps. Deliver extra lamps to Records Room.Do not remove extra lamps from site! PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Talbots furnishes all permanent lamps. 2.2 LAMPS Talbots Tyne Description Manufacturers Designation LP-A 90 watt PAR-38 (25 degree flood halogen) PH23070-6 LP-B 60 watt PAR-30S (10 degree spot halogen) PH35751-7 LP-C 50 watt Par-20 (9 degree spot halogen) PH22906-2 LP-D 12 volt PAR36 PH21484-1 LP-E 50 watt MRC-16 (24 degree flood halogen) PH26981-1 LP-F 75 watt BT-15 (halogena) PH24927-6 Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion LAMPS 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\16501NorthamptonMA.doc 16501-1 3.3 SIGNS A. Prepare area for electrified sign and/or awning installation. Owner's separate Contractor provides installation of these electrified components. The G.C. shall be responsible for the final connection from the fixture to the G.C. supplied junction box. --- END OF SECTION--- Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion LIGHTING EQUIPMENT 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29,2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\16500NorthamptonMA.doc 16500-3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General Contractor shall provide complete installation as specified under Section 16000 and in accordance with the electrical drawings. B. Install lighting fixtures at locations and heights as indicated, in accordance with fixture manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC,NECA's"Standard of Installation",NEMA standards and with recognized industry practices to ensure that lighting fixtures fulfill requirements. C. Support for Fixtures in or on Grid-Type Suspended Ceilings: Use grid for support. 1. Install a minimum of four ceiling support system rods or wires for each fixture. Locate not more than 6 inches from fixture corners. 2. Support Clips: Fasten to fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application. 3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4-inch metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees. D. Provide fixture outlet boxes with hangers that properly support fixture weight. E. Install flush mounted fixtures properly to eliminate light leakage between fixture frame and finished surface. F. Fasten fixtures securely to indicated structural supports, ensure pendant fixtures are plumb and level. G. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufactures values where specified. Where values are not specified,tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL standards 486A and B,and the National Electrical Code. H. Protect installed Work from damage of all types. I. Clean lighting fixtures of dirt and construction debris upon completion of installation. Clean fingerprints and smudges from lenses. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components. B. Verify normal operation of each fixture after installation. C. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify normal transfer to battery power source and retransfer to normal. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion LIGHTING EQUIPMENT 34 Bridge Street, Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\16500NorthamptonMA.doc 16500-2 SECTION 16500 LIGHTING EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 General Requirements. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide lighting equipment work, including but not limited to the following: 1. Installation of interior lighting fixtures with lamps and ballasts. 2. Installation of lighting fixtures mounted on exterior building surfaces. 3. Installation of emergency lighting units. 4. Installation of exit signs. 5. Installation of fixture accessories. 6. Final connection from electrified sign fixtures to the G.C. supplied junction box. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept inside delivery of Owner furnished items. B. Protect materials from damage during storage on site. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate with other electrical work including wires/cables, electrical boxes and fittings, and raceways,to properly interface installation of light fixtures with other related work. B. Sequence Lighting installation with other work to reduce possibility of damage and soiling of fixtures during remainder of construction period. C. Coordinate installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Light fixtures, electrified signs are furnished by Owner as identified on the Electrical Fixture Schedule. B. All finishes are factory applied. C. Trim and Accessories: Furnished by Owner. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion LIGHTING EQUIPMENT 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\1\4ISSY\05132\specs\16500NorthamptonMA.doc 16500-1 2. 600V and below: Megger tests of all feeder circuit conductors, ground conductors and conduit ground. Ammeter readings on all phases and neutral of each feeder to indicate balance. Ammeter readings on all phases of each polyphase motor, include nameplate full load current of each motor on data sheet. C. Test Procedures: Generally, comply with NFPA 70,Article 7004, [a] through [e]. D. Corrections: Make all corrections needed at no additional cost to Talbots. E. Certify that all overload devices have been set in accordance with data shown on the drawings and/or manufacturer's recommended setting 3.8 FINAL CLEANING A. Upon completion of work and as prerequisite to final payment, clean all devices,equipment, conduits,raceways, fittings, and electrical work,both new and existing within the work limits,to remove all dirt,debris, metal cuttings, grease,protective covers,and tape. B. Lighting: Thoroughly clean all light fixtures and lamps to remove all dust and dirt immediately before final acceptance by Talbots. 3.9 RELAMPING A. The electrical contractor shall provide lamps for temporary lighting. Talbots furnished lamps shall not be used except to relamp fixtures immediately before Talbots final acceptance. 3.10 REMEDIAL WORK A. In addition to the new work specified herein, it is the intent of this section to include the replacement and repair of electrical work scheduled to remain that becomes damaged or is removed due to the alterations and removal of existing work. Application and workmanship shall be equal to the quality of new work as specified herein as approved by the Architect. Use specific types at respective areas affected. END OF SECTION Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion ELECTRICAL 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\16000NorthamptonMA.doc 16000-12 8. Pull and Junction Boxes: Comply with codes and provide in the most convenient layout. ' 9. Generally, all conduit shall be concealed except where located in unfinished areas. 10. Drawings are often diagrammatic. Locate conduit and work to accommodate field conditions and where approved before installation by Owner. D. Provide maximum possible headroom, not less than 8 feet above floor. E. Provide all hardware, connections, and anchors needed for electrical work. Attach wall mounted work with not less than 3/8-inch diameter expansion bolts. Attach floor and overhead mounted work with minimum '/z-inch diameter expansion bolts. F. Panelboard Height: Keep top breaker within 6 feet of floor. G. Wall Switches: 1. Mount switches at 4'-0"from floor to centerline, unless otherwise indicated or directed. 2. Install wall switches with OFF position down. 3. Gang adjacent switches under one cover plate. H. Convenience Receptacles: 1. Mount outlets at 1'-6"from floor to centerline, unless otherwise indicated or directed. Gang adjacent outlets under one cover plate. 2. Install receptacle with grounding pole on bottom when mounted vertically. I. Separate Circuits: Keep power and lighting on separate circuits,unless otherwise indicated or directed by Owner. 3.6 WIRING INSTALLATION A. Install splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. B. Install wiring at outlets with at least 12 inches of slack conductor at each outlet. C. Connect outlet and component connections to wiring systems and to ground. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A. 3.7 TESTING A. Provide complete testing of all work to obtain acceptance from authorities having jurisdiction,Talbots,and Landlord. Provide all labor,materials,and equipment needed for testing. B. Scope of Testing: 1. 600V and higher conductors: Test for shorts,proper grounding,polarity, continuity, open circuits, insulation resistance, and all other defects.Check motors for proper rotation and measure motor current under load. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion ELECTRICAL 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\16000NorthamptonMA.doc 16000-11 F. Unused Circuits: Switch breakers, if any,to"Off"and label directory to indicate"Spare". 3.3 GROUNDING A. Provide grounding in accordance with requirements of NEC Article No. 250 B. Provide a reliable low impedance metallic ground path for short circuit currents, so that circuit protective devices can operate quickly and effectively. Route the ground path. parallel to the circuit conductors and physically as close to them as possible, generally using the metallic conduit system as a conductor. Make the ground path continuous to each outlet and electrically operated device in the Project. C. Ground frames of motors. Conduit system will be acceptable if connection box is bolted to motor frame. In other instances,provide grounding bushing on conduit and extend grounding conductor to a bolt on frame of motor. Where motor is part of apparatus, ground enclosure using connector furnished by manufacturer. Provide connector if none is furnished. D. At convenience receptacles, extend ground wire from grounding screw of receptacle to grounding connector of box. E. A code sized ground wire shall be provided in each feeder or branch circuit raceway installed on the Project. F. Connect branch circuit ground conductor to each luminair housing. 3.4 NEUTRAL CONDUCTORS A. For all new 120VAC single phase circuits,provide individual, separate neutral conductors. 3.5 INSTALLATION STANDARDS A. Run work at right angles and parallel to major building lines without diagonal runs,except run buried work in the most direct path. Provide neatly trained wiring with square bends and service loops at all terminal connections in panels, wireways, starters, and equipment. B. Conceal all work, except where specifically indicated or permitted to be run exposed. C. Conduit: 1. Securely support all conduit with uniformly spaced attachments. 2. Install all wiring in minimum '/z-inch size rigid metal conduit(RMC), intermediate metal conduit(IMC)or electric metallic tubing(EMT), subject to the restrictions of the NEC. 3. Use RMC for exterior exposed conduit runs, slab penetrations. 4. Use RMC or IMC for concealed outdoor conduit runs,interior exposed locations below 8 feet above finished floor,buried in concrete. 5. Use EMT for feeder and branch circuit runs above ceiling, in wall spaces, in exposed locations 8 feet above finished floor. 6. Use flexible conduit for equipment connections 24 inches limit, for lighting fixture connections from J-boxes, 6 feet limit and for connections to vibrating equipment, moveable equipment, and motors. 7. Do not install over four 90° bends in any one run. Provide pull boxes as needed. Aft Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion ELECTRICAL 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\16000NorthamptonMA.doc 16000-10 C. Coordinate with the Tenant Criteria for specific Landlord's requirements and local code requirements. 1. Integral Addressable Module(if required): Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble)to the fire alarm control panel. 2.19 TOILET ROOM EXHAUST FAN A. Fan unit furnished by Talbots(TFI) and installed/connected electrically under this Section. Exhaust duct work provided under Section 15500. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom. B. Materials and Components: Install level,plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, unless otherwise indicated. C. Equipment: Install to facilitate service,maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations. D. Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope. E. Coordinate work to minimize cutting and patching. F. Provide all work in clean and safe condition,ready for immediate operation and use. 3.2 LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION A. Update and correct all panelboard directories. Indicate all new,revised, and abandoned circuits. B. At completion of work, insert a new,typewritten panelboard directory in each panelboard receiving work and accurately show all conditions and circuits at time of completion of work. New directory shall be dated and labeled with name of subcontractor. C. Conductors: Label all circuit conductors with circuit numbers and panelboard designations [Examples: C3-IA (phase PWR), C#-1N(neutral)]. D. Panelboards: Provide mechanically attached engraved plastic labels with minimum /4-inch high white graphics on black background. Provide "Panel Name or Number"on first line and on second line provide "Voltage, Phase, Wire". Example: [Panel "X", 120/208 v - 3 p -4 W]. E. Circuit Numbers: Circuit numbers given in the Contract Documents are for reference only. Determine available circuits in the field after demolition. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion ELECTRICAL 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\I6000NorthamptonMA.doc 16000-9 C. Contactors shall be provided in NEMA 1 steel enclosures, factory finished with hinged doors with suitable hinges and latch,where indicated for individual mounting . D. Contactors shall be rated as specified on the drawings, inductive contact rating; operating coil voltage shall be required by the control system indicated. E. Contactors shall be of the single-coil, electrically operated,mechanically held type arranged for 3-wire control. Positive locking shall be obtained without the use of hoods, latches or semi-permanent magnets. ASCO 917 or equal with accessory#47 control module. F. Main contacts shall be silver-surfaced and shall be protected by arcing contacts and magnetic blowouts with arc barriers. Contacts shall be renewable from the front panel. 1. A manual operating lever shall be included. G. Momentary contact switch shall be ASCO#173A3 or equal. 2.17 DOOR CHIME SYSTEM A. Provide door chime system as indicated on the Drawings. B. All equipment shall be recessed mounted whenever allowed by field conditions. C. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering door chime systems that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Doorbell Pushbuttons -Nutone#PB 41GL or equal. 2. Chimes -Nutone#LB-14 or equal. 3. Transformer-Nutone 301T or equal. 2.18 HVAC DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS A. Duct smoke detectors shall be furnished and wired by electrical contractor and installed in the ductwork by HVAC contractor. Smoke detectors will be self-contained and shall shut down respective fan and provide local alarm upon smoke detection. B. All air supply systems of 2000 CFM or greater capacity require smoke detectors located in HVAC duct as indicated on Drawings. 1. Duct smoke detectors shall be a 24 VDC type with visual alarm and power indicators, and a reset switch. 2. Duct smoke detectors shall utilize photoelectric type detector operating on light scattering photodiode principle. Detector to be designed to ignore invisible airborne particles or smoke densities that are below factory set alarm point. 3. Self-Restoring: Detectors shall not require resetting or readjusting after actuation to restore them to normal operation. 4. Detector shall have an alarm LED visible through front cover. 5. UL listed to Standard 268A and shall be documented compatible with control equipment to which it is connected. 6. Smoke detectors will be self-contained and upon activation shall shut down respective supply fan and provide local alarm. 7. Provide test switch located in stockroom. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion ELECTRICAL 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\16000NorthamptonMA.doc 16000-8 D. Acceptable brands: Appleton, Hubbell, Steel City. 2.14 CONVENIENCE RECEPTACLES/LOCAL SWITCHES/SPECIAL SWITCHES A. Convenience receptacles products of Hubbell No. 5362, Leviton or Pass & Seymour. 1. Type: Duplex, 2 pole, 3 wire, with U slot ground. 2. Construction: Heavy duty, totally enclosed back, specification grade. 3. Contacts: 15 amp,phosphor bronze, double wiping. 4. Body: Phenolic with nylon face, color as indicated below. B. Provide local switch products of Hubbell No. 1221 or 1223 (refer to Drawing), Leviton or Pass& Seymour. 1. Construction: Specification grade,20A at 120/277V. 2. Type: Flush,quiet,AC,totally enclosed brush tumbler. 3. Wiring type: Side or back. 4. Color as indicated below. C. Receptacle face and switch handle color 1. Color: White 2. When located on a maple wall -Color: ivory D. Cover plates 1, Color: White 2. When located on a maple wall -Maple(Wood). 3. When located on a wallcovered wall -Wall covering under Section 09950. E. Special Timer Switches in Toilet Rooms 1. Model FLD 60 as manufactured by Fantech(800)747-1762. 2. Special switch for light and fan with off delay timer for fan. 3. Wire lights to direct switch terminal and fan motor to time delay terminal so that only fan remains on when switch is turned to off position. 4. Timer is adjustable from 0 to 60 minutes..ADJUST IN FIELD FOR 5 MINUTE FAN DELAY.- F. Dedicated Duplex Receptacle/Surge Suppressor for computer and P.O.S. service. 1. Catalog No. 5280, 15 amp, 2 outlet inwall protector,three prong grounded TVSS Duplex receptacle as manufactured Leviton Manufacturing Co. Inc. (800) 323-8920. 2. Color: orange. 2.15 TIME SWITCH—24 HOUR DIAL A. Existing to remain. 2.16 AUTOMATIC CONTACTORS A. Contactors shall be manufactured by Automatic Switch Company, R.C. Russell Co., Square D Co.,General Electric Co. or approved equal. B. Panelboards and/or multiple branch circuits shall be arranged for control by automatic contactor, where indicated on the drawings. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion ELECTRICAL 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\16000NorthamptonMA.doc 16000-7 J. Panelboards shall be as manufactured by General Electric, Westinghouse,ITE Siemens, Gould or Square D. 2.11 HEAVY-DUTY FUSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Provide products of Square D or General Electric. 2.12 CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Provide breakers to match existing manufacturer and catalog number. B. Circuit breakers shall be molded case, thermal magnetic type with bolted connections to the bus. The number and size of single, double, and three-pole circuit breakers indicated on the drawings shall be provided. The design of the structure shall be such that the units may be removed without disturbing adjacent sections,bus structure, or insulation. Circuit breakers shall be NRTL listed and labeled for use with 75°C conductor ampacities. C. Circuit breakers used for switching shall be type "SWD". Circuit breakers for HVAC equipment shall be type "HACR". D. Automatic tripping shall be indicated by handle automatically assuming a position between the manual "OFF" and "ON" positions. The individual breakers shall be calibrated and sealed to eliminate tampering or unauthorized changes in calibration. Breakers shall be interchangeable and capable of being operated in any position. Two and three-pole breakers shall be common trip type so that an overload on one pole will trip all poles simultaneously. All circuit breakers with trip sizes larger than 100 ampere rating shall have interchangeable trips. No handle bar ties will be allowed on multi-pole circuit breakers to accomplish either manual or automatic tripping. E. All circuit breakers rated 125 Ampere to 600 Ampere feeding motors shall have adjustable magnetic trip units with a range 500%to 1000%(10%tolerance)of trip unit rating. F. The exact size of circuit breaker,to include minimum interrupting ratings, for each panelboard shall be determined from the panel schedules on the drawings. Each circuit breaker shall be fully rated for the indicated short circuit current. Series rating acceptable only where specifically indicated. 2.13 BOXES A. Pull and Junction Boxes: Provide with removable, full access covers. For wet locations installation use weatherproof type. Junction boxes in metal stud partitions: minimum size 4- 11/16 inches square by 1-1/2 inches deep. Junction boxes installed above suspended ceiling minimum size 4-11/16 inches square by 2-1/8 inch deep. B. Outlet and Switch Boxes: Fabricated from galvanized steel sheet. All outlets shall have their own independent outlet box. Minimum size of outlet box to be 4" square by 1-1/2 inches deep. Exact size of outlet box to be determined according to the maximum number of conductors in the box per N.E.C. Article 370 - Section 6. C. Floor Outlet Boxes: Furnish with compatible accessories, including gaskets, finish floor plates, device mounting plates and covers. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion ELECTRICAL 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\16000NorthamptonMA.doc 16000-6 inside of the door. All directory cards shall be properly filled in, using a typewriter and indicating areas and devices served by each unit. C. New circuit breakers added to existing panelboards shall be the same frame size and ampere interrupting capacity as the existing panelboard and circuit breakers of similar ampacity. Circuit breakers used for switching duty shall be Type "SWD". Circuit breakers used for HVAC equipment shall be Type "HACR". 2.10 NEW PANELBOARDS - LIGHTING,POWER AND DISTRIBUTION A. Panelboards shall be of the dead-front type manufactured in accordance with the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Standard for panelboards and enclosing cabinets and NRTL labeled. B. Panelboards shall be suitable for 120/208 volts, three phase, four wire operation as scheduled on the contract Drawings. C. Interiors shall have copper bus bars with mains arranged for a grounded solid-neutral system with lugs only in the mains or main breakers as indicated. Panelboard shall be suitable for use with 75°C conductor ampacities. D. In addition to the neutral bus,panelboards shall have a separate equipment ground bus and terminal strip. Neutral bus shall be insulated from the panel enclosure. Provide separate, isolated and insulated ground bus where indicated. E. Each panelboard, as a complete unit, shall have a short circuit current rating equal to or greater than the integrated equipment rating indicated on the panel schedule or on the plans. F. Branch circuit numbering is for identification and circuit grouping and is not intended to designate connecting sequence. The Contractor is responsible for a proper load balance at each panel G. Panelboard cabinets shall be fabricated from code gauge galvanized sheet steel and fumished with either flush or surface trim. Trims shall be finished in gray enamel paint over a rust- inhibiting prime coat. A turned edge shall be provided around the front of the box for rigidity and attachment of the front. Wiring gutters shall be in accordance with the Electrical Code. Trims shall be fitted with hinged doors having combination lock and latch, with all locks keyed alike. A directory holder with clear plastic or glass plate and metal frame shall be mounted on the inside of each door. A neatly typed directory properly identifying each circuit shall be provided in the holder. Panelboards shall be so mounted that the distance from finish floor to the top of the enclosure does not exceed 6 feet,6 inches. Provide engraved mechanically attached nameplates on each panel. H. If aluminum conductors are used,the Contractor must provide panelboards capable of accommodating the larger bolt-on compression type lugs as hereinbefore specified. L Panelboards shall have permanently mounted circuit identification numbers, with odd numbers on the left and even numbers on the right. Numbers shall be consecutive, starting from one. Each pole shall have a unique number. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion ELECTRICAL 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:NISSY\05132\specs\I6000NorthamptonMA.doc 16000-5 E. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit and Fittings shall be per UL 360. Fittings shall be specifically approved for use with this type of raceway. F. Conduit for computer and P.O.S. lines shall be a minimum of I inch. G. Acceptable Brands: Allied,AFC, Wheatland. 2.5 WIREWAYS A. Provide with removable covers and sides, furnish couplings, offsets, end caps and other fittings as required for complete system. B. Acceptable Brands: Square D, Hoffman. 2.6 DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Provide NEMA KS-1, general-duty or heavy-duty industrial type,horsepower rated, fused or non-fused, as indicated on the Drawings. B. Enclosure: NEMA 1 type for dry interior use,NEMA 3R type where exposed to weather or in wet locations. C. Acceptable brands: Square D,General Electric. 2.7 FUSES A. Provide non-renewable cartridge type,UL-listed, interrupting rating of 200,000 amperes RMS,rated 600 volt, class RK1, dual-element,time-delay current limiting. B. Sizes: Sizes shown are for disconnect switches and combination starters, and are based on design motor horsepower. Review equipment data plates and provide heavy-duty fuses with size recommended by equipment manufacturer. C. Acceptable Manufacturers: Bussman or Gould-Shawmut. 2.8 MOTOR STARTERS A. Manual Starters: Toggle-switch operated starter with thermal overload protection in each phase. B. Acceptable Brands: Square D, General Electric. 2.9 EXISTING PANELBOARDS -LIGHTING,POWER AND DISTRIBUTION A. The existing panelboards are suitable for 208/120 volts, 3 phase,4 wire operation as previously installed. B. Where connections are made in existing panelboards,the panel index shall be revised to indicate the new loads served. All existing panelboards that do not have a circuit directory card mounted in a frame with noncombustible plastic cover shall have one installed on the Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion ELECTRICAL 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\16000NorthamptonMA.doc 16000-4 C. All materials and equipment shall meet requirements of the latest standards of NEMA, UL, ICEA, ANSI, and IEEE. Equipment shall have components required or recommended by OSHA, applicable NFPA documents and shall be UL approved and labeled. 2.2 CONDUCTORS -FEEDERS AND BRANCH CIRCUITS A. Provide stranded copper wire, soft drawn,annealed, 98%conductivity,rated 600 volts. B. Insulation: 1. In wet or damp locations use Type THWN or XHHW. 2. In all other locations unless shown otherwise on drawings use Type THWN,THHN or XHHW. C. Metal clad cable (Type MC), 600 volt copper conductors with THWN-THHN insulation and full size insulated green jacket grounding conductor-use as permitted by state and local codes. D. Color coding: Conductors#6 AWG or smaller-continuously, conductors larger than#6 AWG-can be marked with colored tape at connections. E. Minimum Wire Size: #12 AWG for power and lighting, except use#10 AWG for 20 AMP, 120V home runs over 75 feet to first outlet from panel. F. Acceptable Brands: Okonite, Cablec,Brand-Rex, Royal, American, Pirelli,Tri angle,Rome, or Kerite. look G. Splicers and Connectors: Provide products of 3M, Burrndy, Anderson,or AMP. 2.3 CONDUCTORS -LOW TENSION WIRING A. Provide color coded,solid copper wire,rated 600 volts. B. Minimum Size: 1. Circuits at 120 Volt AC-#14 AWG. 2. Circuits at 24 Volt AC or DC-as required by system manufacturer. C. Acceptable Brands: Belden or Alpha. 2.4 CONDUIT AND RACEWAY A. Rigid Metal Conduit(RMC) shall be galvanized steel in accordance with ANSI C80.1. B. Intermediate Metal Conduit(IMC) shall be per UL-1242. C. Electric Metallic Tubing(EMT)and Fittings: shall be per ANSI C80.3, and shall have compression fittings for 2-1/2" and smaller conduit. Set screw or compression connectors may be used for larger than 2-1/2"conduit. D. Flexible Metal Conduit: shall be per UL-1,zinc-coated steel. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion ELECTRICAL 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\16000NorthamptonMA.doc 16000-3 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings with general construction work and arrange in building structure during progress of construction to facilitate the electrical installations that follow. B. Coordinate electrical service connections to components furnished by utility companies. 1. Coordinate installation and connection of exterior underground and overhead utilities and services, including provision for electricity-metering components. 2. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and of utility company providing electrical power and other services. C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are concealed by finished surfaces. Access doors and panels are specified in Section 08305 Access Doors. 1.6 OWNER INSTRUCTION A. The work if this section includes providing Talbots and Landlord personnel with detailed walk-through description of all electrical work and entire system; detailed instruction about proper inspection, maintenance, and operation of all parts of the work; and a complete review of Operation and Maintenance Manuals for all equipment and systems. 1.7 WARRANTIES A. All materials, equipment,and work furnished under this Section shall be guaranteed against all defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year commencing with the date of turnover. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage, corrosion,construction traffic and other causes. C. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing and protecting during installation. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All equipment and materials required for installation under this specification shall be new, except where an existing item is specifically indicated to be reused. B. All equipment of one type (such as disconnect switches, etc.) Shall be the products of one manufacturer. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion ELECTRICAL 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\16000NorthamptonMA.doc 16000-2 SECTION 16000 ELECTRICAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 General Requirements. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all material,labor,equipment and supplies, and perform all operations to furnish a complete fully functional Electrical system in full compliance with applicable codes and as shown on the Drawings and specifications including but not limited to the following:. 1. Installation of Owner furnished luminaries. 2. Rough-in and conduit system with pullwire for telephone, computer data (P.O.S.), security and sound systems. 3. Final connection of all electrically connected equipment and systems. 4. Temporary lighting for the duration of construction. B. Secure and pay for all necessary licenses, inspections, certificates,permits,insurance, documents and any other charges required for execution of work under this section. Give all requisite notices C. Renovation Areas: 1. Modify and extend existing services to accommodate new work. Relocate existing components as required to facilitate new system. 2. Prior to beginning installation of electrical work, examine work in place and conditions under which electric work will be installed. 3. Report discrepancies to the Construction Project Manager before disturbing existing installation. 1.3 DESIGN CRITERA AND QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with latest editions of state and local Electrical Code, National Electrical Code, NFPA 101 Life Safety Code and OSHA regulations. The most restrictive shall govern. B. All material and equipment shall meet the requirements of the latest standards of NEMA,UL, ICEA,ANSI and IEEE. Equipment shall have components required or recommended by OSHA, applicable NFPA documents and shall be UL(CSA in Canada)approved and labeled. 1.4 SERVICE INTERRUPTIONS A. If required, schedule all system shutdowns through the Landlord. Provide at least three days advance notice and pay all fees as required by Landlord. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion ELECTRICAL 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29,2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\16000NorthamptonMA.doc 16000-1 3.3 Interface with Other Work look A. Communicating Modem: 1. Talbots separate telephone contractor shall be responsible for installing a dedicated phone line with an RJ-I 1 jack at the telephone panel board. Site G.C. shall be responsible for conduit if required. 2. G.C. field installer shall install the communicating modem on the telephone panel board and connect the communicating modem to the phone jack. 3. Communicating Modem will require a G.0 provided dedicated 110 vac receptacle. B. Coordinate start-up with the site G. C., mechanical sub-contractor and EMCS Integrator. 3.4 SEQUENCE OF CONTROL A. Pre-programmed thermostats shall control HVAC equipment based on a preset program and remote sensors. 3.5 COMMISSIONING/REMOTE COMMISSIONING A. Talbots separate EMCS Integrator: 1. Integrator will be available on the pre determined date and time for participation in the commissioning process. During this process the Integrator will remotely connect to the EMS communicator through the dedicated analog phone line. 2. The Integrator will remotely: a. Cycle HVAC system fans on and off. b. Cycle heat on in each unit. C. Cycle cooling on in each unit. d. Cycle lock out relays(if applicable). 3. The Integrator will submit to the G.C. and to Talbots a copy of the final Commissioning Report. B. G.C./Field Installer: 1. Assist in the final remote commissioning operation. During this process all systems, will prove operation. Each system will be operated in any and all modes (occupied cooling, unoccupied cooling etc.). This work is to be completed before pre- substantial completion inspection,and will be performed in the presence of the HVAC sub-contractor. ---END OF SECTION--- Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation,Peites/Woman Expansion EMCS FOR HVAC SYSTEM 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\15950NorthamptonMA.doc 15950-7 3.2 INSTALLATION 404 A. Install all new components associated with the"Smart-Stat"EMCS system in accordance with installation drawings and these specifications. This includes but is not limited to any new or replacement sensors, modem, control cable B. Thermostats: 1. Existing thermostats will be removed and new"Smart-Stat"thermostats will be installed and wired by this contractor. 2. Thermostats are pre-calibrated at the EMCS integrator's shop and sent to the field ready for operation and do not require recalibration or adjustments for normal operations, air test and balance or any other reason. 3. Typically, all thermostats will be located in the Records Room/Manager's Office unless otherwise indicated. C. Control Cable Wiring: 1. Most installations will include re-using existing low voltage control wiring between HVAC units and thermostats and existing wiring between remote sensors and thermostats. All existing wire shall be inspected and shall be 18 gauge solid copper with no splices between components. 2. If required by local code, all new EMCS low voltage control cable connecting to either factory installed control terminal strips located on mechanical units, or connecting cable to field installed sensors, shall be run in conduit. a. Do not mix low voltage and high voltage conductors in the same conduit. No exceptions. Awl%, 3. Any new wires that are not required to be run in conduit, shall be neatly bundled and securely affixed to stationary points of attachments using wire ties or dedicated wire hangers. a. Any unprotected wires shall be run in a manner that reduces the risk of physical damage. 4. All wires shall be neatly labeled at both ends with self-adhesive numbers and/or letters. 5. Do not run low voltage and high voltage conductors in the same proximity to each other in order to eliminate the possibility of interference. 6. All sensor wires shall be separate servicing only one sensor per wire. D. Communicating Cable(E-Bus Cable): Wiring shall run from each thermostat to the next in series in a true "Daisy-Chain"configuration. The first thermostat in the series shall be wired to the FMCS Communicating Modem typically located at the telephone panel. E. Duct Sensors: Install duct mounted sensors in accordance with manufacturers instructions. 1. Main return air duct smoke detectors is not part of the EMCS system and not included in the work of this section. F. Outdoor Air Temperature Sensor: Mount at designated location and out of direct sunlight(see installation drawing). Make fittings watertight. G. Mount damper actuators and actuator linkages external of air flow. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Peites/Woman Expansion EMCS FOR HVAC SYSTEM 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\15950NorthamptonMA.doc 15950-6 G. Duct smoke detectors are provided by G.C. and specified in Section 15500. These detectors are not part of the EMCS system and function independently. H. 110 vac convenience outlet for modem located at telephone panel. I. Participation in remote startup and commissioning of HVAC-EMC system. 2.2 COMPONENTS AND SERVICES FURNISHED BY TALBOTS A. Selected Energy Control System components and services are provided by Talbots separate EMCS Contractor(Integrator)as listed on the Responsibility Schedule including but not limited to the following: B. Thermostats for HVAC Systems: 1. Units shall be in the Honeywell LCBS family. 2. Each thermostat will be provided addresses,labeled and configured with all associated components. C. Remote Sensors: 1. Air discharge temperature sensor(located in duct downstream of HVAC unit) 2. Space Humidity sensor. 3. Space temperature sensors. 4. Outside air temperature sensor(mount out of direct sunlight). 5. HVAC air discharge temperature sensor 6. Outside air temperature sensor(mount on building) 7. If temperature sensors are to be installed in locations other than those shown on the drawings,the Architect and/or his Engineer shall approve the new location. D. Communicating Cable (E-Bus Cable): Non-shielded,twisted-pair cable or other media recommended by manufacturer of Communication Processing Equipment.. 1. Approved Product: Honeywell AK3791. E. Communicating Modem and telephone jack. F. Participation of Integrator for remote startup of HVAC-EMCS equipment and systems. G. Components furnished by the Integrator will be set up and installed in a simulation test at the Integrator's facility prior to delivery to the site. Integrator shall calibrate, adjust and set controls for proper operation. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Examine existing construction and verify that existing conditions, such as substrates, dimensions, clearances, and adjoining construction, will permit HVAC system to be installed or modified as intended as shown in the Contract Documents. Notify Architect in writing if existing conditions will interfere with proper installation or performance of systems specified in this section. Do not proceed with work until such conditions have been corrected. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation,Peites/Woman Expansion EMCS FOR HVAC SYSTEM 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\15950NorthamptonMA.doc 15950-5 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 COMPONENTS AND SERVICES PROVIDED BY G.C. A. Field Supplied Conductors(Low voltage control cable): The following applies unless non-compliant with codes having local jurisdiction. Energy Management Control System Integrator must approve any changes. 1. Thermostat Cable (HVAC factory installed control terminal strips to thermostat): 12 conductors, 18AWG solid copper wire, insulated with high-density polyethylene. Conductors parallel enclosed in brown PVC jacket. (22 AWG cable not allowed). 2. Humidity Sensor Cable(Humidity sensor to thermostat): 4 conductors, 18AWG solid copper shielded cable, insulated with high-density polyethylene. Conductors parallel enclosed in brown PVC jacket (22 AWG cable not allowed). 3. Remote Space Temperature Sensor Cable(Remote space temperature sensor to thermostat): 4 conductors, 18AWG solid copper shielded cable, insulated with high- density polyethylene. Conductors parallel enclosed in brown PVC jacket(22 AWG cable not allowed). 4. Remote Discharge Air Temperature Sensor Cable (Remote discharge temperature sensor to thermostats): 4 conductors, 18 AWG solid copper shielded cable, insulated with high density polyethylene. Conductors parallel enclosed in brown PVC jacket (22 AWG cable not allowed). 5. Outdoor Air Temperature Cable(remote temperature sensor to thermostat): 4 conductors, 18AWG solid copper shielded cable, insulated with high density polyethylene. Conductors parallel enclosed in brown PVC jacket(22 AWG cable not allowed). 6. Lock out relay cables(lockout relay to EMCS control panel): 4 conductors, 18AWG solid copper wire, insulated with high-density polyethylene. Conductors parallel enclosed in brown PVC jacket(22 AWG cable not allowed). 7. Special component cable: as detailed on control drawings. B. Renovation Areas: 1. Existing store projects scheduled to receive a retro-fit HVAC-EMCS system("Smart- Stats")will typically have installed control wiring from the existing thermostats to the HVAC units. Site G.C. will verify in field the compatibility of the existing wiring with the new EMCS system and modify as required. 2. Provide conduits as required. C. Connectors: Insulated crimp connectors for all non-moisture applications. In any application where moisture will be present, 3M UR type, silicone filled connections shall be used. D. Conduit: As specified in Section 16000. E. HVAC Control Installation: As specified in Section 15500. F. Damper Actuators: 1. Electric type equipped for Class I wiring. 2. Shall not consume power during UNOCCUPIED cycle or use chemicals or expandable media. 3. Have built in spring return. 4. Approved Product: Honeywell Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation, Peites/Woman Expansion EMCS FOR HVAC SYSTEM 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\15950NorthamptonMA.doc 15950-4 1.6 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. Talbots EMCS Integrator: 1. Talbots will award a separate contract for the furnishing selected Energy Management Control System devices/components and services required for remote commissioning of the Energy Management Control System as indicated in the responsibility schedule shown on the drawings. 2. EMCS Integrator: RETEC,East Walpole, MA, (888) 849-9944. Contact: Glenn Stowers. 3. Services performed by Talbots separate Energy Management Control System Integrator shall be at Talbots' expense. 4. Site G.C. shall cooperate fully with the Owner's separate Energy Management Control System Integrator so that work under that contract may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying Work under the G.C.'s Contract. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Site G.C. shall coordinate with Talbots separate EMCS Integrator for required Work. B. Site G.C. shall coordinate with Talbots HVAC Maintenance Contractor(First Service Networks)for required inspections and tests as indicated in Section 15500. C. EMCS interface terminal boards will be factory installed in HVAC equipment and will be provided with the associated equipment. D. HVAC equipment will include factory installed and pre-wired control terminal strips used in ' conjunction with the EMCS system. E. Coordinate HVAC,Electrical, and EMCS work with all work of other trades and with all related and adjacent work. F. Coordinate location of thermostats, and other exposed control sensors with plans and room details before installation. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All EMCS components that are furnished by Talbots' EMCS Integrator,will be shipped from the Integrators facility directly to the project site. B. Protect material from damage during storage on site. 1.9 EQUIPMENT COMMISSIONING A. The G.C. and his EMCS installation contractor shall require their respective installation contractor foremen to participate on-site for a minimum of 4 hours on the date scheduled for the commissioning of the EMCS and HVAC systems. This commissioning will be prescheduled by the General Contractor at least one week in advance,and all effected equipment shall be 100% operational before final commissioning. The General Contractor shall coordinate the actual time for such commissioning. 1. The Talbots CPM shall be invited and advised of the actual date of commissioning. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Peites/Woman Expansion EMCS FOR HVAC SYSTEM 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\15950NorthamptonMA.doc 15950-3 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Energy Management Control system consists of pre-programmed thermostats, associated sensors, communicating modem to monitor and control HVAC mechanical systems specified in Section 15500. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals by Talbots Integrator: 1. Integrator will provide a complete set of site-specific installation drawings for the General Contractor's and field installer's use. 2. Drawings will detail site conditions based on the mechanical HVAC and electrical engineering drawings. 3. HVAC Energy Management Control System Commissioning Report. 4. Warranty for control equipment. B. Submittals by site G.C.: 1. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01001. 2. Installer Certificate: Submit two(2) weeks prior to construction start date, documentation signed by the General Contractor certifying that the EMCS installer is one of the following Honeywell supported partners. a. Honeywell-Automation Control Specialist(ACS) b. Honeywell-Commercial Comfort&Energy Specialist(CCES) C. Honeywell Authorized Control Integrator(ACI). 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installation of the control system must be preformed by a certified Honeywell CCES,ACS or ACI contractor. 1. Installer Qualifications: Installer must have a working knowledge of LCBS control systems, and be authorized by Honeywell in the Honeywell LCBS energy management control systems. 2. Installer must have field experience and installed a minimum of 5 LCBS systems and submit copies of credentials 3. A reference list of contractors may be obtained from system Integrator,RETEC. Using an installer/Contractor on the referral list in no way releases the G.C. from any and all qualification assurances or installation liabilities. The reference is for informational purposes only. RETEC assumes no responsibility or liability for contractors on the reference list. B. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems." C. Comply with ASHRAE 135 for DDC System Components. D. Electrical Components,Devices, and Accessories provided by G.C.: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100,by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,and marked for intended use. E. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems." Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Peites/Woman Expansion EMCS FOR HVAC SYSTEM 34 Bridge Street, Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\15950NorthamptonMA.doc 15950-2 SECTION 15950 ENERGY MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC SYSTEM (SMART STATS) PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 General Requirements. B. Section 15500—HVAC C. Section 16000 -ELECTRICAL 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide selected components and the installation of the Talbots furnished Energy Management Control System(EMCS) that will monitor and control the HVAC system equipment only. The system includes but is not limited to the following: 1. Installation of pre-programmed thermostats. 2. Installation of remote temperature sensors(space,outdoor,duct) 3. Installation of communicating cable and modem. 4. Duct zone dampers and actuating devices. 5. Participation for the on-site and remote commissioning of the HVAC-EMCS system. 6. All interconnection control system wiring(low voltage)and conduits from mechanical equipment and thermostats to control panel connection point. 7. Modifications to internal individual unit wiring, if required for interfacing with the control system shall be included. B. Selected Energy ManalZement Control Systems equipment and components identified in these specifications and on the Project Drawings are designated to be as furnished by Talbots Separate Contractor("InteLrator')and installed by the site G.C's Honeywell- Commercial Comfort& Energy Specialist(CCES)subcontractor. The balance of the items required to complete the HVAC-EMCS system shall be as provided by the G.C. C. Secure and pay for all necessary licenses,inspections,certificates,permits,insurance, documents and any other charges required for execution of work under this section. Give all requisite notices. D. The Contractor shall visit site that is being renovated prior to submitting bid price. Verify all existing conditions, locations of tie-ins and review new and existing work required. The Contractor shall notify Talbots Store Planning Manager of any discrepancies between existing conditions and new work shown on construction documents. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation, Peites/Woman Expansion EMCS FOR HVAC SYSTEM 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\15950NorthamptonMA.doc 15950-1 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Products: provided by Talbots separate air distribution system cleaning Contractor. B. Air Duct Encapsulation (ADE)treatment if required to encapsulate any trace dust within the system: provided by Talbots separate air distribution system cleaning Contractor. C. Replacement Filters: Furnished by Talbots. 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. Agitation equipment, vacuum collection equipment, and protective coverings necessary to clean the air distribution system: provided by Talbots separate air distribution system cleaning Contractor. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Site General Contractor shall prepare area and provide access to HVAC system. B. Talbots separate air distribution system cleaning Contractor shall cover all merchandize, clothing, and displays with plastic. 3.2 APPLICATION A. Talbots separate air distribution system cleaning Contractor shall clean all supply and return air ducts, grilles,registers,and diffusers. 1. Air Handling Units: a. Clean and vacuum all existing air handling units. b. Replace filters furnished by Owner. C. Apply Duct&Vent Cleaning of America, Inc. furnace sticker to air handling unit with next scheduled cleaning date. 3.3 TEMPORARY PROTECTION A. In active sales,back room and storage areas where duct cleaning work is being performed, Talbots separate air distribution system cleaning Contractor shall protect merchandise, flooring and fixtures with drop cloths. Any dirt, dust or mess made from the duct cleaning shall be cleaned prior to leaving the site for the day. Duct cleaning Contractor shall provide their own cleaning materials,ie: vacuum, cleaning fluids, etc. ---END OF SECTION --- Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM CLEANING 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29,2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\15890NorthamptonMA.doc 15890-2 SECTION 15890 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM CLEANING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 General Requirements. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Preparation of HVAC system, or portions of HVAC system scheduled for cleaning work, including but not limited to the following: 1. Existing supply and return ductwork. 2. Existing grilles and diffusers. 3. Existing air handling units. 1.3 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. The Owner will award a separate contract for the cleaning of HVAC ducts as indicated on the drawings and responsibility schedule. B. Site G.C. shall cooperate fully with the Owner's separate air distribution system cleaning contractor so that work under that contract may be carried out smoothly,without interfering with or delaying Work under the G.C.'s Contract. C. Air Distribution System Cleaning Work shall be performed by Duct&Vent Cleaning of America, Inc., West Springfield,MA, (800)442-8368. 1.4 COORDINATION, SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Air distribution system cleaning contractor shall coordinate with Talbots'Maintenance Contractor and HVAC contractor for scheduling the cleaning of the existing air distribution system. B. All work shall be performed and completed after normal store operating hours. C. If required, schedule all system shutdowns through the Landlord. Provide at least three days advance notice and pay all fees as required by Landlord. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Air distribution system shall be cleaned to NADCA(National Air Duct Cleaning Association) Standards. Talbots Store No.335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM CLEANING 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29,2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\15890NorthamptonMA.doc 15890-1 3.10 HVAC MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT A. The Owner(Talbots) shall contract directly with their preferred Maintenance Contractor to provide a service and maintenance agreement. --- END OF SECTION --- Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion H.V.A.C. 34 Bridge Street, Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\15500NorthamptonMA.doc 15500-15 3.7 INSULATION A. Thermal Insulation for ductwork: 1. Supply air ductwork shall be insulated on outside with 1-1/2 inch thick fiberglass insulation with vapor barriers. 2. Insulation shall be adhered to duct. Adhesive shall be applied in 6-inch wide strips 12 inches on center. Butt all edges of all insulation and seal all joints of vapor seal insulation with tape of same material as vapor seal applied with adhesive specified to provide a continuous vapor seal. On the bottom of ducts 24 inches and wider, stick clips shall be installed 10 to 14 inches on centers. Seal all holes for stick clips with tape and adhesive as specified to provide a continuous vapor seal. B. Refrigerant piping Insulation: 1. Cover all refrigerant suction piping with 1-inch thick insulation and all condensation drainage piping with '/2 inch thick insulation. 2. Insulation shall be slit and snapped on pipe and fittings fabricated of mitered sections of pipe insulation. 3. All joints, slits and seams shall be sealed with approved contact adhesive to provide a continuous vapor seal. 4. Coat all insulation that is exposed or that is outdoors with two(2)coats of Armstrong Armaflex Coating to provide a protective finish. 3.8 TESTING AND BALANCING-SITE G.C. A. All space conditioning and ventilation systems shall be balanced to the quantities indicated on the Drawings in accordance with the National Environmental Balancing Bureau(NEBB) Procedural Standards, or Associated Air Balance Council (AABC)National Standards. B. Fully test HVAC work in presence of authorities having jurisdiction,Talbots Construction Project Manager,Talbots Maintenance Contractor and Landlord. Comply with requirements of local building Inspectors. In malls and other locations where the supply air is being provided by the Landlord's system,provide measurement of air flow and verify that Landlord assigned CFM is being provided. C. Engage an independent, certified air balancing contractor. 1. Perform the air balancing, including testing and adjustment of each diffuser and register. Submit complete balancing report for approval. 2. Report test results in format acceptable to Talbots and certify that tests have been made and is approved by local authorities. All air quantities shall be balanced to within f5%of design values. 3. Correct all deficiencies resulting from testing and balancing at no additional cost to Talbots. 3.9 CLEANING A. Clean out all duct systems. Thoroughly clean and polish all equipment and visible HVAC work. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion H.V.A.C. 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\15500NorthamptonMA.doc 15500-14 C. Suspended mechanical units: 1. Suspend units from structural support frame using threaded steel rods and spring hangers. D. Hangers: 1. Attach hangers directly to building structure. Provide all miscellaneous metal framing as needed to by-pass obstructions such as duct work and equipment. Space hangers not over 6 feet on center. 2. Coordinate exact location of equipment with existing conditions and structural components. Provide all additional steel support, angle iron,welding, etc. necessary for a stable and substantial installation. 3. Where materials and equipment are to be hung from the overhead structure such mounting shall be approved in writing by the landlord's structural engineer. 4. All hanger rods shall be hung from inserts in concrete or from I-beam clamps on steel beams. Clamps shall have retaining clips and locknut. If inserts have not been provided,hangers shall be through bolted or cinch or slug-in expansion bolts may be used with the permission of the Landlord. Where support points are required between available inserts or to avoid the work of existing ductwork piping and equipment,provide a system of spanning channels and angles. No part of any equipment or any part of the building shall be stressed. 5. Hangers and supporting steel shall be hung from the top chord of joist system. E. Drawings are often diagrammatic. Locate work to accommodate field conditions and where approved by Talbots before installation. F. Provide all hardware, connections, and anchors needed. Attach wall mounted work with not less than 3/8-inch diameter expansion bolts. Attach floor and overhead mounted work with minimum %2-inch diameter expansion bolts. Do not use wooden plugs. G. Provide temporary caps and seals for piping and ductwork and cover equipment to prevent entrance of dirt, debris,and obstructions. Protect all work from damage. H. Cutting and Patching: Provide all cutting and patching required for work. No structural members may be cut without prior approval. 3.6 DUCTWORK A. Low pressure ductwork and fittings shall be made tight for minimum air leakage. Duct tape shall not be used to seal joints to make transitions or for any other reason on the outside of wrapped insulation. B. Install ductwork as high as possible. C. Support flexible ductwork with adequate hangers to relieve strain on any fittings. Unnecessary bends, sags, twists, etc., will not be allowed. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion H.V.A.C. 34 Bridge Street, Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\15500NorthamptonMA.doc 15500-13 3.3 REMOVAL AND RELOCATION WORK A. Remove all piping and ductwork connected to items removed and relocated. Piping shall be capped at mains or reconnected to new piping as indicated. B. Remove all existing mechanical equipment and materials not required for operation of new mechanical systems. C. Any item to be relocated shall be completely dismantled, cleaned,damaged parts replaced with new, and generally put in first class working condition. 3.4 RECONDITIONING OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT A. All existing HVAC equipment to be reused and reconditioned shall be as noted and specified. Provide all work to clean,repair, and/or replace components to first class operating condition. Provide a full one year warranty on all work performed. B. The work performed to recondition the units shall be done by a certified HVAC Service Contractor. All work performed shall be guaranteed for one year. Provide the following testing, adjusting and maintenance as required,but not limited to the following: 1. Clean the inside of the unit entirely. 2. Replace evaporator coils. 3. Clean condenser coil thoroughly with pressure wash of industrial detergent and water. 4. Check and test all refrigerant components including compressors,condenser fans, evaporator fans,motors, expansion valves, filter driers, etc. Replace all defective , components. 5. Check and test the refrigerant low side and high pressures and compare to the normal operating pressure on this system. 6. Check and test the operation of all heating and cooling coils,measure air supply temperature during cooling and heating cycle,and compare to the units capacity. 7. Check and test all controls, safeties, limits, etc. Replace all defective components. 8. Provide new air filters 30 percent efficiency panel filters. 9. Provide a full written typed report on the existing condition of the unit including all test data recorded,replaced or repaired parts,balancing and adjusting performed and submit to Talbots Store Planning and Design for Engineer review. 3.5 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate HVAC work with all work of other trades and with all related and adjacent work. In cases of conflict,piping requiring slope has right-of-way. Coordinate work to minimize cutting and patching. 2. All work at roof shall be coordinated with Landlord's roofing contractor to protect/maintain any warrantees in place. 3. Minimize cutting and patching. Cooperation with Utilities and Landlord is mandatory. B. Thermostats/Sensors 1. Install wall-mounting thermostats,remote sensors and switch controls in electrical outlet boxes at 5'-0"A.F.F. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion H.V.A.C. 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\15500NorthamptonMA.doc 15500-12 C. Drain pans shall be positively sloped for condensate to gravity drain. 1. Size pan to extend four inches beyond the outer most edges of the mechanical unit above on all four sides. 2. Pan shall have a minimum depth of 2 inches. D. The following applies to drain pans that cannot be sloped to gravity drain: 1. Size pan to extend four inches beyond the outer most edges of the mechanical unit above on all three sides. The fourth side shall extend out enough to accommodate both the drain outflow and the installation of a low profile condensate pump. 2. Automatic condensate pump shall be of low profile configuration and must have safety float switch. Unit shall be Hartell Model No. KL20XIUL or similar. 3. Pan shall have a minimum depth of 2 inches. E. Support drain pans with unistrut system(or equal) and threaded rod in a manner to maintain shape when water is present. F. Drain pans shall have auxiliary float switch installed and wired to shut down the mechanical unit. Adjust to '/z-inch water level. G. Condensate drain line size shall be 3/4"or as otherwise indicated on Drawings. Drain to be trapped with a trap depth of 1.5 x unit's total static pressure, minimum 2"deep. 1. Route condensate piping to the floor drain or as directed by Engineer. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Examine existing construction and verify that existing conditions,such as substrates, dimensions, clearances, and adjoining construction, will permit HVAC system to be installed or modified as intended as shown in the Contract Documents. Notify Architect in writing if existing conditions will interfere with proper installation or performance of systems specified in this section. Do not proceed with work until such conditions have been corrected. 3.2 EXISTING EQUIPMENT A. Those existing HVAC equipment, fixtures, services and equipment in building which have been designated to remain shall not generally require any new work unless otherwise specified or noted on the Drawings. Where no changes are indicated in certain rooms and areas,it is intended that any existing fixtures that may be in these rooms will remain whether they are shown or not. B. At all existing fixtures and equipment which are intended to remain,the present ductwork shall be reconnected to the new ductwork systems whenever the present ductwork becomes disconnected in the new work, whether shown or not,so the ductwork systems in the building will be completely,and at all times, operable in a manner satisfactory to the Architect and Owner. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion H.V.A.C. 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\15500NorthamptonMA.doc 15500-11 2. Duct housing mounted directly to outside of duct with a sampling tube extended across duct to sample air movement. , 3. Duct housing couplings slotted to insure proper alignment of sampling and exhaust tubes. 4. Detector shall have an alarm LED visible through front cover. 5. UL listed to Standard 268A and shall be documented compatible with control equipment to which it is connected. 6. Provide 8-inch square access door with rubber gasket in duct approximately 2-feet upstream from smoke detector for testing and servicing. T HVAC contractor shall furnish the necessary duct openings and installation of the duct smoke detectors. C. Coordinate with the Tenant Criteria for specific Landlords requirements and local code requirements. 2.13 EQUIPMENT SUPPORT A. HVAC Contractor shall provide supplemental supporting steel framing as required for hanging HVAC components. 1. Provide bolted metal framing, slotted type channels, struts, fittings,related accessories and supports that are not a part of the structural framework as necessary to complete the Work. 2. Channel members and fittings shall be fabricated from structural grade steel. a. Channel Thickness: Selected to suit structural loading. b. Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as channel supports. 3. Set framing and strut system components into final position true to line,level and plumb. 4. Anchor material firmly in place. Tighten all connections to their recommended torque. 5. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering bolted framing and strut systems that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to, the following: a. Unistrut Metal Framing System by Unistrut Corporation. b. Power-Strut by Allied Support Systems (800)416-2101. C. GlobeStrut by Globe Strut Products(800) 582-3646. d. B-Line Strut System by Cooper B-Line (618) 654-2184. 2.14 TOILET ROOM EXHAUST FAN A. Fan unit furnished by Talbots(TFI) and installed and connected electrically under Section 16000. Exhaust duct work provided under this Section. 2.15 SECONDARY DRAIN PANS, PUMPS AND FLOAT SWITCHES A. Provide a"Secondary" (Auxiliary) drain pan and associated accessory items located below existing and new mechanical units as identified on Drawings. B. Drain pans to be fabricated from galvanized sheet metal, of one-piece construction. Corners shall be soldered. 1. Minimum thickness of sheet metal shall be not less than 0.0276-inch. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion H.V.A.C. 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\15500NorthamptonMA.doc 15500-10 2.10 VIBRATION ELIMINATORS A. Furnish and install Mason Industries,Korfund,Peabody Kinetics,Vibration Eliminator Company, or Vibration Mounting Company vibration eliminators. Vibration isolators shall be selected to produce uniform deflection and loading even though the equipment weight is not evenly distributed. Vibration isolators shall be selected for the lowest operating speed of the equipment suspended on them. The isolators shall be single rubber-in-shear for static deflections of up to 1/4 inch; double rubber-in-shear for static deflections from 5/16 inch to inch; and spring type for static deflection above '/z inch. Spring isolators shall be free standing laterally stable type without a housing and shall have steel top plate and base plate welded to the spring and combined with two (2) layers of ribbed rubber separated by 16 gauge galvanized sheet glued to the base plate. The spring diameter shall not be less than the allowable compressed spring height. Springs with deflections of 2 inches or greater shall have neoprene limit stops. B. Suspended fans, fan units and fan sections of air conditioning units shall have structural steel rails fastened to the lower edge or upper edge as shown on the units or fans and the vibration isolators shall be installed in the hanger rods. This type of isolator shall be combination rubber-in-shear and springs with 1/4 inch static deflection in the rubber and 3/4 inch static deflection in the springs. 2.11 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL(ELECTRIC/ELECTRONIC) A. Provide all control wiring as specified in Section 15950. Thermostat communicating wiring will be furnished by Talbots Integrator and installed under this section. B. Thermostat assemblies for existing and new HVAC units shall be furnished by Talbots separate EMCS Integrator Contractor and will be specific to the Project. 1. If temperature sensors are to be installed in locations other than those shown on the drawings,the new location shall be verified by the Architect and/or his Engineer. C. Each HVAC unit shall be controlled by its own thermostat. Each unit's compressor or heating section shall cycle on/off to maintain space temperature setpoint. The fan shall run continuously during the occupied cycle. Each unit shall cycle during the unoccupied cycle to maintain the set back temperature for heating only. Refer to sequence of operations on drawings for further information. D. Thermostats and sensors shall be pre-programmed at the EMCS Integrators shop and will not require any field setting adjustments. E. Thermostats shall be permanently labeled by the EMCS Integrator as to unit/area serving. 2.12 DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS (Photoelectric detector used to de-energize unit) A. Duct smoke detectors shall be furnished,wired and connected under Division 16. B. All air supply systems of 2000 CFM or greater capacity require smoke detectors located in the return air duct upstream from filters and other equipment unless otherwise noted on Drawing. 1. Smoke detectors will be self-contained and shall shut down respective fan and provide local alarm upon smoke detection Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion H.V.A.C. 34 Bridge Street, Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\15500NorthamptonMA.doc 15500-9 C. Refrigerant service valves shall be designed for use with refrigerant used and shall have pressure ratings compatible with system working pressure encountered. Valves shall be packed,wing cap,non-rotating swivel seat disk valves as manufactured by either Henry or Mueller. D. Check valves shall be brass body suitable for refrigerant liquid or gas service as required by the system design operation. Valves shall be as manufactured by either Henry or Mueller. E. Filter dryer in the liquid line shall consist of a steel cylinder filled with a suitable desiccant that will not plug,cake,rust, channel or break down and shall remove both water and acid from the refrigerant. The dryer shall be constructed so that none of the desiccant will pass into the refrigerant lines. The filter dryer shall be replaceable core type "Catch-All" as manufactured by either Sporlan or Alco. F. Sight glasses shall be see through type with cover cap on each side. Sight glasses shall be provided in liquid line before each expansion valve. Sight glasses shall be "See All" combination moisture and liquid indicator as manufactured by either Sporlan or Alco. G. Hangers for refrigerant piping shall be I band type of copper plated steel. As an alternate, lead inserts may be used between the pipe and steel hangers. 2.9 INSULATION A. Ductwork insulation shall be as manufactured by Owens-Corning, Manville, Certainteed, Knauf or approved equal. B. Ductwork insulation shall have composite (insulation,jacket and adhesive)fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested by procedure ASTM E84,NFPA 255 and UL-723,not exceeding a flame spread of twenty five (25), fuel contribution of fifty(50)and smoke developed of fifty (50). C. Duct Thermal Insulation: 1. Insulation shall have a minimum density of one(1)pound per cubic foot. 2. Insulation and Vapor Seal Tape Adhesive: Foster No. 81-13 or Minnesota Mining EC-1329 or approved equal. 3. Vapor seal tape: same material vapor seal. D. Refrigeration Insulation 1. Insulation for all condensation drainage piping shall be flexible elastomeric thermal piping insulation similar and equal to Armaflex AP Pipe Insulation that meets 25 Flame spread and 50 Smoke-Developed ratings as tested by ASTM E84. 2. Joint adhesive: Armstrong 520 contact adhesive. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion H.V.A.C. 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\15500NorthamptonMA.doc 15500-8 E. Perforated ceiling return air grilles shall be of steel construction similar and equal to Titus PAR with removable perforated face. The return grille shall have the same face and border construction as the supply model. F. All return grilles shall be equal to return air registers without dampers Model 23RL. G. All flanges, frames,blades and diffusers exposed to view shall be painted factory standard white. All other surfaces shall be painted flat black. H. Registers and grilles type shall be as follows: RG-1: Titus Type 23RL with lay in Type 3 border panel mounted. RG-2: Titus Type 23RL with surface mounted with plaster mounting frame Model PF. 2.6 AIR HANDLER UNITS A. Air Handler Units as manufactured/supplied by Lennox Industries Inc shall be provided for this type equipment. No other manufacturer and/or supplier of this equipment will be acceptable. 1. Contact Lennox Industries National Accounts: 2100 Lake Park BLVD, Richardson, TX 75080. Attention—Talbots Account Administrator. Phone: (800)367-6285,Fax: (972)497-5112. Contact person: Ms. Monnie Morrow. 2.7 AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS A. Air Cooled Condensing Units as manufactured/supplied by Lennox Industries Inc shall be provided for this type equipment. No other manufacturer and/or supplier of this equipment will be acceptable. 1. Contact Lennox Industries National Accounts: 2100 Lake Park BLVD,Richardson, TX 75080. Attention—Talbots Account Administrator. Phone: (800) 367-6285,Fax: (972)497-5112. Contact person:Ms.Monnie Morrow. 2.8 REFRIGERANT PIPING AND ACCESSORIES A. Refrigerant piping shall be copper tubing Type "L",hard drawn cleaned,dehydrated and capped for refrigerant service conforming to ASTM B280. All fittings shall be wrought copper brazed joint type conforming to ANSI B16.22. All joints shall be made using a brazing alloy containing silver or using a copper-phosphorous alloy. Brazing alloys shall have a minimum of 1,100 degrees F melting temperature and shall conform to ASTM B260. B. Provide all pilot operated expansion valves, liquid solenoid valves, strainers, sight glasses with moisture indicators, silica gel dryers,purge valves,relief valves, service valves, shut off valves and all other accessories and appurtenances to provide a complete and properly functioning refrigerant system under all conditions of operation. Provide sufficient valves to enable system to be pumped down. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion H.V.A.C. 34 Bridge Street, Northampton,MA December 29,2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\15500NorthamptonMA.doc 15500-7 2.4 SUPPLY DIFFUSERS A. Provide diffusers as manufactured by Titus, Richardson Texas, as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Diffuser types shall be as follows: SD-1: Titus TDC (fixed discharge)border Type 3 (lay-in), ceiling module size 24 inch x 24 inch. Use with Model AG-125 double blade damper. Provide Model TRV throw reduction vanes where indicated on drawings. SD-2: Titus TDC (fixed discharge)border Type 1 (surface mount)and plaster mounting frame Model TRM. Use with Model AG-125 double blade damper. Provide Model TRV throw reduction vanes where indicated on drawings. SD-3: Titus 12x6 Aluminum supply grille model S30OFS direct spiral duct- mounted. Provide with 1-3/8"wide border and with optional air scoop damper, standard finish,unless noted otherwise. C. All square and rectangular supply air diffusers shall be of steel construction with removable cores and double blade air deflecting dampers full size of the neck size shown. All diffusers neck shall be as shown or as required to obtain the air diffusion pattern with portions of the neck blanked off to give the proper air distribution pattern and to limit the maximum neck velocity to 500 fpm. Provide with throw reduction vanes where indicated. D. Gypsum board ceilings: Provide "Surface mount" design diffusers with Type 1 Border. Install in plaster mounting frame Model TRM. E. Modular type acoustical tile ceilings: Provide "Lay-in" design diffusers with Type 3 Border. Use with module size steel pan with diffuser spot welded to the back surface of the pan. F. All flanges, frames,blades and diffusers exposed to view shall be painted factory standard white. All other surfaces shall be painted flat black. 2.5 RETURN REGISTERS AND GRILLES A. Provide Titus registers and grilles as shown on the drawings and as specified herein. B. All return registers shall be of steel construction Titus Type 23RL(3/4-inch horizontal face blade spacing,45 degree fixed deflection)with Model AG35 opposed blade key operated damper. C. All exhaust registers in ceilings other than Toilet Room exhaust shall be of steel construction Titus Type 15RL (/2-inch horizontal face blade spacing,0 degree fixed deflection)with Model AG35 opposed blade key operated damper. D. All registers and grilles to be mounted in gypsum board ceilings shall have plaster frames equal to Titus Model PF mounting frame. All register or grilles mounted in acoustical tile ceilings shall have Border Type 3 for lay-in. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion H.V.A.C. 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:NISSY\05132\specs\15500NorthamptonMA.doc 15500-6 to"k 1.12 PROJECT CLOSE-OUT A. Coordinate and arrange for a system checkout and approval by Talbots Maintenance Contractor prior to turnover. Replace and/or repair all system deficiencies found by Talbots Maintenance Contractor. Talbots Maintenance Contractor shall provide a signed checkout list for Talbots CPM. B. Coordinate with the HVAC Equipment Manufacturer and arrange for an operations and installation checkout by the Manufacturer's Field Representative. Coordinate, in advance, and notify Talbots CPM of schedule date and time which shall be prior to project turnover. Provide a signed check list from the Manufacturer's Field Representative following the completion of any required work. C. Refer to the "General Requirements" and Specification Section 01700 of the Project Manual for additional project close-out requirements. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Provide all new materials and equipment as specified herein. (Except where an existing item is specifically indicated to be reused). B. All existing ductwork to remain must be clearly shown and noted on floor plans. 2.2 LOW PRESSURE SHEET METAL DUCTWORK A. Fabricate from galvanized sheet steel in strict compliance with ASHRE Guide and SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards"manual including without limitation, gages,bracing, and construction. B. Turns and Vanes: Provide double thickness turning vane elbows in all 90 degree turns. C. Joints: All ducts shall have joints shall be made air tight and sealed with 3M No EC-800 or approved equal and in accordance with SMACNA seal classification. 2.3 FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK A. Flexible ducts between branch ducts and outlets shall be single ply, 1"thick insulated neoprene impregnated fiberglass fabric jacket over a continuous galvanized non-kinkable steel wire helix. Provide duct manufacturer's recommended couplings and fittings. 1. Material shall have a flame spread less than 25 and a smoke developed rating less than 50. B. Limitation: Limit length of flex duct to 4 feet maximum. C. Flexible ductwork shall only be permitted to be installed for the final vertical connection to diffusers. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion H.V.A.C. 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\15500NorthamptonMA.doc 15500-5 B. Store materials under cover and keep dry and protected against damage, corrosion, JAN W, construction traffic and other causes. C. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing and protecting during installation. 1.9 DESIGN CRITERIA AND QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with latest standards of ASHRAE and SMACNA. The most restrictive shall govern. B. The system shall conform to any requirements set forth by insurance underwriters, state and local authorities having jurisdiction and any applicable "tenant fit-up" criteria. C. Items such as filters, dampers, controls, access doors, etc. shall be installed so as to be readily accessible for operating, servicing,maintaining and repairing and to provide all applicable code clearances. 1. All equipment and/or accessories that are installed without proper access, in the opinion of the Construction Project Manager, shall be removed and revised as directed by the CPM at no additional cost to Talbots. D. Arrangement of systems indicated on the drawings is diagrammatic, and indicates the minimum requirements for mechanical work. Site conditions shall determine the actual arrangement of systems. Take field measurements before fabrication. E. The mechanical system shall operate quietly with noise levels below the criteria recommended for the application by ASHRE. Provide corrective action as required to reduce objectionable noise or vibration. F. Air Balancing Agent Qualifications: Engage an adjusting,and balancing agent certified by either AABC (Associated Air Balance Council)or NEBB (National Environmental Balancing Bureau). G. Installation of the HVAC-EMCS control system must be preformed by a certified Honeywell CCES, ACS or ACI contractor. 1.10 OWNER INSTRUCTION A. Provide Talbots store personnel and Landlord personnel with detailed walk-through description of all HVAC work and entire system; detailed instruction about proper inspection, maintenance, and operation of all parts of the work; and a complete review of Operation and Maintenance Manuals for all equipment and systems. 1.11 WARRANTIES A. All materials, equipment, and work furnished under this Section shall be guaranteed against all defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year commencing with the date of turnover. B. All refrigeration compressors shall have the manufacturer's extended replacement warranty for a total of five years. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion H.V.A.C. 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\15500NorthamptonMA.doc 15500-4 1.6 COORDINATION A. Site G.C. shall contact Talbots HVAC Maintenance Contractor(First Service Networks) for required inspections and tests. Contact Christina Jacobi at(800)453-5353,ext. 4254. Services performed by Talbots HVAC Maintenance Contractor as listed below, shall be at Talbots expense. 1. First Inspection (pre-ceiling cover): a. Within the first 14 days of construction, coordinate a"schedule date"for the first inspection and final inspection. If either"schedule date" is revised,the G.C. must give HVAC Maintenance Contractor a 72 hour notice,minimum, of the new date. b. First Service Networks local inspector shall survey the HVAC system and give the on-site superintendent a copy of the deficiency report after the inspection is complete and before the inspector leaves the site. Both the local inspector and the on-site superintendent must sign this report. C. Talbots G.C. shall fax a copy of the report to the Talbots Construction Project Manager within 24 hours of the inspection. Correct any deficiencies immediately. All questions in regards to the report must go through the Talbots Construction Project Manager. 2. Final Inspection: a. Contact Christina Jacobi with a 72 hour minimum notice for a"final HVAC" inspection date. All HVAC systems/components need to be installed and fully operational for this inspection. b. First Service Networks local inspector shall survey the HVAC system and give the on-site superintendent a copy of the deficiency report after the inspection is complete and before the inspector leaves the site. Both the "0* local inspector and the on-site superintendent must sign this report. C. Talbots G.C. shall fax a copy of the report to the Talbots Construction Project Manager within 24 hours of the inspection. Correct any deficiencies immediately. All questions in regards to the report must go through the Talbots Construction Project Manager. 3. A final HVAC Inspection Report must be submitted to the Talbots Construction Project Manager within 14 days of the project turn over date. 4. The final HVAC Inspection Report must meet the following requirements: a. All deficiencies are corrected and noted as such. b. Signed by Christina Jacobi and the on-site supervisor. C. HVAC Inspection Report must be typed,not hand written. d. ALL information filled out(open date, contact,etc.) B. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for items that are concealed by finished surfaces. Access doors and panels are specified in Section 08305 Access Doors. 1.7 SERVICE INTERRUPTIONS A. If required, schedule all system shutdowns through the Landlord. Provide at least three days advance notice and pay all fees as required by Landlord. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion H.V.A.C. 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\15500NorthamptonMA.doc 15500-3 1.3 MISSES RENOVATION A. Modify and extend existing services to accommodate new work. Relocate existing components as required to facilitate new system. B. The contractor shall visit site that is being renovated prior to submitting bid price. Verify all existing conditions, locations of tie-ins and review new and existing work required. The contractor shall notify Talbots Store Planning Manager of any discrepancies between existing conditions and new work shown on construction documents. 1.4 SUBMITTALS BY SITE GENERAL CONTRACTOR A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01001. B. Equipment Manuals: Provide two sets of all equipment and system operating procedures and maintenance requirements. As a minimum,provide other information listed below for inclusion in the operation and maintenance manuals. 1. All concealed equipment and access panels plans showing locations. 2. All equipment specifications. 3. Copies of all warranties for equipment including extended warranties as specified in this section. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Submittal of shop drawings are required for only those HVAC units and models that are proposed for use in this project that are different from those identified on the HVAC EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE found on the Mechanical Drawings. 2. Drawings shall include principal dimensions, size and locations of connections and performance data,and floor plan indicating concealed equipment and location of access panels for HVAC equipment. D. First Inspection Report E. Final HVAC Inspection Report F. Final Balancing Report. G. Submit all warranties required under the Warranty paragraph of this Section. H. Closeout documents shall be in accordance with Section 01700 and the following: 1. Ductwork sketches shall include all supply air,return air,exhaust air and outside air ductwork as applicable to project. 2. Locate all existing HVAC equipment. i. Certification that all existing equipment has been reconditioned and is operating correctly. 1.5 SUBMITTALS BY TALBOTS MAINTENANCE CONTRACTOR A. Signed "Talbots HVAC Closeout" check list for testing equipment and systems startup prior to construction completion and turnover. Site Superintendent shall be required to sign off the report. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion H.V.A.C. 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\15500NorthamptonMA.doc 15500-2 SECTION 15500 HEATING,VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 General Requirements. B. Reference Specification Section 15950—ENERGY MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC SYSTEM. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all material,labor, equipment and supplies, and perform all operations to furnish a complete fully functional HVAC system in full compliance with applicable codes and as shown on the Drawings and specifications. 1. Final connection of all HVAC connected equipment and systems. 2. Sheet metal ductwork system, diffusers,registers, grilles, insulation,dampers, flexible ductwork, refrigerant piping distribution, automatic temperature control, wiring and appurtenances and all required incidental specialties and accessories. 3. Testing, adjusting and balancing. 4. Supplemental steel support framing required to support any mechanical equipment. 5. Coordination with Talbots'Maintenance Contractor and HVAC equipment manufacturer to obtain checkout and approvals. B. Secure and pay for all necessary licenses, inspections,certificates,permits,insurance, documents and any other charges required for execution of work under this section. Give all requisite notices. C. Selected HVAC equipment identified in these specifications and on the Project Drawings are designated to be as supplied and/or manufactured by Lennox Industries Inc. These designated units shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor and purchased by a licensed mechanical sub-contractor under this Contract 1. No other supplier/manufacturer or equipment will be acceptable. 2. Contact Lennox Industries National Accounts: 2100 Lake Park BLVD,Richardson, TX 75080. Attention—Talbots Account Administrator. Phone: (800)367-6285, Fax: (972)497-5112. Contact person: Ms.Monnie Morrow. D. Selected Energy Management Control Systems equipment and components identified in these specifications and on the Project Drawings are designated to be as furnished by Talbots Separate Contractor("Integrator") and installed by the site G C' s Honeywell Commercial Comfort& Energy Specialist (CCES)subcontractor. The balance of the items required to complete the HVAC-EMCS system shall be as provided by the G.C. eoftl Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion H.V.A.C. 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\15500NorthamptonMA.doc 15500-1 R. All connections of heating, air conditioning or other nonpotable water systems shall be kook protected with a reduced pressure type backflow preventer except for fire protection system connections that shall be protected by a double check-detector check valve assembly. Verify the local Wafer Authority requirements and advise the Architect of any differences before proceeding with this work. 3.3 TESTING A. Fully test plumbing work in presence of authorities having jurisdiction,Talbots, and Landlord. Comply with requirements of local Plumbing Inspector. 1. Report test results in format acceptable to Talbots and Landlord and certify that all required testing has been made and are approved by local authorities. 2. Correct all deficiencies at no additional cost to Talbots. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean out all traps and piping systems. Thoroughly clean and polish all fixtures and visible plumbing work. B. Domestic water systems shall be disinfected and chlorinated in accordance with State Board of Health requirements and in compliance with Building Codes. C. Adjust water flow rates to comply with manufacturer's rating of the fixture. D. Clean fixtures of labels,dirt, and construction debris. ---END OF SECTION--- Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion PLUMBING 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\15400NorthamptonMA.doc 15400-7 G. Shut off valves 1. Install individual shutoff valve in each hot and cold water supply to plumbing specialties to facilitate isolation for repair or replacement. Use ball, gate, or globe valve if specific valve is not indicated. 2. Install shutoff valves in accessible locations. 3. Unions shall be installed for servicing all specialties. H. Conceal Work: Conceal all work, except where specifically indicated or permitted to be run exposed. I. Locations: Drawings are often diagrammatic. Locate work to accommodate field conditions and where approved before installation by Talbots. J. Clearance: Provide maximum possible headroom and never less than 8'-0"clearance from floor. K. Connection: Provide all hardware,connections and anchors needed. Attach wall mounted work with not less than 3/8-inch diameter expansion bolts. Attach floor and overhead mounted work with minimum '/z-inch diameter expansion bolts. Do not use wooden plugs. L. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary caps and seals for piping work and cover equipment to prevent entrance of dirt,debris, and obstructions. Protect all work from damage. M. Dielectric Unions: Provide isolating dielectric union, EPCO or equal at connections between ferrous and non-ferrous materials. N. Thermal Insulation: 1. Thermally insulate all hot and cold lines and surfaces. Completely insulate all system components and surfaces including,without limitation,piping,valves, and all piping below handicap lavatories. 2. Install pipe insulation continuously in compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Do not use staples. Seal butt joints with manufacturer's standard butt joint seal strips. Seal exposed ends of insulation with flame retardant vapor seal. O. Install fixtures and fittings at heights required by ADA and applicable plumbing code. P. Anchor water closets to floor with screws or bolts. Q. Floor Drains and Trap Primer: 1. Install the trap primer valve in an accessible concealed location, connecting to the cold fresh water line supplying the Toilet Room Lavatory faucet. Follow manufacturers recommended installation instructions and recommendations. 2. Ensure the connection of the valve supply line is in a location that will sense the pressure drop when using the lavatory faucet. 3. Connect discharge of the trap primer valve to the trap primer connection of the floor drain. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion PLUMBING 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\15400NorthamptonMA.doc 15400-6 2.9 ESCUTCHEONS A. Heavy cast brass,bright chrome plated. 2.10 SLEEVES A. Provide 20 USSG galvanized iron sleeves for all piping passing through walls, floors or ceilings. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Coordinate plumbing work with all work of other trades and with all related and adjacent work. In cases of conflict,piping requiring slope has right-of-way. Coordinate work to minimize cutting and patching. B. Install carriers and hangers for wall-mounted fixtures in walls before wall surface is completed. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hangers: Attach hangers directly to building structure. Provide all miscellaneous metal framing as needed to by-pass obstructions such as duct work and equipment. Space hangers not over 6 feet on center. Do not hang from bottom chord of ceiling joists. B. Escutcheons: Provide tight fitting escutcheons wherever exposed piping passes through finished walls, floors,or ceilings. C. Firestopping: Effectively firestop in compliance with Section 07270-Firestopping,wherever piping passes through fire-rated assemblies. D. Sleeves: Provide, set, and anchor all sleeves and inserts needed to accommodate installation of plumbing work. Provide '/z-inch clearance between pipe insulation and inside of sleeve. Install sleeves to be flush with ceilings. For sleeves in floors subject to flooding, extend sleeve at 1 '/Z inches above finish floor and provide a watertight seal between floor and outside of sleeve. E. Floor Penetrations: Plumbing contractor shall seal all floor penetrations as per Landlord's requirements. F. Piping, fittings and valves: 1. Run piping at right angles and parallel to major building lines. Do not run work diagonally. 2. Run piping with uniform slope to drain. 3. Install with pipe expansion loops,mechanical expansion joints,and anchors. 4. Install all valves so as to be readily accessible,but no valve handles pointing down below horizontal position and removable without separating or lifting pipe in which installed. look 5. Gas piping located above the roof shall be supported on approved carriers. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion PLUMBING 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\I5400NorthamptonMA.doc 15400-5 2.5 THERMAL INSULATION A. Pipe: Minimum 1-inch thick preformed sectional fiberglass pipe insulation with 3.25 pcf density,vapor barrier jacket and factory applied double self-sealing lap. Owens Corning Fiberglass"ASJ/SSL II"or Talbots approved equal. 1. Provide 18 gage protection saddles between insulation and pipe hangers. B. Fittings: High impact resistant PVC jackets "Zeston" with fiberglass inserts. Seal throats and joints to pipe insulation with vinyl adhesive or 1-1/2 inch wide vinyl tape. 2.6 HANGERS A. For cast iron pipe,provide heavy wrought iron pipe hangers,brackets or clamps at 5-foot intervals. B. For water piping,provide adjustable wrought iron copper plated hangers at 6 foot intervals maximum. Hangers shall allow for full thickness of insulation. 2.7 FLOOR DRAINS/TRAP PRIMER A. Provide floor drains as indicated on the plans. 1. Toilet Room and finished area Floor Drain: Model 2005 with square grate and 1 a primer connection as manufactured by Jay R Smith Mfg. Co., Montgomery,AL, (334)277-8520. B. All Toilet Room floor drains shall be provided with a trap primer 1. Automatic Trap Primer Valve (in wall):Model P2-500 Prime-Rite, as manufactured by Precision Plumbing Products,Inc.,Portland, OR, (503)256-4010. C. Floor cleanouts shall be provided at the locations indicated and,as a minimum,where required by code. Cleanouts shall be a minimum of 4-inches and shall be compete with a flush plug and removable, scoriated bronze floor plate. 1. Floor Cleanout: Zum No.ZN1400-2 for tile floors. 2.8 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS A. Provide water hammer arrestors on all hot and cold water lines at individual fixtures or groups of fixtures and other such locations to bring water system in conformance with plumbing and drainage institute standard PDI-WH201. 1. Size as required by installed project system. B. Acceptable products and manufacturers: 1. Shokstop by Wade. 2. Absorbotron by Josam Co. 3. Shocktrol by Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div. 4. Model 5010 by J.R. Smith C. In lieu of manufactured waterhammer arrestors, Contractor may provide 12-inch high air chambers at each supply. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion PLUMBING 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\15400NorthamptonMA.doc 15400-4 B. Sanitary waste and vent pipe and fittings: 1. Below slab:Pipe shall be service weight cast iron soil pipe. Fittings and joints shall be service weight cast iron hub and spigot with compression type neoprene gaskets. 2. Above slab: Pipe 2'/z" and larger shall be service weight spun cast iron no-hub with mechanical couplers made of compression type neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamps. 3. Waste pipe 2-inch and smaller located above slab, may be Type M copper tubing with cast bronze or copper drainage fittings joined with 95/5 solder. C. Natural gas piping 2-inch and smaller, located above slab shall be Schedule 40,ASTM A-53 pipe joined with 125 pound class black malleable cast iron screwed fittings. D. Valves 2-inch and under for domestic water service shall be bronze, full port ball valves rated for 400 PSI W.G. E. Valves for natural gas service shall be code-approved ball valves with bronze body and screwed ends, chrome plated ball and teflon seats. 1. All shutoff valves shall be WKM-ACF Figure 0-125 plug valve for sizes 4 inch and smaller. 2.3 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM A. General: Fixtures shall be white vitreous china with chrome-plated faucets,stops and traps. Insulation of drain and supply piping shall be in accordance with INSULATION paragraph. B. Water closet (NO SUBSTITUTIONS) -American Standard Cadet Series, siphon action jetted bowl, white, tank type, 1.6 Gallons per flush, floor mounted, elongated bowl, close- coupled tank, 12 inch rough in. Meets ADA requirements. Install for barrier free use. 1. Model No. 2998.012 W/Alternate Tank 4112.800(trip lever on right side of tank). 2. Seat: Heavy duty, institutional, solid plastic seat for elongated bowl, open front less cover with self-sustaining check hinge. a. Olsonite: 95-SS Comfort Curve C. Mens and Womens Toilet Room Lavatory-Model 0475.020 white,Aqualyn series,self rimming vitreous china bowl with front overflow, faucet holes 8-inches on center, as manufactured by American Standard. 1. Faucet-Manufactured by Price Pfister, a. If purchasing from Price Pfister direct identify as Model 49-BKXK-HHL- BKMK, Georgetown spout with handle bases,pop-up assembly and decorative lever handle trim kit,A.D.A Compliant. Finish:brushed nickel with brass handles. b. If purchasing from "retail/wholesale dealer"model number may not be as noted above and reflect the dealers skew number. 2.4 WATER HEATER A. In Wall: Model SR-20L, Instant-Flow tankless electric heater,4160 watts, 208V and a 0.5 GPM in-line flow restriction as manufactured by Chronomite Laboratories,Inc., Harbor City, CA, (800)447-4962. Reference specification section 08305 for access panel. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion PLUMBING 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\15400NorthamptonMA.doc 15400-3 D. The Drawings are diagrammatic and show the general arrangement of new piping and equipment. All offsets, drops and rises of pipe runs may not be shown on Drawings. It shall , be the Contractor's responsibility to install his work in such a manner as to avoid obstruction, maintain maximum headroom,provide adequate accessibility for maintenance and keep openings and passageways clear without cost or instructions. Site conditions shall determine the actual arrangement of runs,bends, offsets and similar items. E. Coordinate location of plumbing systems to avoid interference with location of structure and other building systems. F. Provide ample access for service and adjustment. 1.5 OWNER INSTRUCTION A. Provide Talbots and Landlord personnel with detailed walk-through description of all plumbing work and entire system; detailed instruction about proper inspection,maintenance, and operation of all parts of the work, and a complete review of Operation and Maintenance Manuals for all equipment and systems. 1.6 SERVICE INTERRUPTIONS A. If required, schedule all system shutdowns through the Landlord. Provide at least three days advance notice and pay all fees as required by Landlord. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver,handle,and store materials in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. B. Protect materials from damage during storage on site. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate roughing-in and final plumbing fixture locations, and verify that fixtures can be installed to comply with original design and referenced standards. B. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for plumbing items that are concealed by finished surfaces. Access doors and panels are specified in Section 08305 Access Doors. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Provide all new materials and equipment as specified herein, except where existing items are specifically indicated to be re-used. 2.2 PIPING, VALVES,AND FITTINGS A. Domestic hot and cold water piping: Type L seamless hard drawn copper tubing(ASTM B- 88) with cast bronze or copper fittings joined with approved 95/5 (lead free) solder. 1. Fittings&Joints: Wrought copper, ASA B 16.22, Sweat 95/5. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion PLUMBING 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\15400NorthamptonMA.doc 15400-2 SECTION 15400 PLUMBING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 General Requirements. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all material,labor,equipment and supplies,and perform all operations to furnish a complete fully functional plumbing system in full compliance with applicable codes and as shown on the Drawings and specifications including but not limited to the following: 1. All plumbing fixtures, trim, sleeves, inserts,hangers, insulation, escutcheons,and all required incidental specialties and accessories. 2. Hot and cold water supply systems, sanitary drain,waste and vent systems from connections at fixtures to locations as shown on Drawings, including final connection of all plumbing connected equipment and systems. 3. Coordinating plumbing work below floor with Landlord where applicable. 4. Secure and pay for all necessary licenses, inspections,certificates,permits, insurance, documents and any other charges required for execution of work under this section. Give all requisite notices B. Renovation Areas: 1. Removal of existing plumbing fixtures. Include all related waste, vent and water piping back to Landlord mains and cap/plug. All unused piping shall be removed entirely. Do not leave any dead end piping. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Test Report: Submit copy of any required tests performed on the plumbing work B. Maintenance Manual: Submit copy of operation and maintenance manuals for equipment furnished under this section. C. Equipment data, fixtures and piping substitutions. 1.4 DESIGN CRITERIA/QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with latest local Plumbing Code and OSHA regulations. The most restrictive shall govern. B. All work shall be in accordance with any tenant fit-up criteria. C. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers that have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion PLUMBING 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29,2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\15400NorthamptonMA.doc 15400-1 3.4 TESTING A. Fully test fire protection work in presence of authorities having jurisdiction, the Landlord, and their representative. Comply with requirements of local Fire Inspectors. Make hydrostatic pressure tests for 2 hours in compliance with NFPA 13 Standard. Test at not less than 200 psi, except test at 50 psi higher than maximum design pressure when design pressure is greater than 150 psi. B. For occupied, water sensitive areas make an air pressure test first before water testing. C. Report test results in format prescribed by NFPA 13 and certify that tests have been made and are approved by local authorities. D. Correct all deficiencies at no additional cost to Talbots. ---END OF SECTION --- Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion FIRE PROTECTION 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\15300NorthamptonMA.doc 15300-6 00W 3.2 SPRINKLER HEAD SURVEY A. Survey shall include a Visual inspection of all sprinkler heads installed on the project. B. The fire sprinkler heads have the words"CENTRAL"or"STAR",the letters"CSC",the letter"G"in triangle,or a star-shaped symbol stamped on either the metal sprinkler frame or on the deflector. 1. The model designation and date may also be stamped on the frame or deflector. 2. The deflector is the flower, or gear shaped metal piece at one end of the sprinkler head. C. If you have any questions about how to identify the sprinkler heads involved in this program, please call the Central Sprinkler Company Customer Service Hotline at 1-866-505-8553, 9 a.m.to 7 p.m. EST. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate head locations with the Reflected Ceiling Plan(RCP)and HVAC duct distribution above. 1. In drywall ceilings, each head must be located on the center lines of adjacent light fixtures and grilles and equidistant between fixtures, grilles, etc. in so far as practicable and except in ceiling behind valances. 2. In lay-in ceilings, each head must be centered in acoustical panel. B. Piping and Hangers: 1. Run piping with uniform slope to drain. 2. Run piping at right angles and parallel to major building lines. Do not run work diagonally. 3. Support piping from hangers or riser clamps. 4. Do not hang piping from ducts,other service piping or bottom chord of ceiling joists. 5. Couplings may be used only where the length of the pipe between fittings exceeds 20 feet. C. Escutcheons: Fit all exposed piping passing through finished walls and floors with escutcheons and clamp in place. D. Firestopping: Effectively firestop in compliance with Section 07270 wherever piping passes through fire-rated assemblies. E. Sleeves: Provide, set, and anchor all sleeves and inserts needed to accommodate installation of fire protection work. Provide 2-inch clearance between pipe and inside of sleeve. For sleeves in floors subject to flooding, extend sleeve at least 6-inches above finished floor and provide a watertight seal between floor and outside of sleeve. For sleeves in floors not subject to flooding, extend sleeve 1-1/2 inches above finish floor and provide a watertight seal between floor and outside of sleeve. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion FIRE PROTECTION 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29,2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\15300NorthamptonMA.doc 15300-5 F. At G.C.'s option, and only if allowed by municipality or authorities where the project is located,the G.C. may elect to provide the"FlexHead" flexible branch piping and attachment bracket system in lieu of a hard piped system. 1. FlexHead products are manufactured by FlexHead Industries, Holliston,MA, (800) 829-6975. 2.3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Comply with Underwriters Laboratory Standards. B. Where applicable,provide steel expansion anchors attached directly to building structure. Provide threaded rod and cast iron clevis ring suspension assemblies complying with reference standards. 2.4 SPRINKLER HEADS A. General: All sprinkler heads shall be U.L. listed and Factory Mutual approved. B. Sprinkler Types: 1. Stock Room(with finished ceiling),Records Room and Toilet Room, shall be chrome finish recessed type with chrome plated escutcheon. Equal to Reliable Automatic Sprinkler"G4FR", 165 degree. 2. Stock Room(without finish ceiling) shall be brass upright heads. Equal to Reliable Automatic Sprinkler"G4FR", 165 degree. 3. Sales Area,hallways and exterior Display Windows shall be fully concealed with the ceiling with a flush cover plate in standard white finish. 4. Display windows shall have high temperature (212 degree)heads. 2.5 INSPECTOR'S TEST STATION A. Coordinate with Landlord regarding Inspector's test station requirements. B. Provide a 1-inch system drain from remote area of tenant system to existing hub drain. C. Inspector's test station shall comply with NFPA 13 standards. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Where applicable,examine existing construction and verify that existing conditions, such as substrates, dimensions, clearances, and adjoining construction, will permit fire protection system to be installed or modified as intended as shown in the Contract Documents. Notify Architect in writing if existing conditions will interfere with proper installation or performance of systems specified in this section. Do not proceed with work until such conditions have been corrected. B. Interference: Where building construction or mechanical installation makes it advisable to change the location of the heads,notify Architect,obtain approval of new location in writing from Architect,and make the necessary changes without additional cost to Talbots. ' Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion FIRE PROTECTION 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\15300NorthamptonMA.doc 15300-4 1.6 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA A. Sprinkler work shall be inspected and approved by Fire Department, and, if required,the Landlord,and Landlord's insurance carriers. 1.7 SERVICE INTERRUPTIONS A. If required, schedule a system shutdown through the Landlord. Provide at least three days advance notice,or as otherwise requested by Landlord. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Sprinkler heads: Furnish spare heads equal to one percent of the total number of heads installed for each type, or a minimum of ten heads. Pack the heads in a suitable cabinet In addition, furnish at least two sprinkler head wrenches. B. Spare sprinkler heads shall be supplied in proportion to the style and temperature rating of the heads installed. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Provide all new materials and equipment as specified herein. 2.2 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe: 1. All piping shall be rated at a minimum of 175 psi working pressure 2. For 2-inch diameter and under,provide ASTM A53, Grade B, Schedule 40, seamless black steel piping and cast iron black screwed fittings. 3. For pipe sizes larger than 2-inch,contractor shall supply and install pipe and fittings that match existing system exactly. 4. Provide galvanized piping for all test and drain piping or any other piping subject to alternate wetting and drying. 5. No PVC pipe shall be permitted. B. Fittings: 1. All fittings shall be standard weight and shall be rated at a minimum of 175 psi working pressure. 2. Cast Iron threaded fittings per ANSI B 16.4. C. Reducers: One piece reducing fittings of approved pattern. Do not use bushing as reducing fittings. D. Escutcheons: Tight fitting chromium plated spun or split type, with clamping device for holding in position. E. Sleeves: Through floors(interior): Steel. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion FIRE PROTECTION 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29,2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\15300NorthamptonMA.doc 15300-3 1.4 DESIGN CRITERIA/QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The system shall be based on Tenant Design Criteria,if any, Ordinary Hazard Group II, 0.2 GPM for most remote 1,500 sq./ft. or 0.16 GPM for most remote 3,000 sq./ft.plus 250 GPM hose allowance. B. The system shall be designed as a "hydraulically designed" fire protection system. The fire protection contractor shall obtain existing water supply data from Landlord. C. Comply with all applicable requirements of NFPA 13,U. L., State and local authorities having jurisdiction, Landlords insurance underwriter and,where applicable, any tenant fit-up criteria. D. Maximum spacing of sprinkler head shall be 130 sq. ft per head in sales area and 100 sq. ft. per head in storage areas. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01001 General Requirements and Landlord Tenant Requirements,if any. B. Shop Drawings: A Fire Protection Engineer registered in the state where the store is located shall stamp Shop drawings. 1. Show sizing of piping,layout of heads,test valves and other required appurtenances. 2. Include all information required by NFPA 13, incorporating hydraulic reference points and hydrant flow data. 3. Sprinkler heads shown on Fire Protection Contract Drawings are coordinated with the Architectural Reflected Ceiling Plans. If there are any discrepancies,Contractor shall bring it to the attention of Talbots CPM. C. Calculations: A Professional Engineer registered in the state in which the store is located shall sign hydraulic calculations. The calculations shall demonstrate that fire-protection work complies with all code and other applicable regulatory requirements. D. Contract Close Out: shall be in accordance with Section 01700. 1. Submit Certificate of Inspection from authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Submit maintenance data and operating instructions for inclusion in the project Operation and Maintenance Manual. 3. Complete mark up of project record documents to show as-built conditions. E. Sprinkler Head Survey Report: 1. Submit report documenting results of the visual inspection of all sprinkler heads located in the store. 2. Report shall identify quantity of heads requiring replacement under the recall program. 3. Report shall also verify and document if project does not contain any heads identified under the recall program. Aftk Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion FIRE PROTECTION 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\15300NorthamptonMA.doc 15300-2 SECTION 15300 FIRE PROTECTION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 General Requirements. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all material,labor,equipment and supplies and perform all operations to furnish a complete automatic sprinkler system in full compliance with the recommendations of NFPA 13, Landlords insurance underwriter and installed to the satisfaction of the Fire Marshall. B. Secure and pay for all necessary licenses, inspections, certificates,permits,insurance, documents and any other charges required for execution of work under this section including shut-down fee(if any)to landlord. Give all requisite notices. C. Perform a visual survey for the identification of all installed sprinkler heads to determine if they are included in the U.S. Consumer Product Safety Commission(CPSC),and Central Sprinkler Company,an affiliate of Tyco Fire Products LP, of Lansdale,PA,recall program. 1. A listing of all the models subject to the recall program can be found on the Fire Protection Drawing. 2. The recall also includes heads that were sold by Gem Sprinkler Company and Star Sprinkler,Inc. 3. Provide report of survey results. 4. If it is determined that the project contains heads subject to the recall,submit costing information for providing replacements for those sprinkler heads. 1.3 RENOVATION PROJECT REQUIREMENTS A. Provide modifications to the existing fire protection system within the renovated area in order to conform to new space requirements and Architects reflected ceiling Drawing. B. Expansion Area: A complete,new, automatic,wet sprinkler system throughout the expansion area connecting to each and every automatic sprinkler. This system shall extend and connect to the existing sprinkler tee within the existing Talbots space. C. Provide new sprinkler heads where existing heads are required to be relocated. D. The G.C. must notify the Landlord at least 48 hours before making any modifications to the existing sprinkler system, and or needing the present sprinkler system drained. 1. No wet sprinkler systems will be left drained or inoperable overnight. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion FIRE PROTECTION 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\15300NorthamptonMA.doc 15300-1 SECTION 11100 LOOSE FIXTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 General Requirements. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Preparation of areas for Owner furnished loose fixtures including: merchandising fixtures, garment racks, shelving, hanging devices,display platforms, showcase tables, signholders, and display cabinets. 1.3 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate work with placement of wall and ceiling reinforcement to receive anchor attachments. B. Do not install specialty items until room finishes are completed. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Owner will provide personnel to receive inside delivery of Owner furnished material. B. Protect material from damage during storage on site. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Owner's separate Contractor furnishes all loose fixture components and materials. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. The Owner's store personnel will place the Work in its final position. ---END OF SECTION--- Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion LOOSE FIXTURES 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29,2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\11100NorthamptonMA.doc 11100-1 SECTION 11005 W MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 General Requirements. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Site General Contractor preparation of areas designated for Owner provided appliances and miscellaneous portable equipment. 1.3 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Installation of equipment will be scheduled after area preparation work is complete. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Owner will provide personnel to receive inside delivery of Owner furnished material. 000* PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT A. Owner furnishes the following: 1. Microwave: Sears Model No. 22-89428. 2. Refrigerator: Sears Model No. 46-93254 (25-1/4 inches high x 18-5/8 inches wide x 19-1/8 inches deep). 3. TVNCR: Panasonic Model No. AG513 (13"diagonal color). 4. Safe: Portable type, all steel, fire rated. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. The Owner's personnel will install all equipment listed in Part 2 above. ---END OF SECTION --- Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\l 1005NorthamptonMA.doc 11005-1 PART 3 - EXECUTION Amok 3.1 PREPARATION A. Prepare walls for suitable conditions where recessed accessory units will be installed. 1. Recessed sanitary napkin disposal in toilet rooms. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install all Owner furnished toilet accessories as scheduled. B. Use skilled workmen and install in accordance with manufacturers'printed instructions. C. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. D. Locate accessories in order that they do not interfere with door swings or use of fixtures. Install recessed accessories after wall finishes have been completed. E. Anchor accessories with bolts,plates, and approved type fasteners.Take down any loose items and repair damaged wall surfaces. 1. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to method in ASTM F446. 2. Anchor grab bars to drywall with concealed 16-gage steel anchor plates F. Mount mirror units at Sink/Lavatories per ADA and barrier free access requirements of local State Code. G. Mount surface mounted accessories to backup material with toggle bolts,plumb and align. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation and verify that mechanisms function properly. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.4 SCHEDULE MEN AND WOMENS CUSTOMER TOILET ROOM ACCESSORY PACKAGE COMPONENT MANUFACTURER'S NO. Toilet Paper Dispenser 3503.150 (Baldwin Hardware) Grab Bar B 5806.99 x length required (Bobrick) Sanitary Napkin Disposal (recessed) B 35303 (Bobrick) Purse Shelf/Paper Towel Dispenser CPR-254 (Custom Millwork Item) Coat Hook 574-1326 (Ives) ---END OF SECTION --- Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion TOILET ACCESSORIES 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\10800NorthamptonMA.doc 10800-2 SECTION 10800 1. TOILET ACCESSORIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 General Requirements. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Installation of surface mounted and recessed Toilet Room Accessories. 1.3 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate work with placement of wall reinforcement and blocking to receive anchor attachments. B. Do not install accessories until room finishes are completed. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept inside delivery of toilet room accessories. B. Protect material from damage during storage on site. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. All materials identified on the Toilet Room Accessory Schedule in Part 3 (below)are Owner furnished. B. Owner furnishes casework mirror frame in customer toilet,mirror glazing is furnished by G.C. in accordance with Section 08800. C. Fasteners provided by G.C. 1. Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized ASTM A386 where concealed; finish to match device where exposed. 2. Expansion Shields: Type as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component and substrate. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion TOILET ACCESSORIES 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\10800NorthamptonMA.doc 10800-1 2.4 FLOOR LEVELING CEMENT A. Furnished by G.C.: Ardex K-15 self-leveling cement underlayment as manufactured by Ardex Inc., (412)264-4240. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. General Contractor shall prepare areas where storage shelving will be installed. B. Verify floor slab condition for rolling storage system. 1. Floor leveling to max. 1/8" variation by GC. 2. Use specified self-leveling underlayment as required by site conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install free standing and wall mounted shelving units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Coordinate location of wall strapping. C. Install all brackets,rods, shelves, and clips in locations identified by store personnel and as shown on drawings. D. Secure and brace storage units to meet seismic criteria of local building code as required. E. Installation of rolling storage system is by Owner's separate Contractor. ---END OF SECTION--- Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion STORAGE SHELVING 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29,2005 05132 R:\1\4ISSY\05132\specs\10670NorthamptonMA.doc 10670-2 SECTION 10670 STORAGE SHELVING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 General Requirements. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Installation of free standing shelving units. B. Installation of wall mounted shelving units. C. Preparation of areas scheduled for installation of rolling storage shelving system. 1.3 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Do not begin work until substrate work is complete and work of other trades that will be concealed by work of this Section has been approved. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept inside delivery of Owner furnished items. B. Protect materials from damage during storage on site. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 FREE STANDING SHELVING UNITS A. Furnished by Owner 2.2 ROLLING STORAGE SYSTEM A. Furnished by Owner 2.3 WALL MOUNTED SHELVING UNITS A. Furnished by Owner: 1. Hardware (Standards,brackets,rods and end caps and pivot locks). 2. Shelving (Reference Section 06410). B. Furnished by General Contractor: 1. Strapping - 1 x 3 Fire Retardant Treated(FRT)wood as specified in Section 06100. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion STORAGE SHELVING 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\10670NorthamptonMA.doc 10670-1 B. Adjust fitting room doors for smooth and balanced door movement. Rehang doors that do not swing or operate freely. C. Adjust and clean the Work as directed by the Construction Project Manager. 3.4 FIELD TOUCH UP A. The G.C. shall be responsible for the filling and touch-up of exposed job made nail or screw holes,refinishing of raw surfaces resulting from job fitting,repair of job inflicted scratches and mars and final cleaning of the finished surfaces. ---END OF SECTION --- Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion FITTING ROOM PARTITION SYSTEM 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29,2005 05132 R:\1\4ISSY\05132\specs\10631NorthamptonMA.doc 10631-4 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Follow Talbots installation instruction narrative. B. Install casework items in accordance with AWI QS Section 1700. C. Fasten woodwork to anchor or blocking built-in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation. Except where pre-finished matching fastener heads are required,use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish where transparent finish is indicated. D. Scribe trims to floor,walls, and other components as required. E. Caulk all open joints prior to painting. Use colored sealants as required for transparent finished wood. F. Install electrical components in accordance with Section 16000. 1. Provide electrical connection to approximate area of final connection. 2. Provide final electrical connection from the fixture to the junction box.. G. Set and secure materials and components in place,plumb and level. H. Protect installed Work from damage of all types. I. Install glazing with mastic in accordance with the requirements of Section 08800. J. Install wallcovering on shop primed panels in accordance with Section 09950. K. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 IV,when tested according to method in ASTM F446. 3.2 FITTING ROOM DOORS A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated on the drawing,Doors are factory pre-drilled and prepared to receive hardware. B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. C. Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances. Do not trim stiles and rails unless authorized by Owner. Set and secure materials and components in place,plumb and level. 3.3 ADJUSTMENTS AND CLEANING A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each fitting room door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion FITTING ROOM PARTITION SYSTEM 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29,2005 05132 R:\MISSY105132\specs\10631NorthamptonMA.doc 10631-3 1.6 PROJECT ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS A. The fabricator will include site assembly instructions for each component furnished. A schematic assembly Drawing with a schedule of component parts will be included in a 9" x 12" Kraft envelope marked with Project name and store number and furnished with the partition system. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Partition system includes but is not limited to mouldings, doors, door hardware, grab bars, mirror frames, stall hardware and electrical components. All materials are Talbots furnished unless otherwise noted. 1. Hardware, electrical devices, etc. integral to the units are pre-installed by Talbots separate contractor. 2. Casework light fixtures are Talbots furnished unless otherwise noted. B. G.C.provided materials: 1. Mirror glazing as specified in Section 08800. 2. Fasteners: type and size as required by conditions. 3. Caulking and sealants as specified in Section 07900. 4. Concealed wood blocking as specified in Section 06200. 2.2 FABRICATION A. All Talbots furnished items are fabricated to AWI QS, "Custom" grade by Talbots separate Contractor. B. All hardware attachment locations are pre-drilled. C. Unit and component numbers are stamped in a concealed location on each piece. 2.3 FINISH A. All field paint finished units are shop primed. Field finishing shall be in accordance with Section 09900. Reference finish designators on Drawings. B. Wallcovering material is furnished by Talbots, installed by G.C. C. All laminate finished units are factory finished. D. Transparent finished units are shop finished unless noted otherwise. 2.4 LUMINAIRES A. Specific casework components have lighting fixtures integrally installed by the Talbots separate casework manufacturer. All other lighting fixtures are installed in the field by the G.C. Refer to drawings for details. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion FITTING ROOM PARTITION SYSTEM 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\10631NorthamptonMA.doc 10631-2 SECTION 10631 FITTING ROOM PARTITION SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 General Requirements. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide carpentry work, including but not limited to the following: 1. Installation of Talbots furnished Fitting Room partition system including but not limited to doors,hardware,panel system accessories and trims. 2. Final electrical hook-up of all illuminated components. 3. Glazing and mirrors for prefabricated casework as shown on Drawings. 4. Installation accessories. 5. Installation of new fitting room replacement doors and hardware in the existing fitting room in accordance with Section 06200. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept inside delivery of Talbots furnished items. B. Protect materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture,soiling,and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. C. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing,and protecting during installation. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed installation of architectural woodwork similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Perform all installation Work in accordance with AWI QS, "Custom" grade. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of blocking and reinforcement in partitions for support of built in items. Talbots Store No.335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion FITTING ROOM PARTITION SYSTEM 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\10631NorthamptonMA.doc 10631-1 E. Protect adjacent work areas and finish surfaces from damage during product installation. F. Coordinate installation with adjacent finish materials in a manner not to destroy adjacent surfaces. 6.2 INSTALLATION-FRAMING A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install components plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. C. Fasteners are to be appropriate for the mounting substrate. Anchor framing to structure. D. Conceal bolts and screws whenever possible. Where not concealed, use flush countersunk fastenings. 6.3 INSTALLATION -COVERING A. Install covering over framing members, stretched taught without creases or folds. B. Attach covering and fasten securely. 6.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story,non-cumulative. ,,,mok, B. Maximum variation from level: 1/8 inch. END OF TALBOTS SEPARATE AWNING CONTRACTORS WORK Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion AWNINGS 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\10537NorthamptonMA.doc 10537-8 8. Frames are to be washed with detergent and water to remove all fabrication oils and A0011` debris. C. Covering and Graphics: 1. Manufacture covering in one piece wherever possible, sized and configured to suit framing. 2. Turn seam edges and lock stitch. 3. Graphic Content and Style: Provide graphic copy that complies with the requirements indicated for size, style, spacing, content,position,material, finishes,and colors of letters,numbers, and other graphic devices. 4. Logographics Brand Essence Oval and Tag-Line Copy: a. Use RF (Radio Frequency welding for cut-out insert oval and tag-line graphics. b. Die-cut tag line characters from vinyl film. 5.6 PAINT FINISHES A. Metal finish shall be fabricators standard shop applied and baked powder coating. B. Prepare,treat, and coat metal to comply with resin manufacturer's instructions. 1. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. C. Manufacturer: Awning fabricators standard Paint Type: Polyester or acrylic urethane powder coating. Finish Gloss: Gloss Substrate: Metal,New. Application: Shop applied Finish System: Thermosetting Primer: Refer to Manufacturer's Instructions Finish Coat: Refer to Manufacturer's Instructions. D. Colors 1. White: Manufacturer's standard white 2. Black: Manufacturers standard black 3. Red: Match red awning fabric. PART 6 -EXECUTION(TALBOTS AWNING CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY) 6.1 INSTALLATION-GENERAL A. The Awning Contractor provides installation of the awning unit under this Section. B. Installations shall be structurally sound, level and leak free. Awnings are to have no blemishes and are to meet local codes for strength and safety. C. Install flashing along top edge as indicated on Drawings. 1. Seal all gaps between the building structure and awning with clear silicone. D. Clean all Work after installation to remove grime and fingerprints. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion AWNINGS 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29,2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\10537NorthamptonMA.doc 10537-7 D. FB-31 Application: Brand Essence Oval Logographics Manufacturer: Farrari Textiles Corp. Product Name: Precontraint 502 Material: Woven yarn (1100 Dtex PES HT) Scrim with 6 mil coating. LogoGraphics: Digitally printed Application to awning fabric: RF welded. 5.3 TAG LINE GRAPHIC MATERIAL A. Logographics Manufacturer: Farrari Textiles Corp. Product Name: Precontraint 502 Material: Woven yarn (1100 Dtex PES HT) Scrim with 6 mil coating. LogoGraphics: Digitally printed Color: Gold Application to awning fabric: RF welded. 5.4 ACCESSORIES A. Furnish items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting templates,to Site General Contractor or Landlord as appropriate. B. Bull Nose Edge (located on framing): Trim Maker extrusion no. 110201,Trim Base no. 410443 and End Cap no. 310205 as manufactured by Stylmark Inc.,Minneapolis MN. (800) 328-2495 or equal. C. Flashing and end-cap covers: aluminum sheet,ASTM B209 with a minimum thickness of 0.060 inch,unless otherwise indicated. 1. Finish: shop applied powder coat. 2. Color: as indicated on Drawings. 3. Comply with details shown to fabricate sheet metal trim that fit substrates and results in weather-resistant performance. 5.5 FABRICATION A. General: 1. Provide complete fabrication at the Awning at Awning Contractor's shop and off the Project site. B. Framing 1. Fit and shop assemble components in largest practical sizes, for delivery to site. 2. Fabricate components with joints tightly fitted and secured. 3. Exposed Fastenings: Unobtrusively located; consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise. 4. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as framing, except where specifically noted otherwise. 5. Continuously seal joined pieces by continuous welds. 6. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed J oints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. 7. Accurately form components to suit each other and to building structure. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion AWNINGS 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\10537NorthamptonMA.doc 10537-6 E. Fasteners: 000* 1. Exposed: Flush countersunk stainless steel screws or bolts; consistent with design of system. 2. Concealed fasteners and components:Non-corrosive,non-staining F. Finish: 1. Awnings with framing concealed by closed ends and soffit—Anodized clear finish. 2. Awnings with exposed framing: a. Painted, color as shown on Drawings. b. Paint shall be shop applied powder coating. 5.2 COVERING MATERIALS A. FB-24 Application: Awning Soffit Manufacturer: Twitchel Corp.,Dothan,AL(888) 894-8243 Distributor: John Boyle &Co., Statesville,NC (800)438-1061 Product: Textilene Plus FR Color: No. NXS, White Material: Extrusion coated polyester yarn Weight: 13oz./sq.yd. Fabric: Woven mesh Width: 61 inches B. FB-29 Application: Awning covering with either open or closed ends Manufacturer: Farrari Textiles Corp. Product Name: Precontraint 502 Exposed Surface Color: Red,No. 502-8255 Backing Color: Red Material: Woven yarn(I 100 Dtex PES HT) Scrim with 6 mil coating. Weight: 17.4 oz./sq.yd. Width: 71 inches Flame Spread Index: 15, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 Smoke Developed Index: 400,when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 C. FB-30 Application: Awning covering with either open or closed ends Manufacturer: Farrari Textiles Corp. Product Name: Precontraint 502 Exposed Surface Color: Black,No. 502-8450 Backing Color: Black Material: Woven yarn (1100 Dtex PES HT) Scrim with 6 mil coating. Weight: 17.4 oz./sq.yd. Width: 71 inches Flame Spread Index: 15, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 Smoke Developed Index: 400,when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion AWNINGS 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29,2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\10537NorthamptonMA.doc 10537-5 4.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Awnings shall conform to applicable code for fire resistance and flame spread/smoke developed ratings for awning covering. B. No awning maker's labels or other identification shall be permitted on the exposed surface of awnings, except those required by local ordnance. If required by local ordnance,such labels or other identification shall be in an inconspicuous location. 4.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01001. B. Shop Drawings: Submit two(2)blueline copies indicating awning profiles, sizes,type of fabric material, connection attachments, anchorage, size and type of fasteners,framing member sizes and finish, graphic images blade signs and accessories. Include material take- off. C. For awnings supported by or anchored to permanent construction,provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchors to be installed as a unit of Work by the Site General Contractor. 4.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver all awnings, complete to the project site. B. Protect materials from damage during installation at site. 4.8 GRAPHIC REQUIREMENTS A. Awning and sign graphics shall be developed from the project drawings and from'Talbots supplied artwork. Awning Contractor shall request this information from Talbots Store Planning Department at(781) 741-7597. PART 5 -PRODUCTS (TALBOTS AWNING CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY) 5.1 ALUMINUM FRAMING SYSTEM A. Framing: square,extruded aluminum channeled and non-channel tubing ,conforming to ASTM B429, 6063 alloy,T5 temper, as manufactured by Steel Stitch Corporation(800)441- 3316 or Milliken Industries(941)474-0223 or equal. B. Fittings: Elbows,T-shapes,wall brackets;cast or machined aluminum. C. Mounting: Brackets and flanges,with aluminum or stainless steel inserts and brackets for casting in concrete or embedding into masonry. D. Splice Connectors: Concealed spigot or collar with locking set screws; cast or machined aluminum. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion AWNINGS 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29,2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\10537NorthamptonMA.doc 10537-4 PART 4 -GENERAL(TALBOTS AWNING CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY) 4.1 SUMMARY A. Talbots' separate Awning Contractor scope of work includes but not limited to fabrication and installation of exterior non-illuminated awnings as shown on the Drawings and indicated on the Responsibility Schedule. B. Metal framing and fittings, fabric covering, applied graphics,blade signs, light fixtures and internal wiring. C. Awning Contractor shall provide awnini4s as fabricated by Awning Innovations, 1365 Sadiler Circle East Drive,Indianopolis,IN,46239. 1. Contact Frank Green(a, (317)352-8014,Fax: (317)352-8720. 4.2 PROJECT GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with Talbots rules of Conduct as referred to in the Site General Contractors copy of the General Conditions Article 3. B. Secure and pay for all required Building Awning Permits,Fees,Notices,licenses and inspections necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work. C. Obtain a copy of Landlord's Rules and Regulations for Contractors and comply with provisions contained therein. D. Coordination: 1. Coordinate installation of awnings with the Site General Contractor. 2. Coordinate work with Talbots Construction Project Manager. 3. Field verify all dimensions prior to fabrication. 4.3 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. Talbots will award a separate contract for the performance of certain construction operations at the site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with Work under this section. B. Talbots Awning Contractor shall cooperate fully with Talbots Site General Contractor so that work under that contract may be carried out smoothly,without interfering with or delaying Work under this Contract. 4.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Awning materials, assembly and attachments shall be designed to resist snow, wind velocity, suction,and uplift design loads in accordance with local codes and regulations at any point without damage or permanent set. B. Architect's drawings are diagrammatic and do not purport to identify nor solve problems of awning structural loading,movement,anchorage or wind velocities acting on the awning. Requirements shown by details are intended to establish basic dimension of units, sight lines and profiles of members. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites(Woman Expansion AWNINGS 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\10537NorthamptonMA.doc 10537-3 PART 3 - EXECUTION(SITE GENERAL CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY) 3.1 INSTALLATION A. G. C. shall verify condition, take field dimensions and provide blocking and framing to support Awning Contractor's Work. END OF SITE GENERAL CONTRACTORS WORK Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion AWNINGS 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\10537NorthamptonMA.doc 10537-2 SECTION 10537 AWNINGS PART 1 -GENERAL(SITE GENERAL CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY) 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 General Requirements. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Site General Contractor's scope of work includes but not limited to: 1. Preparation of site and coordination for awning installation. B. Awnings are furnished and installed by Talbots separate Awning Contractor 1.3 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. Talbots will award a separate contract for the fabrication and installation of awnings as indicated on the drawings and responsibility schedule. B. Site G.C. shall cooperate fully with Talbots separate awning contractor so that work under that contract may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying Work under this Contract. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Talbots separate Awning Contractor provides shop drawings. 1. G.C. may obtain copies upon request to the Construction Project Manager. PART 2-PRODUCTS (SITE GENERAL CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY) 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Talbots separate Awning Contractor provides all materials. B. Awning Contractor shall supply items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting templates. C. FRT Wood Blocking : Fire retardant treated softwood by AWPA C20 OR AWPA C27 Process. When tested per ASTM E84 flame spread rating not greater than 25. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion AWNINGS 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\10537NorthamptonMA.doc 10537-1 B. At fire extinguisher cabinet locations, use individual press-on letters, in vertical format, of contrasting color to cabinet, spelling FIRE EXTINGUISHER. 3.3 SCHEDULE A. Provide one extinguisher in each cabinet and on each wall bracket. Exact locations and quantities to be determined by authorities having jurisdiction. END OF SECTION Talbots Store No.335,Misses Renovation,PetitesAVoman Expansion FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29,2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\10522NorthamptonMA.doc 10522-3 2. Larsen's Manufacturing Co.,Minneapolis, MN,(763) 571-1181. 3. Potter Roemer,Union,NJ, (800) 526-4592. 2.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET A. Recessed steel cabinet with continuous hinge door with pull handle and roller catch. 1. Embassy Series,Model 5614-V10 by J.L Industries. 2. Dana Series,Model 7220-DV6 (Duo Vertical Panel)by Potter Roemer. B. Finish: 1. Cabinet exterior trim and door: Primed for field painting. 2. Cabinet interior: Baked enamel, color: white. 2.3 FIRE EXTINGUISHER A. ABC Multi-Purpose Dry Chemical type, 10-pound nominal capacity with a UL Rating of 40A- 60B:C. Cylinder shall contain a pressure gage, wall mounting bracket and hose/nozzle. 1. Cosmic l0E by J.L. Industries. 2. MP 10 by Larsen's Manufacturing Co. 3. 3010 by Potter Roemer. B. Finish: Red enamel. 2.4 EXTINGUISHER WALL BRACKET A. Manufacturer's standard surface mounted bracket to fit specified extinguisher. 1. MB846.by J.L. Industries. 2. 5525 by Larsen/s Manufacturing Co. 3. 3903 by Potter Roemer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install cabinets and mounting brackets plumb and level at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and in accordance with ADA guidelines. B. Secure cabinets rigidly in place to framed rough opening using fasteners best suited to substrate. C. Check extinguishers for proper charge operation and inspection tag. Remove and replace damaged, defective or under-charged units. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION LABEL A. Identify fire extinguisher locations without cabinets, use vertical decal spelling"FIRE EXTINGUISHER" applied to adjacent wall surface. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\10522NorthamptonMA.doc 10522-2 SECTION 10522 +O OK FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the General Conditions of the Contract, and Division 1 General Requirements. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes fire extinguishers, fire extinguisher cabinets, wall brackets, mounting hardware and accessories. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Certifications: 1. Provide new fire extinguishers that comply with both U.L. 711 (Rating and Fire Testing of Fire Extinguishers)and NFPA 10 (Portable Fire Extinguisher). 2. Extinguishers shall bear"UL Listing Mark"for type, rating,and classification of extinguisher indicated. 3. Conform to local and state codes as required. 4. New fire extinguishers shall be inspected by a State certified inspection agency and have a tag or label securely attached that indicates the month and year the inspection was performed and shall identify the person performing the inspection. a. Inspection shall assure that extinguisher is in a fully charged and operable condition. b. Verify extinguisher has not been actuated or tampered with,pressure gage reading or indicator in the operable range or position,that the visual inspection seal, safety seal and tamper indicators are not broken or missing, and that there is no obvious physical damage or condition to prevent operation. C. Determine fullness by hefting,and, if needed by weighing. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work with placement of wall reinforcement and blocking to receive anchor attachments. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering fire extinguisher equipment that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. J.L. Industries,Bloomington, MN,(952)835-6850. Talbots Store No.335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29,2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\10522NorthamptonMA.doc 10522-1 6.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to the manufacturer's instructions. B. Protect sign units from damage until acceptance by Talbots. 6.3 ELECTRIFIED SIGNS A. Talbots project site G.C. shall prepare area for electrified sign installation. Installation of electrified sign unit is provided under this section by Talbots Sign Contractor. The project site G.C. shall be responsible for the final electrical connection from the sign unit fixture to the G.C. supplied junction box. END OF TALBOTS SIGN CONTRACTOR SECTION Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion SIGNS 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29,2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\10430NorthamptonMA.doc 10430-11 E. PT-131 Manufacturer: Matthews Paint Company,Pleasant Prairie,WI. (800) 323-6593 , Finish Color: Mexicali Red Mfg. Formulation No: 282-214 Paint Type: Acrylic Polyurethane (VOC compliant) Finish Gloss: Satin Application: Interior/Exterior, spray Substrate: Acrylic,metal Primer: I coat(Refer to manufacturer's product recommendation for substrate). Finish Coat: 2 coats, 1 mil DFT(min)each coat(Mfg. Product: Satin VOC MAP) F. PT-132 Manufacturer: Matthews Paint Company, Pleasant Prairie, WI. (800)323-6593 Finish Color: Black Mfg. Formulation No: N-923 Paint Type: Acrylic Polyurethane(VOC compliant) Finish Gloss: Satin Application: Interior/Exterior, spray Substrate: Acrylic,metal Primer: 1 coat(Refer to manufacturer's product recommendation for substrate). Finish Coat: 2 coats, 1 mil DFT(min)each coat(Mfg. Product: Satin VOC MAP) PART 6 - EXECUTION(TALBOTS SIGN CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS) 6.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate sign units and accessories where indicated,using mounting methods of the type described and in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions. B. Preparation: 1. Protect adjacent work areas and finish surfaces from damage during product installation. 2. Coordinate installation with adjacent finish materials in a manner not to destroy adjacent surfaces. C. Install signs level,plumb, and at the height indicated,with sign surfaces free from distortion or other defects in appearance. D. Wall-Mounted Logo Signs: Attach signs to wall surfaces using the methods indicated below: 1. Dimensional Letters and Numbers: Mount letters and numbers using standard fastening methods recommended by the manufacturer for letter form, type of mounting, wall construction, and condition of exposure indicated. Provide heavy paper template to establish letter spacing and to locate holes for fasteners. 2. Flush Mounting: Mount letters with backs in contact with the wall surface. 3. Projected Mounting: Mount letters at the projection distance from the wall surface indicated. E. Use fasteners for attaching signs appropriate to field conditions. F. For exterior signs, weatherproof wiring trough and wiring penetrations. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion SIGNS 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29,2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\10430NorthamptonMA.doc 10430-10 C. Vinyl logo graphics: Die-cut characters from vinyl film with pressure-sensitive adhesive backing. 1. Ensure all surfaces where logo graphics are to be applied are free of all dirt, grease and loose debris. Clean surfaces with appropriate cleaner. 2. Apply copy to the exposed face(first surface) of the sign panel as indicated. 3. Place without air bubbles, creases or visible distortion. D. Brackets: Fabricate brackets and fittings for bracket-mounted signs from extruded aluminum, steel, or stainless steel to suit sign panel construction and mounting conditions indicated. Factory-paint brackets in a color matching the background color of the sign panel or as otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 5.6 PAINT FINISHES A. Colors identified with a prefix "PT" are Talbots unique color/paint system numbers and are identified with a specific manufacturer's reference color number as well as paint type and manufacturer's product number. B. PT-52 Manufacturer: Benjamin Moore Paints,Montvale,NJ Finish Color: BM Black Paint Type: Alkyd Enamel Finish Gloss: High Gloss Application: Exterior Substrate: Metal,New Primer: Ironclad Retardo Rust Inhibitive Primer(Mfg. Product No. 163) Finish Coat: 2 Coats Impervo H.G. Enamel (Mfg. Product No. 133). C. PT-63 Manufacturer: Matthews Paint Company,Pleasant Prairie WI. (800) 323-6593 Finish Color: Brilliant Gold,46400SP Paint Type: Acrylic Polyurethane(VOC compliant) Finish Gloss: Satin Application: Exterior/Interior, spray Substrate-Wood/MetaUAcrylic Primer: 1 coat(Refer to manufacturer's product recommendation for substrate). Finish Coat: 2 coats, 1 mil DFT(min)each coat Top Coat: 1 coat satin clear.(Mfg. Product No. 42228SP). D. PT-130 Manufacturer: Matthews Paint Company,Pleasant Prairie,WI(800) 323-6593 Finish Color: Natural White Mfg. Formulation No: 282-202 Paint Type: Acrylic Polyurethane(VOC compliant) Finish Gloss: Satin Application: Interior/Exterior, spray Substrate: Wood/Acrylic/Metal Primer: 1 coat(Refer to manufacturer's product recommendation for substrate). Finish Coat: 2 coats, 1 mil DFT(min)each coat(Mfg.Product: Satin VOC MAP) Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion SIGNS 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29,2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\10430NorthamptonMA.doc 10430-9 B. Provide vinyl graphics in colors and film types as shown on drawings. Fabricate to required sizes and styles indicated. A C. Graphics shall have a backing sheet on the adhesive side of the vinyl, and transfer tape on the non-adhesive face. Pre-cut vinyl graphics shall be pre-spaced and ready to apply with transfer tape. D. Provide installation instructions for installation by others. 5.4 STORE INTERIOR TRANSITION SIGNS A. Comply with requirements indicated for materials,thickness, finishes,colors,designs, shapes, sizes, and details of construction. 1. Produce smooth, even, level sign panel surfaces, constructed to remain flat under installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally. 2. Fabricate frames to profile indicated. 3. Edge profile shall be as shown on Drawings. B. Painting: 1. Shop paint panel face and edge profile using approved"PT"paint and color reference indicated. 2. Exposed surfaces of hanging rods and ceiling cover shall be painted with a satin finish. Color as indicated on drawings. C. Vinyl logo graphics: Die-cut characters from vinyl film with pressure-sensitive adhesive backing. 1. Ensure all surfaces where logo graphics are to be applied are free of all dirt, grease and loose debris. Clean surfaces with appropriate cleaner. 2. Apply copy to the exposed face(first surface)of the sign panel as indicated. 3. Place without air bubbles, creases or visible distortion. 5.5 PANEL/BLADE/TAVERN SIGNS A. Comply with requirements indicated for materials,thickness, finishes, colors,designs, shapes, sizes, and details of construction. 1. Produce smooth,even,level sign panel surfaces, constructed to remain flat under installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally. 2. Fabricate frames to profile indicated. B. Painting: 1. Shop paint panel face and edge profile using approved"PT"paint and color reference indicated. 2. Exposed surfaces of brackets for interior applications shall be painted with a satin finish. Color as indicated on drawings. 3. Exposed surfaces of brackets for exterior applications shall be painted with a gloss finish. Color as indicated on drawings. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion SIGNS 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\10430NorthamptonMA.doc 10430-8 F. Mill joints to a tight,hairline fit. Form joints exposed to the weather to exclude water penetration and prevent light leaks. G. Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals,protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry,protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. H. Fabricate letter faces from clear polycarbonate or acrylic sheet of thickness indicated. I. Electrical Requirements: 1. Provide appropriately sized and rated transformers, insulators, and other components necessary for operation and application. 2. Signs shall bear the UL label and comply with applicable NEMA standards. 3. Provide transformers remotely mounted in wiring trough and fused on primary input. 4. Make provisions for servicing and concealed connection to the building system. 5. Coordinate electrical characteristics with those of the power supply provided. 6. Provide pigtail of sufficient length to allow connection of the fixture to the G.C. furnished junction box. J. Neon Components 1. Provide concealed white neon tubes of the number and spacing indicated or required by size of the characters to illuminate letter faces evenly. 2. Neon Tubes:#6500 for red/white. 3. Transformers for Neon Tubes: As manufactured by Jefferson or equal, size accordingly for sign. K. Red"T" 1. Face substrate shall use a white 7328 seamless lexan or acrylic sheet material (3/16" thick)with a translucent red vinyl film(230-53) overlay applied to first surface. 2. Exposed letter returns shall be painted red PT-131. 3. Trim cap shall be matching red. L. 2-Color Day/Night Letters and Graphics(Black-Unlit,White-Lit): 1. Face substrate shall use a white 7328 seamless lexan or acrylic sheet material(3/16" thick). 2. 3M Dual-Color Film 3635-222 (black) shall be overlayed to the first surface. 3. Exposed letter returns shall be painted black PT-132. 4. Trim cap shall be black. M. Trim caps shall be"Jewelite trim-cap", color as indicated on drawings. N. Provide weep holes at bottom for water drainage on exterior sign units. 5.3 VINYL LETTERS AND GRAPHICS ON STOREFRONT GLASS (WINDOW DECAL) A. Interior custom vinyl graphic film with pressure-sensitive adhesive face for second surface mounting on storefront window glazing surfaces. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion SIGNS 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\10430NorthamptonMA.doc 10430-7 M. Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous metal or hot-dipped galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work. N. FRTW Wood Blocking: Fire retardant treated softwood by AWPA C20 OR AWPA C27 Process. When tested per ASTM E84 flame spread rating not greater than 25. O. Fiberglass shapes: 1. Glass cloth, matt and "chop" shall be equal to the products of PPG-Owens Corning. 2. Polyester resins shall be Class A. The resin will be flame retardant promoted thixotropic polyester resin designed for use in hand lay-up and spray-up processes. This resin is specifically formulated for use in applications that require an ASTM-84, Class 1 flame spread rating, without the use of fillers or antimony trioxide,with an ASTM-84 flame spread rating of 10 unfilled. 3. Gel Coat shall be part of system specified at a .015" to .025" thickness. 4. Final ratio of materials shall be 25% fiber 75%resin for the body of components. 5. FRP Components when installed in exterior applications shall resist all wind loading. 5.2 FACE-LIT NEON LETTER AND GRAPHIC UNITS (PAN CHANNEL) A. Fabricate to required sizes and styles, using materials and thickness indicated. Comply with requirements indicated for finish, style, and size. Form exposed faces and sides of characters to produce surfaces free from warp and distortion. Include internal bracing for stability and attachment of mounting accessories. B. Mounting/Bracing: 1. Include internal bracing for stability and attachment of mounting accessories. 2. Letter"T": Back shall be reinforced with 1/2" marine grade plywood as required for rigidity. 3. Provide mounting pins securely attached to the back of the graphics. 4. Include manufacturer's stainless steel hardware for projection mounting of the characters at the distance from the wall or pan surface indicated. 5. Provide keyhole slots for installation as required. C. Painting 1. Exposed surfaces of letters and graphics shall be painted with a satin finish using Acrylic Polyurethane paint as manufactured by Matthews Paint Corp. Paint type and color(PT)as indicated on drawings. 2. Interior of letters and graphics shall be painted low gloss white PT-150. D. Rigid channel letters shall be manufactured from sheet aluminum 1. Letter"T"shall have .063" aluminum returns and shall be reinforced with 1/2" marine grade plywood on interior of back as required for rigidity. 2. All other sign letters and graphics shall have .040-inch aluminum backs and returns. 3. Attach letters to sheet metal back channels. E. Welding: Use welding method that is appropriate for metal and finish indicated and that develops strength required to comply with structural performance criteria. Comply with AWS standards for recommended practices in shop welding. Finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth, flush and blended to match adjoining surfaces. "' Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion SIGNS 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\10430NorthamptonMA.doc 10430-6 D. Polycarbonate Sheet: Monolithic sheet, sign grade,clear, or color white as required. 1. Model XL-1 Sheet "Lexan" as manufactured by G.E. Plastics, Structured Products or Makrolon SL as supplied by Sheffield Plastics, Sheffield MA, (800-628-5084), or E &T Plastics Manufacturing Co.,Inc.,Ft. Lauderdale,FL, (800) 234-4525. Thickness as shown on drawings. 2. White Translucent Sheet density: as required to produce uniform brightness and minimum halation effects. E. Dual Color, day/night face-Lit Sign Film: Dual-Color Film Series 3635-222 (matte black) perforated vinyl film. Light Management Film Manufactured by 3M Commercial Graphics Division. (800) 328-3908. F. Opaque Vinyl Film: Opaque "Scotchcal"Nonreflective Vinyl Graphic Film,0.0035-inch minimum thickness,with clear pressure-sensitive adhesive(on appropriate face), suitable for exterior as well as interior applications. Manufactured by 3M Commercial Graphics Division.(800) 328-3908,distributed by Gerber Scientific (800)222-7446. COLOR FILM NO RED (Cardinal Red) Gerber No.: 220/225-53, (3M No.: 3650-53) BLACK (Black) Gerber No: 220/225-12,(3M No.: 3650-12) GREY(Medium Grey) Gerber No.: 220/225-31, (3M No.: 3650-31) G. Translucent Vinyl Film: Translucent"Scotchcal"low gloss translucent vinyl film,with clear pressure-sensitive adhesive(on appropriate face), suitable for exterior as well as interior applications as manufactured by 3M Commercial Graphics Division. (800)328-3908, distributed by Gerber Scientific(800)222-7446. COLOR FILM NO RED(Cardinal Red) Gerber No.: 230-53, (3M No.: 3630-53) GOLD (Gold Nugget) Gerber No.: 230-141, (3M No.: 3630-141) BLACK(Black) Gerber No.: 230-22, (3M No.: 3630-22) H. Aluminum Sheet: Alloy and temper recommended by the sign manufacturer for the type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability properties specified in ASTM B 209 for 5005-H15 alloy. Thickness and finish as indicated on the Drawings. Typical thickness for sheets less than 4-feet x 8-feet: minimum 0.090-inches and sheet greater than 4-feet x 8-feet: minimum 0.125-inches. I. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by the sign manufacturer for the type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability properties specified in ASTM B 221 for 6063-T5 alloy. J. Stainless Steel: Plate,sheet, and strip,AISI Type 302,complying with requirements of ASTM A 167. K. Hardwood or Hardwood Moldings: Yellow Poplar,plain sawn suitable for opaque paint finish. L. Fasteners: Provide concealed fasteners fabricated from metals that are not corrosive to the sign material and mounting surface. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion SIGNS 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29,2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\10430NorthamptonMA.doc 10430-5 3. Templates: Furnish full-size spacing templates for individually mounted dimensional letters and numbers. B. Illuminated signs: Wiring diagrams including location of electrical connections and power requirements for lighting fixtures. 4.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver all signs,complete to the project site. B. Protect materials from damage during shipping and storage on site. 4.6 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Signage shall be developed from the project drawings and from Talbots supplied artwork. Artwork can be obtained from Talbots Store Planning Department, at(781) 741-4687. 4.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. UL and NEMA Compliance: Sign Contractor shall provide lighting fixtures and electrical components for illuminated signs that are labeled and listed by UL and comply with applicable NEMA standards. B. No signmaker's labels or other identification shall be permitted on the exposed surface of signs,except those required by local ordnance. If required by local ordnance, such labels or other identification shall be in an inconspicuous location. PART 5 -PRODUCTS (TALBOTS SIGN CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS) 5.1 MATERIALS A. MDO Plywood: Exterior grade plywood(BB,Group 1)with both faces of Medium Density Overlay as described in Product Standard PS-1. Panels shall be APA trademarked. Thickness as indicated on Drawings. B. MDF(Medium Density Fiberboard): Manufactured in accordance with ANSI A208.2. Panel shall be a formed product manufactured from lignocellulosic fibers combined with a synthetic resin or other suitable bonding system and joined together under heat and pressure. "Synergite" as manufactured by Georgia Pacific or equal.Thickness as shown on Drawings. C. Cast Acrylic Sheet: Provide cast methyl methacrylate monomer plastic sheet,in sizes and thickness indicated. 1. Colored Acrylic Sheet, Sign White: Color 7328, 3/16"thick for face lit neon channel letters/graphics. 2. Colored Acrylic Sheet, Sign White: Color 2447, 3/16"thick for face lit LED channel letters/graphics. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion SIGNS 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\10430NorthamptonMA.doc 10430-4 PART 4 - GENERAL(TALBOTS SIGN CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS) 4.1 SUMMARY OF WORK A. Talbots'separate Sign Contractor scope of work includes but not limited to fabrication and installation of illuminated and non-illuminated signs, interior and exterior,wall and ceiling mounted as indicated on the Responsibility Schedule and as indicated on Drawings. 4.2 PROJECT GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with Talbots rules of Conduct as referred to in the Site General Contractors copy of the General Conditions Article 3. B. Secure and pay for all required Building Sign Permits,Fees,Notices, licenses and inspections necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work. C. Obtain a copy of Landlord's Rules and Regulations for Contractors and comply with provisions contained therein. D. Coordination: 1. Coordinate installation of signs with the Site General Contractor. 2. Coordinate work with Talbots Construction Project Manager. E. The components indicated on the drawings show dimensions established to accomplish the Architect's intended visual result and to conform to the building's configuration. The sign fabricator shall verify that all components that will actually be provided for the work of this ;0** section will fit the building's structural elements and conform to the visual design criteria indicated on the drawings without materially altering profiles and alignments. 4.3 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. Talbots will award a separate contract for the performance of certain construction operations at the site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with Work under this section. B. Talbots' Sign Contractor shall cooperate fully with the Talbots Site General Contractor so that work under that contract may be carved out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying Work under this Contract. 4.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit two(2)blueline copies indicating profiles, sizes,type of material, connection attachments,anchorage, size and type of fasteners, graphic images, accessories, all graphic and copy color references, color and product for all applied finishes. Include plans, elevations, and large-scale sections of typical members and other components. Show anchors,grounds, layout,reinforcement,accessories, and installation details. 1. Provide message list for each sign required,including large-scale details of wording and lettering layout. 2. For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction,provide setting drawings,templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchors to be installed as a unit of Work by the Site General Contractor. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion SIGNS 34 Bridge Street, Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\10430NorthamptonMA.doc 10430-3 PART 3 -EXECUTION(SITE GENERAL CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS) 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Verify that substrates are completely finished and ready to receive signage before beginning installation. B. Layout units accurately according to templates provided to ensure that units will be plumb and level and properly spaced. C. Install signs as indicated in the responsibility schedule in the locations indicated on the drawings and in accordance with approved shop drawings, square with other building elements and level. Install anchors suitable to installation conditions. D. Provide all concealed blocking. E. Install at mounting height indicated on the drawings. F. Clean sign units in strict accordance with the manufacturer's cleaning instructions. Replace any signs that cannot be cleaned satisfactorily. G. Conceal anchor heads of cast plaques by installing rosette into screw head and securing with Loctite. H. Provide electrical connection to approximate area of final connection. I. Provide final electrical connection from the fixture to the junction box.. END OF SITE GENERAL CONTRACTORS WORK Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion SIGNS 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\10430NorthamptonMA.doc 10430-2 SECTION 10430 0 * SIGNS PART 1 - GENERAL(SITE GENERAL CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS) 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 General Requirements. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Site General Contractor's scope of work includes but not limited to: 1. Preparation of site and coordination for sign installation. 2. Installation of bronze plaques and door signs and signs as shown on the responsibility schedule. 3. Final electrical hook-up for all illuminated signs. 1.3 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. Talbots will award a separate contract for the fabrication and installation of signage for units as indicated on the drawings and responsibility schedule. B. Site General Contractor shall cooperate fully with Talbots separate sign contractor so that work under that contract may be carried out smoothly,without interfering with or delaying Work under this Contract. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Accept delivery of Talbots furnished/"G.C. installed"signs. B. Protect materials from damage during storage on site. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Talbots separate Sign Contractor provides shop drawings. Site General Contractor may obtain copies upon request to the Construction Project Manager. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (SITE GENERAL CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS) 2.1 MATERIALS A. FRTW Wood Blocking: In accordance with requirements of specification Section 06200. B. Bronze wall/floor plaque and door signs are furnished by Talbots. C. Fasteners:Type and size as required by conditions of use. Stainless steel for exposed exterior use;hot dip galvanized steel for concealed exterior use and for treated products,plain steel for interior use. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion SIGNS 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\10430NorthamptonMA.doc 10430-1 C. Anchors and fasteners are supplied with kit. 2.3 CORNER GUARDS—STOCK ROOM AREA A. Talbots furnishes stainless steel corner guards, ASTM A 176, Type 430, 16 gage, satin finish. 1. 2-inches x 2-inches x 90-degrees. 2. 3-1/2 inches x 3-1/2 inches x 90-degrees. 3. 3-7/16 inches x 3-7/16 inches x 60-degrees. 2.4 PLINTH GUARDS A. Talbots furnishes stainless steel plinth guards,type 304 stainless, 16 gage,Finish: satin. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Use skilled workmen and install units in accordance with manufacturers'printed instructions. B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. C. Attach(as required)to supporting construction using anchor type best suited to substrate. 1. Conceal fasteners. D. Install metal corner guards and plinth guards in locations shown,with construction adhesive or chrome plated sheet metal screws. ---END OF SECTION--- Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\10005NorthamptonMA.doc 10005-2 SECTION 10005 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 General Requirements. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Installation of specialty items including but not limited to the following: 1. Lockers. 2. Storefront Window Banner Tracks. 3. Surface mounted metal comer guards(Stock Room area). 4. Surface mounted metal plinth guards. 1.3 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate work with placement of wall and ceiling reinforcement to receive anchor attachments. B. Do not install specialty items until room finishes are completed. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Accept inside delivery of Talbots furnished items. B. Protect material from damage during storage on site. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 LOCKERS A. Talbots furnishes lockers. B. 16 unit locker model "LockeRack 5990SU/5991CRSU"manufactured by Lyon Workspace Products C. 6 unit locker model "LockeRack 5990SU"manufactured by Lyon Workspace Products. 2.2 WINDOW BANNER TRACK FIXTURE KIT A. Talbots furnishes banner Track. B. Kit includes surface mounted aluminum track model IFC-50, slide carriers model IFC400, and removable end caps as manufactured by Imperial Fastener Company, Inc. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\10005NorthamptonMA.doc 10005-1 J. Where wall covering tucks into door frame reveals, or metal wallboard or plaster stops, apply covering with contact adhesive within 6 inches of wall covering termination. Ensure full 100*0, contact bond. K. Install termination trim where vinyl does not stop at a corner. L. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles,blisters, excess wet adhesive from seam before proceeding to next wall covering sheet. Wipe clean with dry cloth. M. Continue wall covering through jambs and heads of drywall openings. N. At completion of wall covering application,replace all accessories,plates and similar items to original position. O. During application of wall coverings,protect the work of other surfaces against soilage and damage. P. Wrap electrical cover plates and access doors with matching wall covering on wall covered walls. 3.3 DEFECTS A. Replace wall coverings applied to defective substrate surfaces. Correct defects in completed wall coverings. 3.4 REMEDIAL WORK I A. In addition to the new work specified herein, it is the intent of this section to include the replacement and repair of existing wall coverings scheduled to remain that becomes damaged or is removed due to the alterations and removal of existing work. Application and workmanship shall be equal to the quality of new work as specified herein as approved by the Architect. Use specific types at respective areas affected. END OF SECTION Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion WALL COVERING 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\09955NorthamptonMA.doc 09955-4 C. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, and defects. Vacuum clean surfaces free of loose particles. D. Check painted surfaces for pigment bleeding. Sand gloss, semigloss,and eggshell finishes with fine sandpaper. E. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items. F. Acclimatize wall-covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas not less than 24 hours before installation. G. Fill cracks and smooth irregularities with filler; sand smooth. H. Apply two coats of primer sealer to substrate surfaces. Allow to dry. Lightly sand smooth. Vacuum clean. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Apply adhesive and wall covering in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Apply adhesive to back of wall covering with brush or roller in thin, even coats over entire panel surface immediately prior to application of wall covering. Smooth wall covering to eliminate bubbles and wrinkles and ensure adhesion to wall covering C. Use wall covering in roll number sequence or in pattern sequence,whichever is applicable. D. Hang wall covering by reversing alternate strips except on match patterns as applicable. Hang non-matched patterns by overlapping the edges and double cutting through both thicknesses with zinc or aluminum strip back-up to prevent cutting the substrate(Do not razor cut on gypsum board surfaces). It is preferred to razor trim edges on flat work table. All ceiling-to- wall and wall-to-adjacent material cuts shall be true to lines and conform to adjacent outline E. Apply wall covering smooth,without wrinkles, gaps or overlaps.Eliminate air pockets and ensure full bond to substrate surface. Butt edges tight. F. Install seams vertical and plumb at least 6 inches from outside corners and 3 inches from inside corners. Horizontal seams are not acceptable. G. Install wall covering before installation of bases, cabinets, hardware, or items attached to or spaced slightly from wall surface. Do not install wall covering more than 1/2-inch below top of resilient base. Run fabric behind cabinets and splashes 2 inches. H. Cover spaces above and below windows, above doors, in pattern or numerical sequence from roll, whichever is applicable. I. Apply wall covering to electrical, telephone and other wall plates prior to replacing. look Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion WALL COVERING 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\09955NorthamptonMA.doc 09955-3 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Accept inside delivery of Owner furnished materials. B. Protect packaged adhesive from temperature cycling and cold temperatures. C. Do not store roll goods on end. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Owner furnishes all wall coverings. 2.2 WALL COVERINGS WC-21 Manufacturer: GenCorp, Hackensack,NJ Product Name: Essex 54 Vinyl Wallcovering Color: Vanilla SP-31-01 Pattern: Prima Fabric Type: Osnaburg Weight: 20 oz/lin/yd. Repeat: None Vinyl Wall Covering Standard: FS CCC-W-408A,Type II, Medium Duty. Flame& Smoke: Flame spread- 10, Smoke developed 10-45 per ASTM E84 Adhesive: As recommended by manufacturer with mildewcide. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Type recommended by wall covering manufacturer to suit application to substrate. Water based types,mildew resistant,non staining. B. Substrate Filler: As recommended by adhesive and wall covering manufacturers; compatible with substrate. C. Substrate Primer and Sealer: Type as recommended by wall covering manufacturer. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation. B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair wall covering's bond, including mold, mildew, oil, grease, incompatible primers, dirt, and dust. 1. Wash impervious surfaces with trisodium phosphate, rinse and neutralize; wipe dry. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion WALL COVERING 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\09955NorthamptonMA.doc 09955-2 SECTION 09955 WALL COVERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the General Conditions of the Contract, and Division 1 General Requirements. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Surface preparation,prime painting and application of materials and incidental services including but not limited to the following: 1. Installation of wall covering. 2. Adhesive. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in installing wall fabrics with three years documented experience. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Owner will furnish wall coverings with the following surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E84 or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Flame Spread 25 2. Fuel Contribution 35 3. Smoke Development 50 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the adhesive or vinyl covering product manufacturer. 1. Maintain these conditions 24 hours before during and after installation of adhesive wall covering. B. Provide continuous ventilation during installation and for not less than the time recommended by wall-covering manufacturer for full drying or curing. 1.6 EXTRA STOCK A. Owner will furnish extra material for project. Store one double roll (or 10 Ly)of each color of wall covering above Manager's Office or other location as directed by Construction Project Manager. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion WALL COVERING 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\09955NorthamptonMA.doc 09955-1 PT-155 Manufacturer: Benjamin Moore Paints, Montvale,NJ Finish Color: BM No. 961, Off-White Paint Type: Alkyd Modified Acrylic Latex Finish Gloss: Semi-Gloss Application: Exterior/Interior Substrate: Wood,new Primer: 1 Coat Moorewhite Primer(Mfg. Product No. C 100) Finish Coat: 2 coats Moorglo Latex House &Trim Paint(Mfg. Product No. 096). PT-157 Manufacturer: Benjamin Moore Paints, Montvale NJ Finish Color: BM No. 961, Off-White Paint Type: Acrylic Direct To Metal Finish Gloss: Semi-Gloss Application: Exterior/Interior-brush applied Substrate: Aluminum new/refinish Primer: 1 coat Bonding Primer(Mfg. Product No. M04) Finish coat: 2 coats D.T.M Acrylic Semi Gloss(Mfg. Product No. M29) 3.9 MISCELLANEOUS A. Sprinkler and gas piping above ceilings and in unpainted rooms are not to be painted. B. Paint new plywood panelboards in various rooms to which electrical, telephone and security , equipment will be attached, one coat black enamel finish before equipment is attached, if possible; if not,protect electrical equipment adequately before applying paint. ---END OF SECTION--- Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion PAINTING 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\09900NorthamptonMA.doc 09900-10 PT-93 Manufacturer: Benjamin Moore Paints, Montvale,NJ Finish Color: BM White Paint Type: Alkyd Enamel Finish Gloss: Soft-Gloss Application: Interior/exterior Substrate: Metal,New/repaint Primer: None Finish Coat: 2 Coats Alkyd Enamel (Mfg.Product No. C 163). PT-113 Manufacturer: Benjamin Moore Paints, Montvale,NJ Finish Color: BM No. 961, Off-white Paint Type: Vinyl Acrylic Latex Finish Gloss: Pearl Application: Interior, synthetic brush, short-nap roller or spray. Substrate: Plaster/Drywall Primer: 1 coat Regal First Coat Primer&Underbody(Mfg. Product No. 216) Finish Coat: 2 Coats Regal Aqua Pearl (Mfg. Product No. 310). PT-133 Manufacturer: Benjamin Moore Paints,Montvale,NJ Finish Color: BM White Paint Type: Acrylic Latex Primer Finish Gloss: Flat Application: Interior/Exterior Substrate: Plaster/Drywall/Wood Primer: 2 coats Fresh Start(Mfg. Product No. 023) Finish Coat: N/A PT-152 Manufacturer: Surface Protection Industries International Finish Color: Multicolor Speck(Manufactures No. PL-00824W Mfg. Product: Polomyx Paint Type: Waterbase Acrylic Finish Gloss: low gloss Application: Interior, spray Substrate: Plaster/Drywall Primer: 1 coat Polomyx No. 202 white basecoat Finish: 1 coat(2 step)Polomyx Waterbase seamless liquid multicolor coating,ready mixed,no field mixing or tinting. NOTE: This paint is a long lead item and must be ordered per project schedule Call Manufacturer's national distributor(Righter Group Inc )at(800) 848-4841 for local distributor and lead time. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion PAINTING 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\09900NorthamptonMA.doc 09900-9 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide periodic testing with Wet Film Thickness gage to verify that proper thickness of finish coatings are being applied. 3.7 CLEANING A. As Work proceeds, promptly remove paint where spilled, splashed, or spattered. B. During progress of Work maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials, and debris. C. Collect cotton waste, cloths, and material that may constitute a fire hazard,place in closed metal containers and remove daily from site. D. Spot painting will be allowed to correct soiled or damaged paint surfaces only when touch-up spot will blend into surrounding finish and is invisible to normal viewing. Otherwise, re-coat entire section to corners or visible stopping point. 3.8 SCHEDULE INTERIOR SURFACES: The following Painting Schedule shows the number of coats required for walls and ceilings. Doors, door frames;pipes,miscellaneous metals, etc., are not itemized in this Schedule and shall be painted as specified elsewhere in this section, as indicated on the drawings. PT-08 Manufacturer: Benjamin Moore Paints, Montvale,NJ Finish Color: BM No. 968, Off White Paint Type: Vinyl Acrylic Latex Finish Gloss: Flat Application: Interior,brush,roller, spray Substrate: Plaster/Drywall,new/repaint Primer: 1 coat Regal First Coat Primer&Underbody(Mfg. Product No. 216) Finish Coat: 2 Coats Regal Wall Satin (Mfg. Product No. 215). PT-09 Manufacturer: Benjamin Moore Paints, Montvale, NJ Finish Color: BM White Paint Type: Alkyd Enamel Finish Gloss: Semi-Gloss Application: Interior,brush,roller, spray Substrate: Wood,new/repaint Primer: 1 coat Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody(Mfg. Product No. C217) Finish Coat: 2 Coats Moore's Alkyd Dulamel (Mfg. Product No. C207). Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion PAINTING 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\09900NorthamptonMA.doc 09900-8 5. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts and convectors that are visible through grilles and louvers with flat black paint, to limit of sight line. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector to match face panels. F. Masonry: 1. No paint shall be put on the interior of exterior masonry walls until exterior paint has been completed, and wall allowed to dry out adequately to obtain proper adhesion. 3.4 SURFACES NOT TO RECEIVE FIELD FINISHING A. Do not paint copper,bronze, chrome plated items,nickel, stainless steel, Monel metal, lead, face brick,prefinished wall, ceiling, and floor coverings, signs, items with factory applied final finish (except where exposed in finished spaces), crawl spaces, chases, and plenums above suspended ceilings unless otherwise specified or scheduled. B. Exterior: Exposed portions of concrete foundation walls, face brick, exterior signs, shingles, aluminum store front work and glass, aluminum gravel stops, spun aluminum exhaust fans, membrane roofing, gas vents,roof top HVAC units, ducts on roof, and exterior galvanized pipe rails. C. Interior: 1. Underside of roofing framing or mezzanine framing in rooms where no finish ceiling is required, including concrete, metal deck,joists and structural steel. Similarly,no metal deck,joists and structural steel. Similarly,no structural members above ceiling will require painting. 2. Backroom and Sales Area furniture, fixtures, and equipment furnished by Owner, unless specifically noted. 3.5 CLEANING AND BUFFING CLEAR FINISHED MAPLE WOOD COMPONENTS A. Use the following procedure for cleaning and buffing existing clear finished wood casework components designated on Drawings: 1. Clean wood surfaces by vacuuming and lightly wiping. 2. Use approved cleaning/buffing compound ["Clear"color Briwax as manufactured by Briwax Woodcare Products(800)274-9299]. 3. Apply carefully with a soft cotton cloth(do not use a synthetic cloth)using small amounts to provide a small working area about the size of a dinner plate. Apply with a side-to-side wrist motion. Application should be even, and in the same direction of the wood grain,no circles. Wipe away any excess wax and allow to dry 3 minutes. 4. Ensure the applicator cloth is clean during the entire process. As the cleaning/buffing compound is being applied, a build up of old dirt and wax will accumulate on the applicator cloth. 5. Buff with a clean lint free cloth. Turn the cloth repeatedly to always present a clean portion to the working area. Buff wax in the same direction of the grain,no circles. Finish off by buffing from end to end to avoid stop marks. 6. Scuffs, stubborn spots or problem areas may be addressed with a white nylon scrubber pad. Finish with the cloth application as before. 7. Several coats of wax thoroughly buffed between each coat are more durable than one thick coat. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion PAINTING 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\1\41SSY\05132\specs\09900NorthamptonMA.doc 09900-7 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: 1. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Final finish coats shall have visual evidence of solid hiding and uniform appearance, and shall be free and smooth of brush marks, streaks, sags, runs, laps, or skipped areas. 2. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. 3. Apply each coat to uniform finish and thickness. 4. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved. 5. Sand lightly between coats on wood and metal items to achieve required finish. 6. Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied. 7. Edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors shall be sharp and clean with no overlapping. B. Gypsum Board: 1. Drywall shall be taped and spackled by Drywall Subcontractor. 2. First coat on gypsum wallboard shall include such repeated touching up of suction spots or overall applications of primer sealer as necessary to produce a uniform color and gloss. C. Wood: 1. Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain before set. Wipe excess from surface. 2. Prime back surfaces of interior and exterior woodwork scheduled to be painted with primer paint. 3. Prime back surfaces of interior woodwork scheduled to receive stain or varnish finish with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with mineral spirits. 4. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment with one coat black enamel before installing equipment. D. Metal: 1. Painting to protect aluminum from contact with dissimilar materials is specified under the section of the specifications covering the specific item. E. Mechanical and Electrical Equipment: 1. Paint shop primed equipment. Paint shop prefinished items where exposed to view in finished spaces. In mechanical rooms,repair shop pre-finished coatings that have been scratched or otherwise damaged with identical touch-up paint. Sand prior to touching up as required. 2. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately. 3. Paint grilles,registers, diffusers, and speaker grilles to match adjacent wall and ceiling surfaces, except that factory pre-finished items need not be painted if installed in a suspended acoustical ceiling system where the acoustical panels match the mechanical or electrical item color. 4. In finished spaces,prime and paint exposed pipes, conduit,boxes, ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports. Paint to match adjacent surfaces. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion PAINTING 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\09900NorthamptonMA.doc 09900-6 C. Concrete and Masonry: �Owk 1. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry. D. Gypsum Board: 1. Gypsum Board Surfaces: Latex fill minor defects. Spot prime defects after repair. E. Wood: 1. Interior Wood Items Scheduled to Receive Opaque Paint Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal knots,pitch streaks,and sappy sections with sealer.Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats. 2. Interior Wood Items Schedule to Receive Transparent Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to sealing, seal knots,pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after sealer has dried; sand lightly between coats. 3. Exterior Wood Scheduled to receive Opaque Paint or Stain Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter. Seal knots,pitch streaks, and sappy sections. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior caulking compound after prime coat has been applied. 4. Exterior Wood Scheduled to Receive Transparent Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter; seal knots,pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior caulking compound after sealer has been applied. 5. Wood Doors Scheduled for Painting: Seal top and bottom edges with primer. F. Preparation of Previously Coated Surfaces: 1. General: a. Remove cracked and deteriorated sealants and calking. b. Remove chalk deposits and loose,blistered,peeling, scaling, or crazed finish to bare base material or sound substrate by scraping and sanding. C. Wash surfaces with solution of TSP to remove wax, oil, grease, and other foreign material;rinse, and allow to dry. Exercise caution that TSP solution does not soften existing coating. d. Abrade glossy surfaces by sanding or wiping with liquid de-glosser. e. Remove mildew as specified above. f. Test compatibility of existing coatings by applying new coating to small, inconspicuous area. If new coatings lift or blister existing coatings,request recommendation from Architect. g. Apply specified primer to surfaces scheduled to receive coatings. 2. Gypsum Wallboard: a. Fill cracks and voids with spackling compound. b. Apply primer over bare surfaces and newly applied texture coatings. 3. Metal: a. Remove rust from surfaces to bare metal in accordance with SP3 "Power Tool Cleaning". b. Exercise care not to remove galvanizing. C. Complete preparation as specified for new work. 4. Wood: a. Fill cracks, crevices and nail holes with putty or wood filler. b. Apply primer over bare surfaces and filler material. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion PAINTING 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\09900NorthamptonMA.doc 09900-5 B. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums 1. Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. 2. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent. 3. Interior Located Wood: 15 percent,measured in accordance with ASTM D2016. 4. Exterior Located Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016. C. Test shop applied primers for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: 1. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of the item,provide surface- applied protection before surface preparation and painting. a. After completing painting operations in each space or area,reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. 2. Correct minor defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this Section. 3. Remove existing coatings that exhibit loose surface defects. 4. Shellac and seal marks that may bleed through surface finishes. 5. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. 6. Asphalt, Creosote, or Bituminous Surfaces Scheduled for Paint Finish: Remove foreign particles to permit adhesion of finishing materials. Apply compatible sealer or primer. 7. Insulated Coverings: Remove dirt, grease, and oil from canvas and cotton. B. Metal: 1. Aluminum Surfaces Scheduled for Paint Finish: Remove surface contamination by steam or high pressure water. Remove oxidation with acid etch and solvent washing. Apply etching primer immediately following cleaning. 2. Copper Surfaces Scheduled for a Paint Finish: Remove contamination by steam,high pressure water, or solvent washing. Apply vinyl etch primer immediately following cleaning. 3. Galvanized Surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer. 4. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces: Remove grease, scale, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident,remove by wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints,bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Spot prime paint after repairs. 5. Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion PAINTING 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\09900NorthamptonMA.doc 09900-4 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptance. B. Container labeling to include manufacturer's name, type of paint,brand name, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. C. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in well ventilated area, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. D. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs name a single product and manufacturer,provide the product named. 1. Benjamin Moore(BM). 2. Polymyx 2.2 MATERIALS A. Coatings: Ready mixed. Process pigments to a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating with good flow and brushing properties; capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. B. Accessory Materials:Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine,paint thinners and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified, of commercial quality. C. Patching Materials: Latex filler. D. Pigmented paints shall be furnished in containers not larger than 5 gallons. 2.3 FINISHES A. As scheduled at end of Section. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and substrate conditions are ready to receive work as instructed by manufacturer. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion PAINTING 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\09900NorthamptonMA.doc 09900-3 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable building code for flame spread/fuel contribution/smoke development rating requirements for finishes. B. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC)Compliance: Comply with applicable city, county, state, and federal requirements and ordinances regarding maximum Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) content of coatings. Utilize products that have been specially formulated to need such requirements. 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the ranges required by paint manufacturer. B. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain surface and ambient temperatures above 45 degrees F for 24 hours before, during, and 48 hours after application of finishes, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. C. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is above 75 percent, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. D. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. E. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish and Finishes: 65 degrees F for interior or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. F. Provide lighting level of 80 footcandles measured mid-height at substrate surface. 1.7 ENVIRONMENT REQUIREMENTS A. Do not store paints, oils, thinners and other flammable items inside the building and shall be stored in approved containers when not in actual use during the painting job. The fire hazard shall be kept at a minimum. 1.8 PROTECTION A. Provide adequate safe ladders, scaffolds, and stages necessary to complete work. B. Protect the public and construction workers during progress of Work. C. Furnish temporary fire extinguisher of suitable chemicals and capacity, located near flammable materials. D. During progress of painting work,provide, install and maintain suitable coverings including drop cloths,barricades, and other forms of protection necessary to safeguard and protect adjoining work, fixtures, equipment, store inventory, equipment, and other surfaces from paint splatter, spills and stains. , Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion PAINTING 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\09900NorthamptonMA.doc 09900-2 SECTION 09900 PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the General Conditions of the Contract, and Division 1 General Requirements. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Complete interior and exterior surface preparation and finishing for field application of paints and coatings, and requirements for field finishing mechanical and electrical equipment including but not limited to the following surfaces as scheduled or noted on the drawings: 1. Interior drywall. 2. Interior drywall priming coat for work to receive wall covering. 3. Interior exposed ferrous metals, steel, doors, frames, access doors. 4. Wood surfaces, millwork, wood doors, frames, trim. 5. Standing and running trims. 6. Cleaning and buffing existing clear finished maple wood components. B. Surface preparation,priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. C. In addition to new surfaces scheduled to receive paint and finishes,the scope also includes the finishing of identified interior and/or exterior existing surfaces to render a completely refurbished appearance at job completion. 1. Existing surfaces shall receive one(1)coat primer/touch-up at base areas, sanded areas or otherwise scarified areas which may cause suction spots or non-uniform finish appearance; followed by one (1) coat finish paint in lieu of the number of coats scheduled for new surfaces as specified herein. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Conform to definitions of terms in ASTM D16 in interpreting requirements of this specification section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with two years experience. B. Product Labels: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, stock number, color and label analysis on label of containers. C. Materials selected for coating systems for each type surface shall be product of a single manufacturer unless otherwise specified. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion PAINTING 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\09900NorthamptonMA.doc 09900-1 C. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer. ---END OF SECTION--- Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion T R APE 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December CA 29, PE 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\09680NorthamptonMA.doc 09680-5 3.2 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Installation of Direct Glue-Down carpet shall comply with CRI 104, Section 9: "Direct Glue- Down." B. Comply with carpet manufacturer's recommendations for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under door inclosed position. Do not bridge building expansion joints with continuous carpet. C. Do not change run of pile in any room where carpet is continuous through a wall opening into another room. Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under door centerline. D. Seaming: 1. Join seams by butting and sealing with seam sealer. Form seams straight, not overlapped or peaked, and free of gaps. 2. Double cut carpet,to allow intended seam and pattern match. Make cuts straight, true, and unfrayed. E. All transitions between adjacent floor materials must be flush. F. Adhesive: 1. Apply carpet and adhesives in accordance with manufacturers'instructions. 2. Do not allow any excess adhesive onto carpet pile as it can cause permanent damage to the carpet pile. 3. Refer to adhesive manufacturer's instructions for proper trowel size G. Verify carpet match before cutting to ensure minimal variation between dye lots. H. Lay carpet tight and flat on subfloor, well adhered at edges, with a uniform appearance. Provide monolithic color,pattern, and texture match within any one area. I. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions,removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. J. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets,pipes, outlets,edgings,thresholds,and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet: 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface. 3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element. B. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protection of Indoor Installations." Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion CARPET 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\09680NorthamptonMA.doc 09680-5 C. Carpet adhesive: Talbots furnishes carpet adhesive. Aofth� D. Seaming Adhesive: Talbots furnishes seaming adhesive. E. Resilient Leveler Transition Ramp Strip: 1. Model LS-40 series as manufactured by Johnsonite (800) 899-8916. 2. Use only Johnsonite 965 Flooring and Tread Adhesive. Do not use carpet adhesive. F. Carpet to carpet transition strip: 1. Model CD-40 vinyl molding with CDB-00-A single flange track base as manufactured by Johnsonite (800) 899-8916. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.3, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet installation. B. Verify that substrate surfaces are appropriately finished flat to plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 ft. C. Verify that subflooring is installed and all transitions to dissimilar materials will be flush. 1. Fill minor or local low spots and other defects with subfloor filler to achieve flush transitions. D. Concrete Slabs: 1. Verify that slabs are dry according to test methods recommended by carpet manufacturer." 2. Where carpet is installed directly over concrete slabs, grind high spots and fill low spots to provide a maximum 1/4-inch deviation in any direction when checked with a 10-foot straight edge. 3. Verify that slabs are free of curing compounds, sealers,hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. 4. Verify that slabs are dry using test methods in accordance with ASTM F1869 or method recommended by carpet manufacturer. Maximum moisture vapor-emission rate shall be 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours unless otherwise specified by the carpet manufacturer. 5. Verify slabs exhibit a pH range of 7 to 9, no carbonization, or dusting. PH reading above 9 requires corrective procedures. E. Verify floor surfaces are free of substances that may impair adhesion of new adhesive and finish materials. F. Broom clean substrate and ensure surface is free of oil, grease, dust and foreign substance. G. Use latex filler to patch cracks, small holes, and to achieve minor leveling to achieve flush transitions. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion CARPET 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\09680NorthamptonMA.doc 09680-4 C. FC-99 SUPPLIER: Allegheny Contract,Winchester,MA MANUFACTURER: Mohawk Group PRODUCT NO.: F2881 (Talbots) COLOR: Cocoa Squares YARN CONTENT: Solutia Type 6.6 Nylon SURFACE APPEARANCE :Tufted Tip-shear Graphics. PRIMARY BACKING: Woven Polypropylene SECONDARY BACKING: Ultra Performance System WIDTH: 12 feet STATIC CONTROL: less then 3.5 K.V.,Tested per AATCC Method 134 CRI GREEN LABEL CERTIFIED: Approved INSTALLATION: Direct Glue Down ADHESIVE: Henry's Premium Adhesive(furnished by Talbots) 2.2 ENTRY MATS A. Talbots furnishes entry mats. B. FC-20 SUPPLIER: Mats, Inc. Braintree,MA COLOR: Designer Grey#19 DESIGN: Berber MATERIAL: Heavy Denier Polypropylene CONSTRUCTION: Tightly Double Needled Structure 0*1 HEIGHT:Total Height: 3/8"(+/-0) WEIGHT: Face Weight: 50 oz. PRIMARY BACKING: Water Permeable Solid Rubber Non-Skid WIDTH: 6-6" STATIC CONTROL: 0.5 KV Passes IBM Requirements FLAME& SMOKE: Smoke passes DOC-FF-1-70 INSTALLATION: Direct Glue Down. C. FC-100 SUPPLIER: Mats, Inc.Braintree,MA COLOR: No. 07, Charcoal DESIGN: "Berkshire" MATERIAL: 100%Polypropylene THICKNESS: %-inch WEIGHT: 95 oz. BACKING: High Density Rubber WIDTH: C-7" and 13'-2" INSTALLATION: Direct Glue Down. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Absolutely NO SUBSTITUTIONS ALLOWED B. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified,hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided by or recommended by the Carpet manufacturer. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion CARPET 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29,2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\09680NorthamptonMA.doc 09680-3 1.5 EXTRA MATERIAL A. Talbots furnishes extra carpet material. B. Store 4 sq/yds in roll form of carpeting of each color at platform above Manager's or Records Room office or other location as directed by the Construction Project Manager. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.2, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity." B. Conditioning: Maintain relative humidity planned for building occupants and an ambient temperature between 65 and 75 degrees F in spaces to receive carpet for at least seven days before installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET(Furnished by Talbots) A. FC-05 MANUFACTURER: J &J Industries, Dalton, GA COLOR: AYES STYLE: 2030 DESIGN: Asertion III FIBER CONTENT: 100%J&J Commercialon SDN,ULTIMA BACKING: Primary Backing: Polypropylene, Secondary Backing: Action Bac WIDTH: 12'-0" FLAMMIBILITY: Class 1 STATIC GENERATION: Less than 3.0 kv(AATCC-134) SMOKE: Less than 450 flaming. ADA COMPLIANCE: Compliant for accessible Routes. INSTALLATION: Direct Glue Down ADHESIVE: Commercialon 600 (furnished by Talbots). EDGE AND SEAM ADHESIVE: Commercialon 557 (furnished by Talbots). B. FC-95 SUPPLIER: Allegheny Contract,Winchester,MA MANUFACTURER: Crossley Carpet Mills MFG PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION: Colourworks 169, Style No. 30051 COLOR: Civilization YARN CONTENT: DuPont Antron Legacy Nylon BACKING: Action Bac WIDTH: 12-feet STAIN RESISTANCE: DuPont DuraTech FLAMMIBILITY: Class 1 STATIC GENERATION: Less than 3.5 kv(AATCC-134) SMOKE: Less than 450 flaming. INSTALLATION: Direct Glue Down ADHESIVE: Bigelow Broadloc (furnished by Talbots) Amok" Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion CARPET 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\09680NorthamptonMA.doc 09680-2 SECTION 09680 CARPET PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 General Requirements. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide carpeting work, including but not limited to the following: 1. Installation of Talbots furnished carpet and accessory items. 2. Direct glue-down type installation. 3. Installation of Talbots furnished entry mat. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Seaming Plan: Talbots separate carpet supplier will provide installer with seaming plan indicating location and method of joining seams and showing direction of carpet. B. Adhesive: Installer shall submit to the Talbots Construction Project Manager one of the empty cans of the owner specified and supplied adhesive used for the installation of the carpet and seaming. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed carpet installations with similar materials, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in carpet installations with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Installation shall be in accordance with the requirements of CRI 104, Standard for Installation Specification of Commercial Carpet as published by CRI, The Carpet and Rug Institute. C. Lack of adhesion caused either by a lower quality adhesive or wrong trowel selection is the number one cause of installation failure. Use Talbots furnished premium quality adhesives in proper quantity and eliminate this cause of installation complaints. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept inside delivery of Talbots furnished items. B. Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling." 1. Protect carpet from exposure to moisture. 2. Store materials in a dry,warm, well-ventilated, weathertight location. 3. Move carpet into spaces where it will be installed, at least seven days before installation. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion CARPET 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\09680NorthamptonMA.doc 09680-1 B. VB-11 Manufacturer: Armstrong World Industries, Inc. Lancaster, PA Mfg. Des.No.: V4571018 Material: Vinyl Profile: Straight Color: Mid Gray, No. 71 Size: 4 inches high Gauge: 1/8 inch Classification: Fed. Spec. SS-W-40a, Type Il, Class 1, Style B. Flame& Smoke: ASTM E662 (Smoke) -450 or less Critical Radiant Flux: ASTM E684 -0.45 watts/cm'-or more -Class 1 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof, types for use for all the various conditions and materials shall be as recommended by manufacturer of each specific material for each specific application. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Fit joints tight and vertical.Maintain minimum measurement of 18 inches between joints. Align tops of adjacent pieces of base. B. Job-Formed Corners: 1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. Shave back of base at points where bends occur and remove strips perpendicular to length of base that are only deep enough to produce a snug fit without removing more than half the wall base thickness. 2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form by cutting an inverted V-shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where corner is formed. Shave back of base where necessary to produce a snug fit to substrate. C. Install base on solid backing. D. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. E. Do not stretch wall base during installation. F. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions. 3.2 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive from base, and wall surfaces without damage. B. Clean base surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion RESILIENT BASE 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\09650NorthamptonMA.doc 09650-2 SECTION 09650 RESILIENT BASE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the General Conditions of the Contract, and Division 1 General Requirements. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Resilient base work and related work described in this section. 1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable building code for flame/fuel/smoke rating requirements in accordance with ASTM E84. 1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Store materials for three days prior to installation in area of installation to achieve temperature stability. B. Maintain ambient temperature required by adhesive manufacturer three days prior to, during, and 24 hours after installation of materials. C. Do not begin installation until building is completely enclosed and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and humidity conditions consistent with "after occupancy" conditions for a minimum of 2 weeks. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store base materials in original containers in enclosed space at minimum of 70 degrees F for three days prior to installation. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 RESILIENT BASE A. Vinyl wall base shall comply with FS SS-W-40, Type 1I. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion RESILIENT BASE 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\09650NorthamptonMA.doe 09650-1 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed prefinished wood flooring during remainder of construction period with heavy kraft paper or other suitable covering to prevent damage or deterioration. Do not use plastic sheet or film that could cause condensation. 3.5 CLEANING AND BUFFING EXISTING FLOORS A. Clean floor by vacuuming and lightly damp mopping. Do not over wet the mop. Allow floor to dry. B. Use approved cleaningibuffing compound (Hardwood Floor Cleaner manufactured by BonaKemi). Spray compound on wood floors in areas of 40 to 50 square feet. Use a white polishing pad and 150-175 RPM buffing machine. Periodically clean or replace the white pad to be sure that the dirt is removed from the floor surface. 3.6 TOUCH UP PROCEDURE-ENGINEERED MAPLE FLOORING A. Prior to Turnover and after Substantial Completion of the Project,the G.C. shall be required to perform the following maintenance to all of the installed maple flooring: 1. Apply TFI furnished floor cleaner and wipe the floor with mop lengthwise of the floor strips with a back-and forth motion. ---END OF SECTION--- Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Renovation WOOD FLOORING 34 Bridge Street, Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\09555NorthamptonMA.doc 09555-4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are appropriately finished flat to plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 ft. B. Verify that subflooring is installed and all transitions to dissimilar materials will be flush. C. Concrete Slabs: 1. Verify that slabs are dry using test methods in accordance with ASTM F1869 or method recommended by flooring manufacturer. a. Adhered Engineered Wood Flooring: maximum moisture vapor-emission rate shall be 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. 2. Where wood flooring is installed directly over concrete slabs, grind high spots and fill low spots to provide a maximum 1/4-inch deviation in any direction when checked with a 10-foot straight edge. 3. Where wood flooring is adhesively attached to concrete slabs, verify that slabs are free of curing compounds, sealers,hardeners,and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. 4. Existing solvent-based adhesives will bleed through underlayments, adhesives and flooring, causing staining. Completely remove existing solvent-based adhesives. 5. Verify slabs exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonization, or dusting. D. Broom clean substrate and ensure surface is free of oil, grease, dust and foreign substance. E. Use leveling and patching compounds recommended by the flooring manufacturer for filling small cracks, holes and depressions in subfloors for minor leveling and to achieve flush transitions. 3.2 INSTALLATION- GENERAL A. Pattern: Lay wood flooring in pattern indicated on Drawings or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. B. Expansion Space: Provide '/4 inch expansion space at walls and other fixed obstructions and terminations of flooring. C. Nail shoe molding to baseboard, do not nail to flooring. 3.3 INSTALLATION-ADHESIVE METHOD (Engineered Wood Strip Flooring) A. Apply adhesive,and flooring in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not use Duck-Glue over cutback adhesives. B. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set. C. Set flooring in place,press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion. D. Install shoe molding trim. E. Keep traffic out of spaces and areas where flooring is being installed until adhesive has set. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Renovation WOOD FLOORING 34 Bridge Street, Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\09555NorthamptonMA.doc 09555-3 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 ENGINEERED WOOD FLOORING (Furnished by Owner) A. FC-46 Manufacture: Anderson Hardwood Floors, Walterboro, SC Product: Northern Maple Plank Species: Northern White Maple top face/domestic origin only Thickness: 1/2-inch nominal Construction: 5 ply, laminated(Acer Saccharum), Select First Grade -Oak Core Width: 3 inches Length: 39 inches long (average) Edges: Square Edged Tongue and Groove on Four Sides Color: Natural #MS-3490 Finish: 6 coats of urethane,Factory Applied Installation Adhesive: Anderson Duck-Glue 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Subfloor Filler: Premix latex requiring water only to produce cementitious paste. B. Shoe molding: Owner furnished, factory finished. C. Adhesive: Owner furnished-V.O.C. Compliant, acrylic urethane, waterproof. D. Sleepers and Shims: Softwood lumber,pressure treated for moisture protection,2 inch x 4 inch. E. Fasteners: As recommended by flooring manufacturer,but not less than that recommended in NOFMA's "Installing Hardwood Flooring." F. Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM D 4397, black polyethylene sheet, not less than 6 mil thick; 2 inch wide tape for joint sealing. G. Sheathing Paper: Waxed kraft paper building paper. H. Wood Trim- furnished by Owner: In same species, grade and finish as wood flooring,unless otherwise indicated. 1. Reducer Strip: 2 inches(or as otherwise shown)wide,tapered on one side, and in thickness matching flooring. 2. Feature or border strip: 2 inches (or as otherwise shown) wide, square edge strips furnished in lengths as long a practical and in thickness to match wood flooring. 3. Nosings, saddles, thresholds, or other wood trim indicated in or adjacent to wood flooring. I. Maple Flooring"touch-up"products: "Bona Cleaner"applied finish product is supplied by T.F.I. Buffer,pads, sandpaper, etc are by the Contractor. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Renovation WOOD FLOORING 34 Bridge Street, Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\09555NorthamptonMA.doc 09555-2 SECTION 09555 WOOD FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 General Requirements. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide wood flooring work, including but not limited to the following: 1. Installation of Owner furnished prefinished engineered wood strip flooring, including borders, shoe trims, and accessory items, adhesive applied type. 2. Cleaning and buffing existing wood flooring as indicated. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed wood flooring similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in wood flooring installations with a record of successful in-service performance. 1.4 DELIVERY STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Accept inside delivery of Owner furnished items. B. Protect wood flooring from exposure to moisture. Do not deliver wood flooring until after concrete,masonry,plaster, ceramic tile, and similar wet-work is complete and dry. C. Store wood flooring materials in a dry, warm,well-ventilated,weathertight location. D. Move wood flooring into spaces where it will be installed, at least seven days before installation. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conditioning: Maintain relative humidity planned for building occupants and an ambient temperature between 65 and 75 deg F in spaces to receive wood flooring for at least seven days before installation, during installation, and for at least seven days after installation. After post-installation period,maintain relative humidity and ambient temperature planned for building occupants. 1. Do not install flooring until it adjusts to the relative humidity of and is at the same temperature as the space where it is to be installed. 2. Close spaces to traffic during flooring installation and for time period after installation recommended in writing by flooring and finish manufacturers. B. Install factory-finished wood flooring after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Renovation WOOD FLOORING 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\09555NorthamptonMA.doc 09555-1 3.6 ADJUSTING AND PATCHING A. Replace damaged members of exposed suspension system. Replace ceiling board and tile that is damaged, installed improperly, or shows visible signs of sagging. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION -N"k. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion SUSPENDED LAY-IN CEILING 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\09510NorthamptonMA.doc 09510-6 2. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to structures or to devices which are secure and appropriate for substrate, and which will not deteriorate or fail with age or elevated temperatures. E. Attachment of Hangers to Supporting Construction: Unless otherwise shown, secure the hangers to the construction as follows: 1. Attachment devices shall be connected only to structural building members 2. Attachment to Structural Steel Framing: Clinch hanger around top of flange of steel member approximately 135 degrees. If framing member supports roof planks or precast slabs,bolt hanger to center of web or weld to bottom flange. Where applicable,hanger wires may be directly double wound around steel members with wires twisted together. 3. Attachment to Steel Joists: Secure hanger with special clip or clamp designed for such use. Where applicable, hanger wires may be directly double wound around upper flange of steel members with wires twisted together. 4. Attachment to Existing Cast-in-Place Concrete: Attach hangers to clip angles, fastened to the concrete with expansion bolts or drive pins. 5. Attachment to Precast Tees, Slabs, and Planks: Insert"T"hangers through joints between the units. Where concrete fill is required, lay out and install hangers prior to placing fill. 6. Attachment to Wood Framing(Except Trusses): Secure hangers with threaded fasteners. 7. Attachment to Wood Trusses: Double wind hanger wire around bottom chord member and twist wire together securely. 8. Do not use steel deck for hanging supports for any type or kind of building components including suspended ceilings, electrical light fixtures,plumbing,heating, or air conditioning pipes or ducts or electrical conduits. 3.4 ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. 1. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat,precise fit. 2. Double cut and field paint exposed edges of tegular units. C. Lay directional patterned units one way with pattern parallel to shortest room axis. Fit border neatly against abutting surfaces. D. Install units after above ceiling work is complete. E. Install acoustic units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp and dents. 3.5 TOLERANCES A. Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8-inch in 10 feet. B. Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: Two degrees maximum. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion SUSPENDED LAY-IN CEILING 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:NISSY\05132\specs\0951 ONorthamptonMA.doc 09510-5 2. Examine ceilings providing air return from ceiling plenums to ensure air tightness. Notify Architect of any conditions or opening detrimental to the air plenum function. 3. Ceilings shall not be installed until mechanical installer has certified in writing that the ceiling plenums are air tight and that all openings around ducts,pipes and other penetrating items have been sealed. 3.2 INSTALLATION—GENERAL A. Install system in accordance with ASTM C636, manufacturer's instructions and as supplemented in this Section, to produce a ceiling true to lines and levels, free from warp and soiled or damaged grid or panels. B. Install after major above ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. C. Center system on room axis leaving equal border units, unless shown otherwise on the drawings. Do not leave tiles less than half length or width. D. Do not support light fixtures, diffusers or other components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. Support fixture loads by supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner, or support components independently. E. Do not eccentrically load system, or produce rotation of runners. F. Install edge molding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces,using longest practical lengths.Miter corners. Provide edge moldings at junctions with other interruptions. Field rabbett panel edges. Where round obstructions occur,provide preformed closers to match edge molding. Provide prefabricated radiused edge moldings around radiused wall corners. Use maximum lengths, straight, true to line, and level. G. Form expansion joints as required to accommodate plus or minus one-inch movement. Maintain visual closure. 3.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented,bent, or kinked members. B. Members of suspension system shall be installed in length as long as practicable. C. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers,reinforce the nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance. D. Hanger System: 1. Hang grid system independent of walls, columns, ducts,pipes and conduit. Hang wires directly from structure (not from fireproofing, fireproofing suspension members,bridging or roof decks). Locate first hanger 6 inches from wall and space 4 feet along carrying channel. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion SUSPENDED LAY-IN CEILING 34 Bridge Street, Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\095IONorthamptonMA.doc 09510-4 B. Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: 1. Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical the edge details and suspension systems indicated and that match width and configuration of exposed runners, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners unless otherwise indicated. 2. For circular penetrations of ceiling,provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly. C. Profiled Cove Trim(Located at ceiling pop-ups only) 1. "AXCOVE"Profiled Axiom Cove as manufactured by Armstrong. Extruded aluminum shape, 3-1/2"x 3-1/2". 2. Color: WH, white to match grid. D. Grid Accessories: Stabilizer bars, furring clips, splices, edge moldings hold down clips and closure strips as necessary to complete and complement suspended ceiling grid system. E. Bolted Metal Framing Support System(Supplemental Structural Framing): 1. Provide bolted metal framing, slotted type channels, struts, fittings,related accessories and supports that are not a part of the structural-steel framework as necessary to complete the Work. 2. Channel members and fittings shall be fabricated from structural grade steel. a. Channel Thickness: Selected to suit structural loading. b. Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as channel supports. 3. Set framing and strut system components into final position true to line, level and plumb. low 4. Anchor material firmly in place. Tighten all connections to their recommended torque. 5. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering bolted framing and strut systems that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: a. Unistrut Metal Framing System by Unistrut Corporation. b. Power-Strut by Allied Support Systems (800)416-2101. C. GlobeStrut by Globe Strut Products(800) 582-3646. d. B-Line Strut System by Cooper B-Line (618) 654-2184. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work. B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. C. Pressurized Plenums: 1. Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before beginning acoustical panel ceiling installation. 00*-, Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion SUSPENDED LAY-IN CEILING 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\09510NorthamptonMA.doc 09510-3 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not install acoustical ceilings until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust- generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested,and approved. B. Schedule installation of acoustic units after interior wet work is dry. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUSPENSION SYSTEM—EXPOSED METAL GRID (NON FIRE-RATED) A. 9/16-inch Exposed Metal Grid(Non Fire-Rated) 1. Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal suspension systems of types, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C635. 2. Main runners, cross tees, edge angles, variable placement tees and grid adapters shall be of cold rolled steel with a hot-dipped galvanized bonderized coating and exposed galvanized flange cap with a standard factory applied finish. Wall angle moldings shall be of cold rolled steel with a standard factory applied paint finish. 3. Structural Classification: Intermediate Duty. 4. Color of grid system: white. _ 5. System Manufacturer and Model shall be Armstrong Ceilings "Suprafine XL 9/16" Exposed T". 2.2 LAY-IN TILES -ACOUSTIC UNITS A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectance's, unless otherwise indicated. B. CL-04 Manufacturer: Armstrong World Industries Product: "Ultima" series, Item No. 1912 Size: 24" x 24" x 3/4" thick Edge Detail: Beveled Tegular Color: white Classification: Class"A", flame spread of 25 or less. Grid System: 9/16"-inch Exposed Metal Grid 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Hanger Wire: ASTM A641, Class 1, Zinc coated, soft temper, 10 gauge minimum. 1. Wire shall be straight,not in coils. 2. Splicing hanger wires is not acceptable. Amok Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion SUSPENDED LAY-IN CEILING 34 Bridge Street, Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\0951 ONorthamptonMA.doe 09510-2 SECTION 09510 SUSPENDED LAY-IN CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the General Conditions of the Contract, and Division 1 General Requirements. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section consist of suspended metal grid ceiling system and lay-in tiles including but not limited to the following: 1. Steel suspended metal grid systems. 2. Acoustical lay-in ceiling panels. 3. Perimeter trim. 4. Hanger supports,reinforcing for support of recessed lighting fixtures. 5. Metal fillers. 6. Additional steel members to support ceilings where normal suspension is interrupted by ducts,pipes, other obstructions. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Acoustical materials shall have a flame spread index of 25 or less and smoke developed 0-15 in accordance with ASTM E84 test procedure. B. Suspension system to rigidly secure acoustical ceiling system including integral mechanical and electrical components with maximum deflection of 1/360. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer shall have not less than three(3)years of successful experience in installation of acoustical ceilings similar to requirements for this project. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable building code for referenced combustibility requirements for materials. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store tile and panel cartons open at each end to stabilize moisture content. B. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion SUSPENDED LAY-IN CEILING 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R\MISSY\05132\specs\09510NorthamptonMA.doe 09510-1 3.7 CLEANING Aft A. Clean excess mortar from surface with water as work progresses. Perform cleaning while mortar is fresh and before it hardens on surfaces. B. Sponge and wash tile diagonally across joints. Polish with clean dry cloth. C. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning. D. Do not acid clean new installations. 3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 72 hours after installation. ---END OF SECTION --- ANW*. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion TILE, THIN-SET 34 Bridge Street, Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\09300NorthamptonMA.doc 09300-8 4. Set tiles in place and rub or beat with small beating block. 5. Beat or rap tile to ensure proper bond and also to level surface of tile. 6. Align tile to show uniform joints and allow to set until firm. 7. Clean excess mortar or adhesive from surface of tile with wet cheese cloth(not a sponge)while mortar is fresh. 8. Allow face mounted tile to set until firm before removing paper and before grouting. 9. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding tiles. K. Where wall tile and floor tile have same modular dimensions, align wall tile joints with floor the joints. L. Keep expansion and control joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints. M. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes. N. Seal all floor grout with clean sealer. 3.3 GROUTING A. Tile shall be firmly set before grouting(at least 48 hours). B. Joints shall be grouted full and flush,without voids or pinholes. 3.4 CONTROL JOINTS A. Control joints for the the installation shall be located as shown on the drawings and also provided but not limited to where tile abuts restraining surfaces such as perimeter walls, dissimilar floor materials, curbs,columns,pipes, and where changes occur in backing material. Control joints shall be cut-in substrates. B. Construction joints, expansion joints, and any areas where joints occur in substrates, same is to be treated by this subcontractor in accordance with TCA Joint Design Criteria EJ171. Joint sealant furnished and applied under Section 07920. 3.5 EXPANSION JOINTS A. Expansion joints in tile shall be located over all construction joints in accordance with TCA Joint Design Criteria EJ171. B. Joints in tile and setting materials shall not be less than the width of the construction joint. C. Construction joints in tile work shall be constructed during installation of mortar bed and tile and not "cut-in" after tile has been grouted. Joint sealant furnished and applied under Section 07900. 3.6 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS A. As installed under Section 07900. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion TILE,THIN-SET 34 Bridge Street, Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\09300NorthamptonMA.doc 09300-7 3. Clean surfaces free of dust and debris; acid-etch concrete slabs. F. It is the installers responsibility to determine the condition and suitability of all surfaces prior to application. 3.2 INSTALLATION-GENERAL A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials. B. Floor Tile: 1. Over interior concrete substrates, install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method Fl 13, dry-set or latex-portland cement bond coat, with standard grout,unless otherwise indicated. C. Wall Tile: 1. Over gypsum wallboard on metal studs install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method W243, thin-set with dry-set or latex-portland cement bond coat, unless otherwise indicated. D. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings. E. Place metal edge strips at exposed tile edges and where edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile. 1. Where metal edge strips are located across door openings, locate strip on the door side, in line with the edge of door stop, terminating at the rabbet. F. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases neatly. Align floor,base and wall joints. G. Place the with joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joints watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout. 1. Joint widths for wall tiles shall be the following, unless otherwise noted: a. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16-inch. b. Glazed Wall Tile: 1/16-inch. 2. Joint widths for floor tiles shall be the following, unless otherwise noted: a. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16-inch. b. Paver Tile: 1/4 inch. H. Form internal angles square and external angles square unless noted otherwise. I. Install ceramic accessories rigidly in prepared openings. J. Floors and Walls: 1. Apply mortar or adhesive with notched trowel using scraping motion to work material into good contact with surface to be covered. Maintain 90 percent coverage on back of tile and fully bed all corners. 2. Apply only as much mortar or adhesive as can be covered within allowable windows as recommended by mortar or adhesive manufacturer or while surface is still tacky. 3. When installing large tiles, ceramics or mosaics, trowel small quantity of mortar or adhesive onto back of each tile or sheet of tiles. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion TILE, THIN-SET 34 Bridge Street, Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\09300NorthamptonMA.doc 09300-6 2.7 THRESHOLDS A. Marble for saddles shall conform to ASTM A503 and as follows: 1. Color and Finish: White, honed marble classified Group A per definitions for soundness classifications in the Marble Institute of America's Dimensional Stone Design Manual IV. B. Saddle shall be beveled as detailed and thickness as shown. Saddle shall be one piece for full width of door or opening. 1. Cope ends to fit door frame profile. 2.8 TILE FLOOR EDGING A. 1/8-inch surface width by depth required, stainless steel edge protector Model SCHIENE-E80 as manufactured by Schluter Systems, (800-472-4588). 2.9 GROUT SEALER A. CeramaSeal grout sealer, water based acrylic sealer as manufactured by Hydroment(Bostik- Findley) 2.10 GRANITE STOREFRONT BASE ADHESIVE A. Exterior grade epoxy adhesive: Bonstone Anchor(A-100/B-412X)manufactured by Bonstone Materials Corp.,Mukwonago, WI, (800)425-2214. 2.11 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS A. As specified under Section 07900. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION OF NEW SURFACES A. Allow new slabs to dry adequately before applying materials. Remove all foreign materials at existing slabs.Perform simple calcium-chloride test to ensure new concrete surfaces are free of contained moisture. B. Protect surrounding work from damage. C. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean. D. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. E. Horizontal Cementitious Substrates: 1. Grind high spots of concrete slabs to achieve specified tolerances. 2. Floor Flatness: Install leveling material if necessary to bring floors to required flatness. Maximum variation from plane: a. 1/8-inch in 10 feet for thin-set mortar. b. Use leveling materials specified in Part 2. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion TILE,THIN-SET 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\09300NorthamptonMA.doc 09300-5 2.5 SETTING MATERIAL A. The following materials may be used without latex modification on interior areas with residential or light commercial performance level requirements according to the TCA Handbook. Substrates must be sound, properly prepared plumb and true. In interior dry areas only, they may be used over gypsum board. 1. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar; ANSI A118.1: a. Kerabond by Mapei Corp. b. Hydroment"Tile-Mate Premium (710") by Bostik Const. Products. C. "Floor-N-Wall Thin Set Mortar"by Laticrete International. d. PermaBond 902 by C-Cure Corporation, for normal installations. e. "Full Set Plus" as manufactured by TEC, an H.B. Fuller Company. 2. For wall applications,provide nonsagging mortar. B. The following materials may be used on interior areas, over sound and properly prepared, cured,plumb and true surfaces. In interior areas,they may be used over gypsum board(dry areas only). 1. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar ANSI A118.4. a. Hydroment"Tile-Mate Premium (710)"gaged with Hydroment Multi- Purpose Acrylic Additive (425)by Bostik Findley Const. Products. b. Kerabond gaged with Keralastic (polymer additive)by Mapei Corp. C. "Full Set Plus" gauged with proper latex additive by TEC, an H.B. Fuller Company. d. Laticrete 272 Premium Floor N' Wall Thin-Set Mortar with Laticrete 3701 Latex Additive by Laticrete International. e. MultiCure 905 by C-Cure Corporation. 2. Manufacturers of above products have other additives for specific substrate and condition applications. Verify the specified additive is appropriate for the project application and follow manufacturers directions explicitly. 3. For wall applications,provide nonsagging products. 4. Latex-additive are manufacturer's standard water emulsion, serving as replacement for part or all of gauging water, of type specifically recommended by latex-additive manufacturer for use with field-mixed portland cement and aggregate mortar bed. 2.6 FLOOR LEVELING AND PATCHING MATERIALS A. Self-Leveling Underlayment(Cementitious): 1. Bostik Self-Leveling Underlayment 103 as manufactured by Bostik Findley Construction Products, (800) 726-7845. 2. Laticrete 86 Self-Leveling Underlayment as manufactured by Laticrete International, Inc. B. Patching Materials: 1. Bostik Floor Patch 101 as manufactured by Bostik Findley Construction Products, (800) 726-7845. 2. Laticrete 816 LatiPatch Rapid Underlayment as manufactured by Laticrete International,Inc. -"OR,, Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion TILE, THIN-SET 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\09300NorthamptonMA.doc 09300-4 2.2 CERAMIC FLOOR TILE—TOILET ROOM A. FC-75 Manufacturer: American Olean Material: Porcelain Tile Product: Unglazed Porcelain Ceramic Mosaics Color: A20 Beach Tan Size 2" x 2" x 1/4" thick Edge Profile: All purpose edge Grout: AO-Polymer Modified sanded floor the grout,color White 2.3 PORCELAIN PAVER TILE AT STORE ENTRY A. FC-98 Manufacturer: Floor Gres, Italy Main Distributor: Stone Source,New York,NY (212)979-6400 Material: Porcelain stoneware paver tile Product: Colorlands Series Model No: 702364 Color: Grayland (Gray) Finish: Structured texture Size: 12" x 12" x 5/16" (nominal) Edge Profile: cushioned edges. Grout: Latacrete Latapoxy SP-100 Stainless Grout, Color No. 24 Natural Grey. 2.4 GRANITE STOREFRONT BASE look A. FC-79 At Contractors option, either supplier listed below is acceptable: Supplier: Louis Mian Inc., Boston,MA. Phone(617)241-7900, Fax (617)241-5895. Mian Stock No.: GR-119 Mian Color: Pecan Supplier: Arizona Tile, Phoenix,AZ. Contact: David Hollabaugh or Dennis McDonald, (602)266-4422. Arizona Tile Color: Misty Mauve Material: Granite Size: 48 inches long x 3/4-inch thick x height as shown on Drawings Profile-Metal storefront: 45 degree bevel top long edge-square on remaining three edges. Color: Pecan Finish: Honed- face,top edge and bevel edge. Notes: Shop fabricate 3 setting holes on bottom edge (each 48" length). G.C. to verify correct height per project requirements. Grout: Latcrete classic #578 Sterling Silver. CONTRACTOR NOTE: This material is a long lead item and must be ordered per project schedule. Call Supplier indicated for ordering and lead time. Ensure correct profile is identified for specific type of storefront. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion TILE, THIN-SET 34 Bridge Street, Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\09300NorthamptonMA.doc 09300-3 B. Work shall be commenced only after grounds, anchors, drains,plugs,hangers, bucks, electrical and mechanical work which are to be in or behind or below tile, are installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CERAMIC WALL TILE—TOILET ROOM A. FC-80 Manufacturer: American Olean Material: Glazed wall tile Product: Matte Series Size: 4-1/4 inches x 4-1/4 inches x 5/16 inch." Finish: Matte (non-reflective) Color: 57,Matte Linen Grout Joint: 1/16 inch. Cove Base Trim Unit: Product No. A3401 (4-1/2"x 4-1/2") Grout: American Olean-Unsanded Grout, Color White B. FC-91 Manufacturer: American Olean Material: Glazed wall the Product: Bullnose Top Trim,Matte Series. Product Number: S-4269 Size: 2 inches x 6 inches x 5/16 inch." Finish: Matte (non-reflective) Color: 57,Matte Linen Grout Joint: 1/16 inch Grout: American Olean-Unsanded Grout, Color White C. FC-92 Manufacturer: American Olean Material: Glazed wall tile Product: Sizzle Strips Series. Product Number: P612 Size: '/2 inch x 6 inches x 5/16 inch Finish: High Gloss Color: 25, Ice White Grout Joint: 1/16 inch Grout: American Olean-Unsanded Grout, Color White D. Trims: 1. Integral membering trim shall be required for area conditions including cove base and bullnose corners. 2. Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, all internal vertical corners shall be square and all external corners and tops of wainscot shall be bullnosed. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion TILE,THIN-SET 34 Bridge Street, Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\09300NorthamptonMA.doc 09300-2 SECTION 09300 TILE, THIN-SET PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the General Conditions of the Contract, and Division 1 General Requirements. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation,tile, application of materials and incidental services including but not limited to the following: 1. Ceramic Floor and Wall Tile. 2. Marble Thresholds. 3. Granite Storefront Base 4. Thin-Set Installation Method. 5. Grouting, Cleaning and Protecting. 6. Cutting and Patching of Tile. 7. Control and Construction Joints. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with TCA Handbook and ANSI A108/A118 Series. Installation shall conform to local building codes, ordinances,trade practices and climatic conditions. B. All tiles furnished shall comply with Standard Grade requirements of ANSI A137.1. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect adhesives and grouts from freezing or overheating. 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install adhesives and grouts in an unventilated environment. B. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F during installation of mortar materials. C. Provide adequate lighting for good grouting and clean-up. 1.6 SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING A. Work of this section shall be completely coordinated with the work of other sections. Verify dimensions and work of other trades that adjoin materials of this section before the installation of items herein specified. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion TILE, THIN-SET 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29,2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\09300NorthamptonMA.doc 09300-1 3.11 EXISTING WORK A. In addition to the new work specified herein, it is the intent of this section to include the replacement and repair of existing gypsum wallboard scheduled to remain that is damaged or removed due to the alterations and removal of existing work under this Contract. Application and workmanship shall be equal to the quality of new work as specified herein as approved by the Architect. Use specific types at respective areas affected. B. Extend existing gypsum board installations using materials and methods as specified. C. Repair and remodel existing gypsum board assemblies that remain or are to be altered. END OF SECTION Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\09260NorthamptonMA.doc 09260-10 3.8 JOINT TREATMENT A. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes. B. Taping, filling and sanding are not required at surfaces behind adhesive applied ceramic tile. 3.9 LEVELS OF FINISH A. Gypsum board wall and ceilings surfaces shall be finished prior to painting or wallcovering application, to the finish level identified below in accordance with Gypsum Association GA- 214-M (Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish). Level 1: Use above finished ceilings concealed from view in areas such as plenums and service corridors. All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound. Surface shall be free of excess joint compound. Tool marks and ridges are acceptable. If Rated Assembly, finishes need to comply with UL Guidelines that may require a finish level more stringent than the level indicated. Level 2: Typical applications are sales area GWB walls covered by Fixture Work and water resistant gypsum backing board scheduled to receive tile. All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and one separate coat of joint compound applied overall joint angles, fastener heads and accessories. Surface shall be free of excess joint compound. look Level 3: Typical applications are sales area exposed GWB walls receiving paint or wall covering, back area GWB ceilings,back area exposed to view GWB walls receiving paint. All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and two separate coats of joint compound applied over all joint angles, fastener heads and accessories,with each coat sanded. All joint-compound shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. Level 4: Typical applications are sales area exposed to view GWB ceilings. All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and three separate coats of joint compound applied over all joint angles, fastener heads and accessories, with each coat sanded. All joint-compound shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. Level 5: All other gypsum board. Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges, and apply skim coat of joint compound over entire surface 3.10 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8-inch in 10 feet in any direction. B. All fasteners and joints shall be invisible after finishing. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\09260NorthamptonMA.doc 09260-9 C. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof structure above. 3.6 INSTALLATION—INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Verify location and installation of concealed wall blocking. B. Install interior gypsum board in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and in compliance with ASTM C840. C. Install carriers and hangers for wall-mounted Toilet Room plumbing fixtures in walls before wall surface is completed. D. Apply wallboard with the length parallel or at right angles to the studs. Center abutting ends or edges over the stud flanges. 1. Fasten gypsum board to furring or framing with approved screws. Place fasteners minimum 3/8 inch from edges of panels. 2. Locate all attaching screws 16" o.c. for non-fire rated construction with framing 16" O.C. 3. Use Type "S" screws for fastening gypsum board to metal framing and Type "G" screws for fastening gypsum board to gypsum board. E. Apply cornerbead to all vertical or horizontal external corners in accordance with manufacturer's directions. F. Except where drawings indicate lesser spacing or architectural feature, install vertical control joints in partitions and furred wall surfaces where straight run exceeds 30 feet. Where drawings do not indicate location of joint spacing, confer with the Architect to determine actual locations. G. For fire-rated construction, apply gypsum boards and fasten as specified in the fire-tested assembly. H. Do not pinch recessed wall standards reveal. Maintain uniform reveal. I. Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. 3.7 CONTROL JOINTS A. Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and where partitions or ceilings of dissimilar construction meet and remain in the same plane. B. Attach control joint with Bostitch 9/16" "G" staples or equal spaced not over 6" apart in each flange. C. Remove protective tape when joint treatment is completed. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 34 Bridge Street, Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\09260NorthamptonMA.doc 09260-8 B. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling !" plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, counter-splaying, or other equally effective means. C. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacing that interfere with the location of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards. D. Attachment: 1. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws,or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate. 2. Secure flat, angle, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure as well as for type of hanger involved, and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 3. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts,pipes, or conduit. Attach hangers to structural members. E. Reinforce openings in ceiling suspensions system that interrupt main carrying channels of furring channels, with lateral channel bracing. F. Laterally brace entire suspension system. G. Grid Suspension System: 1. Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension system meets vertical surfaces. 2. Mechanically join main beam and cross-fuming members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track. 3.4 INSTALLATION-ACOUSTICAL ACCESSORIES A. Place acoustical insulation in partitions tight with spaces, around cut openings,behind and around electrical and mechanical items within or behind partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions. B. Apply acoustical sealant around service outlets, telephone boxes and other openings in gypsum board construction used as sound attenuating partitions. 3.5 INSTALLATION-DOORS A. Frame door openings to comply with GA-600 and with gypsum board manufacturer's applicable written recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section(for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. B. Install two studs at each jamb,unless otherwise indicated. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\09260NorthamptonMA.doc 09260-7 G. Slip Head Connections: 1. Provide slip head connection at partitions extending to structure or where indicated on drawings to isolate stud wall system from vertical deflection of roof or floor deck above. 2. Top of stud shall not be fastened to the upper runner. Stud shall be friction fit and nest inside of upper runner and cut to allow a minimum of 1" vertical travel within the runner. 3. Secure stud to bottom runner. 4. Install 2" x 20 gage flat strap bracing horizontally 1-1/2" below the bottom leg of the channel and fasten to studs to provide vertical alignment. Gypsum wallboard fasteners shall be located below channel and shall not inhibit channel leg from vertical travel between wallboard and stud. H. Backer plates and blocking: 1. Where handrails, grab bars, cabinets, wall-mounted door stops, or other wall-hung items are attached to partitions, install backer plates or wood blocking accurately positioned and firmly secured to metal studs, whether or not such backer plates or blocking are indicated on Drawings. 2. Do not use wood blocking in fire-rated construction. I. Install concealed wall blocking for support of plumbing fixtures, wall cabinets,wood frame opening, toilet accessories, and hardware in types as specified in Section 06200. J. Steel Joist Stiffeners: Where any item is attached to top chord of a steel joist, provide a 2" x 2" x 3/16" steel angle welded to top and bottom chord of joist. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF DIRECT FURRED WALL SYSTEM A. Attach metal furring "Z" or"Hat" members vertically or horizontally spaced 24" o.c. to masonry or concrete surfaces with hammer set or powder-driven fasteners or concrete stub nails 24" o.c. to flanges.Nest members 8" at splices and anchor with two fasteners in each wing. B. Except where framing members are scheduled to be full height of wall, the furring members when positioned horizontally, shall be attached at floor line and 6" above the ceiling line. For furring members positioned vertically, attach a horizontal furring member between each vertical member at a height of 6" above ceiling line and at floor line. C. Attach mitered furring channels horizontally around masonry corners at wall opening locations.Miter channels in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. At interior side of exterior walls where furring system occurs,provide vapor barrier over furring system at full wall area prior to drywall application, using 4" lapped joints, taped full length using approved tape. 3.3 INSTALLATION - METAL CEILING AND SOFFIT FRAMING A. Install metal framing in accordance with ASTM C754 and suspended ceiling framing system manufacturer's instructions. Coordinate location of ceiling suspension system hangers with overhead structural assemblies and other work. Install ceiling framing independent of walls, columns, and above ceiling work. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\09260NorthamptonMA.doe 09260-6 I. Concealed Backer Plates/Blocking: 1. Fire-rated construction: Steel, galvanized; 6 inches wide x 20 gage minimum x lengths to suit size of items to be attached; fastened to studs for attachment of surface mounted fittings and accessories. 2. Non fire-rated construction: FRTW wood blocking as specified in Section 06200. 3. Elimination of backer plates,blocking or direct attachment of accessories or equipment to studs will not be allowed. 2.5 WALL STANDARDS A. Owner furnished. Custom items as manufactured by Crown Metal Co.,recessed. 1. Model SP-2807 for drywall. 2.6 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. As specified in Section 07900. 2.7 INSULATION A. As specified in Section 07200. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION-METAL WALL FRAMING A. Install metal framing in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions. B. Runner Channels: 1. Attach top and bottom runner channels at ends and 24 inches on center maximum. 2. Align floor and ceiling tracks to assure plumb partition. C. Metal Stud 1. Position studs vertically in runners. 2. Spacing: as indicated on Drawings. D. Bracing: 1. Provide horizontal bracing 6'-0" o.c. minimum. 2. Provide diagonal bracing to structure as required by code and manufacturer's instructions. E. Fire Stopping: 1. Provide minimum 20 gage, solid metal studs horizontally between vertical studs at 10'-0" height and in same stud size as vertical studs in all partitions for fire stopping. For non-full height partitions, fire stopping horizontal studs shall be installed at ceiling height. F. Except at slip head connections,anchor studs to runner flanges with screws through each flange. AWN` Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\09260NorthamptonMA.doc 09260-5 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Joint Treatment: 1. Joint treatment products including tape and taping compound shall meet the requirements of ASTM C475. 2. Ready-mix or powder 3. Compounds shall be asbestos free and not contain any hazardous material. 4. Exterior applications shall use "Easy Sand" by U.S.G. B. Cornerbead: 1. Comerbead shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 1047. 2. Material shall be manufactured from zinc-coated cold-rolled sheet steel not less than 0.012 in. 3. U.S. Gypsum "Dur-A-Bead"; Gold Bond 1-1/4" x 1-1/4-inch. C. Edge trim: 1. Edge trim shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 1047. 2. Material shall be"J"or"L"shaped and manufactured from zinc-coated cold-rolled sheet steel not less than 0.012 in. D. Control Joints: 1. Control joints shall meet the requirements of ASTM C1047. 2. Sheetrock brand zinc control Joint No. 093 by U.S.G., Gold Bond "E-Z Strip" or approved equal. E. Bullnose Arch Bead 1. Vinyl bullnose arch bead product no. AMBNCB-75 as manufactured by Amico, Alabama Metal Industries Corp. (800) 366-2642. 2. Vinyl bullnose arch bead stock no. 7110, 3/4-inch radius corner bead as manufactured by Trim-Tex, (800) 874-2333. 3. Product No. BCB I OOA, 3/4-inch radius vinyl corner bead as manufactured by Vinyl Corp. (800) 648-4695. F. Bullnose Outside Corner Bead 1. Product No. BCB 100, 3/4-inch radius vinyl comer bead as manufactured by Vinyl Corp. (800) 648-4695. 2. Style No. DRMRO 90-34, /4-inch radius corner bead, 6063 T5 aluminum alloy as manufactured by MM Systems Corp. (770) 938-7570. 3. Product No. AMBNCB-75, 3/4" radius vinyl corner bead as manufactured by AMICO, Alabama Metal Industries Corp. (800) 366-2642. 4. Stock No. 7012, 3/4"radius corner bead,vinyl by Trim-Tex, (800)-874-2333. G. Bullnose Base Adapter: 3/4-inch radius bullnose bead transition to square bottom corner. 1. Stock No. 0917, by Trim-Tex. 2. Model 690 by Pla-Cor Inc., Santee, CA, (800)441-2724. 3. Product No. BNBA-811 by Plastic Components (800) 327-7077. H. Fasteners: Shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 1002 Type S and G. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\09260NorthamptonMA.doc 09260-4 2.2 METAL FRAMING (Walls-Interior Non-Load Bearing) A. Steel Studs, Runners,Furring Channels: Dimensions,materials, shapes and design of studs, runners (track),rigid furring channels and grid suspension systems shall meet the requirements of ASTM C645. 1. Thickness of base steel shall be 20 gage unless otherwise noted. 2. Studs shall be"C" shape, with knurled face, 3-5/8" size unless otherwise noted on Drawings. 3. Track shall be "U"shaped, 3-5/8" size unless otherwise noted on Drawings. 4. Furring Channels shall be either"Z"or"hat" shaped and in sizes as shown on Drawings. 5. Studs shall be provided with punchouts in the webs for bracing, chaseways for electrical and plumbing services. 6. Fire stopping studs shall be minimum 20 gage, solid metal studs 7. Metal Angle Runners shall be 1-3/8" x 7/8" x 26 gage galvanized steel. 8. Special steel studs required for particular installations shall comply with the foregoing properties necessary for the special application or design drawn and the specifications as supplemented. Note slotted connection requirements shown on drawings. 9. Provide special 3" flange at top tracks for vertical deflection conditions. 2.3 METAL FRAMING COMPONENTS - SUSPENDED CEILINGS A. Nonstructural steel framing members and components shall comply with ASTM C645 for conditions indicated. B. At Contractors option, ceiling system can be constructed of either, or a combination of the two systems described below: 1. A direct hung,pre-manufactured "grid suspension system"composed of modular mechanically interlocking steel components and wall angles designed to receive screw-attached gypsum panel products. a. "Drywall Grid Systems"manufactured by Armstrong World Industries. b. "Drywall Furring System"manufactured by Chicago Metallic Corp. C. "Drywall Suspension System" manufactured by USG. 2. A conventional direct or indirect-hung rigid ceiling grid framing system composed of carrying channels, studs,runners, furring channels and other framing members. C. Wire Ties: ASTM A641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062 inch thick. D. Wire Hangers: ASTM A641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162 inch thick. E. Miscellaneous supplemental Metal Framing System: 1. Provide all supplemental metal framing channel material, clamps, connectors, fittings and related accessories as manufactured by Unistrut Corporation or Hilti equal as approved by Architect. 2. Channel members and fittings shall be fabricated from structural grade steel. 3. Set strut system components into final position true to line, level and plumb. 4. Anchor material firmly in place. Tighten all connections to their recommended torque. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\M1SSY\05132\specs\09260NorthamptonMA.doc 09260-3 B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum panels 1010,, flat to prevent sagging. Take care to avoid damage to edges, ends, and surfaces. C. Ready mixed and dry compounds that have been mixed with water shall be stored at temperatures above freezing or temperatures recommended by the manufacturer. 1.6 PROJECT COORDINATION A. Coordinate with Mechanical and Electrical Subcontractors in the location and installation of their work. Provide bridging,bracing and backing to support their work installed in or on drywall construction. Do not close finish ceilings or both faces of walls until their installations have been inspected and approved. 1. G.C. shall contact Owner's HVAC Maintenance Contractor prior to closing up any GWB ceiling containing HVAC equipment. See Section 15500 for name and contact person. 2. HVAC Maintenance Contractor local inspector shall survey the HVAC system and give the on-site superintendent a copy of the deficiency report after the inspection is complete and before the inspector leaves the site. Both the local inspector and the on-site superintendent must sign this report. 3. Talbots G.C. shall fax a copy of the report to the Talbots Construction Project Manager within 24 hours of the inspection. Correct any deficiencies immediately. All questions in regards to the report must go through the Talbots Construction Project Manager. B. Coordinate with other sections so that framing is set and blocking for supporting items are secured before installation of gypsum board. 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. In cold weather and during gypsum panel joint finishing, maintain temperature in the building within the range of 50°to 70°F. Provide adequate ventilation to carry off excess moisture. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GYPSUM BOARD A. All materials under this section shall be as manufactured by the U.S. Gypsum Company,G.P. Gypsum Corp., National Gypsum Company, Lafarge Gypsum or approved equal. B. Gypsum Board: Use fire rated gypsum board unless otherwise indicated. 1. ASTM C1396 Fire Code Type "X", thickness as indicated on Drawings, use longest length available, avoiding unnecessary joints, square cut ends, tapered edges. 2. Sag-resistant type for ceiling surfaces. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\09260NorthamptonMA.doc 09260-2 SECTION 09260 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS I. GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the General Conditions of the Contract, and Division 1 General Requirements. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide gypsum wallboard partitions and ceilings as listed, including but not limited to the following: 1. Interior gypsum wallboard covered partitions (non fire-rated) 2. Fire-rated assemblies 3. Sound control assemblies 4. Interior metal ceiling framing, framed drywall ceilings, soffit framing, fascias,ceiling drops, lightwells,transition spaces. 5. Interior metal framing of enclosures, columns, spaces. 6. Non-load bearing steel stud wall framing 7. Solid metal studs for horizontal fire stopping. 8. Gypsum board and joint treatment 9. Manual and power driven fasteners. 10. Furring, casing beads, corner beads, clips,joint and corner reinforcing and all other necessary accessories required for a complete installation. 1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Where fire-resistance-rated gypsum board assemblies are indicated,provide gypsum board assemblies that comply with design designations in UL "Fire Resistance Directory" or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ASTM C840 (application &finishing GWB), GA-214, GA-216 and GA-600 as applicable. B. All work methods, materials,performance and tests shall be in full accordance with current requirements of the governing building code. In cases of conflict between this specification, the reference specifications and the building code,the more stringent shall govern. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\09260NorthamptonMA.doc 09260-1 D. Apply in accordance with the vinyl decal manufacturer's instructions. 1. Remove the backing sheet that comes adhered to the vinyl graphics. The backing ,,M%& sheet should be separated from the vinyl graphics slowly so that all the copy remains fastened to the transfer tape. 2. Align the graphics with the exact area of installation. Press vinyl graphics on to glazing. Use proper application tool to firmly and evenly press the copy into place. 3. Slowly remove the transfer tape from the graphics observing that the copy stay adhered to the glass as you remove the transfer tape. If some of the vinyl begins to stick to the transfer tape rather than the glass surface, simply press the transfer tape back down and rub over that area again. Repeat this step until the vinyl adheres to the glass surface. E. Place without air bubbles, creases or visible distortion. 3.6 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass,remove them immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer. C. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way, including natural causes,accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer. END OF SECTION Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion GLASS AND GLAZING 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\08800NorthamptonMA.doc 08800-6 3. Cut gasket a minimum of 1/8-inch longer per foot than aluminum extrusion. 4. Do not stretch gaskets to make them fit. D. Place setting blocks at '/4-points. E. Insert gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place. Bond together at corner joints. 1. Corner between gaskets must be cut at correct bevel (miter)to result in good joint. 2. Butt corner joints should be sealed with a high quality butyl for an airtight joint. F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against gasket. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. G. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 3.3 MIRRORS SET IN CASEWORK FRAMES A. Apply mastic in spots to comply with mastic manufacturer's written instructions for coverage and to allow air circulation between back of mirrored glass units and face of mounting surface. B. After mastic is applied, install glass in top and bottom tracks provided. Align mirrored glass units and press into place while maintaining a minimum air space of 1/8-inch between back of mirrored glass and mounting surface. C. Place plumb and level in a manner that avoids distorting reflected images. 3.4 INSTALLATION- SUNSCREEN FILM A. Talbots separate Contractor provides complete installation under supervision of site General Contractor. B. Installer shall locate plastic film as indicated on Drawings, apply in accordance with film manufacturer's instructions. Place without air bubbles, creases or visible distortion. Fit tight to glass perimeter with razor cut edge but do not cut into glazing gaskets. C. When applying two layers of film, allow first layer to dry for fourteen(14)days before applying second layer. 3.5 INSTALLATION-VINYL WINDOW DECALS A. Decal installation by G.C. B. Install decals after plastic films are installed and dry, in those cases where plastic film is installed. C. Ensure all surfaces where vinyl lettering is to be applied are free of all dirt, grease and loose debris. Clean surface with appropriate cleaner. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion GLASS AND GLAZING 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\08800NorthamptonMA.doc 08800-5 2.6 WINDOW DECALS A. Talbots furnishes decals, installation by G.C. 2.7 MIRRORS AND FRAMES A. Sales Area, Fitting Room Triple Mirror and Toilet Room Wood Framed Mirrors: Wood frames furnished by Talbots under Section 06410. Glazing and installation of mirrors by G.C. 1. Ensure mirror glazing is sized correctly so that in addition to the mastic,both the top and bottom channels capture it. 2.8 FABRICATION A. Tempered Glass: 1. Cut float glass materials to indicated sizes before heat strengthening. 2. Temper glass materials horizontally; visible tong marks or tong mark distortions are not permitted. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION-GENERAL A. Comply with GANA "Glazing Manual" and manufacturers instructions and recommendations. B. Use manufacturer's recommended spacers,blocks,primers, sealers, gaskets and accessories. C. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation as follows: 1. Use a rolling block in rotating glass units to prevent damage to glass corners. 2. Do not impact glass with metal framing. 3. Use suction cups to shift glass units within openings; do not raise or drift glass with a pry bar. 4. Install glass with uniformity of pattern, draw,bow and roller marks. 5. Tempered glazing shall be installed in "hazardous" locations per code requirements 3.2 DRY METHOD (PREFORMED GASKET GLAZING IN ALUMINUM FRAMING) A. These general instructions should be used in conjunction with special conditions called for in the installation instructions for each system. B. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with stretch allowance during installation. C. Lay gaskets flat in clean dry area for two hours at a temperature above 50 degrees F to allow gaskets to recover their shape. 1. Glaze with gaskets above 40 degrees F. If necessary warm gaskets before installing. 2. Apply butyl sealant into the exterior gasket reglet at the four corners to ensure a good sea]. Verify sealant is compatible with gasket. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion GLASS AND GLAZING 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\08800NorthamptonMA.doc 08800-4 D. General guideline for glass size 50 sq.ft and larger: 1. Outer Pane: 3/8-inch thick laminated safety glass. 2. Inner Pane: '/4-inch thick laminated safety glass. 3. Air space: 3/8-inch wide,hermetically sealed. Purge interpane space with dry air. E. Provide unit edge seals,with aluminum spacers having mitered end corners, and silicone sealant for glass-to-spacer seals. Spacer shall be black anodized aluminum. F. Insulated glass units installed at storefront shall have safety glass as required by code. 2.3 ELASTOMERIC GLAZING GASKET A. Dense compression type design,replaceable glazing gaskets for metal storefronts shall be molded or extruded from EPDM or neoprene in accordance with ASTM C864 or ASTM C509. B. Profile and hardness as required maintaining uniform pressure for watertight seal. C. The storefront framing/door manufacturer provides gaskets. 2.4 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Setting Blocks: ASTM C 864, neoprene, 70 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness; length 4- inches, width of glazing rabbet space less 1/16-inch, height required for glazing method,pane weight, and pane area. B. Spacer Shims: ASTM C 864,neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness; length 3- inches, one half height of glazing stop, thickness required for application, one face self- adhesive. C. Edge Blocks: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A Durometer hardness, minimum of 3-inches long. D. Mirror Adhesive: 1. Mirro-Mastic by Palmer Products Corp., Louisville,KY. 2. Ultra/Bond by Gunther Mirror Mastics, South Bend, IN, (800)227-6181. 3. Or other approved adhesive chemically compatible with mirror coating and substrate. E. Glazing Buttons for Butt Glazed Storefronts: Furnished by Talbots. 2.5 APPLIED STOREFRONT SUNSCREEN FILM A. Applied exterior window sunscreen film and installation provided by Talbots separate Contractor. 1. Talbots Vendor: American Window Film,Foxboro,MA, (508) 549-0300. a. Contact: Jim Davey. b. Film is Scotchshield "SCLARL 150",2 mil thick as manufactured by 3M Specified Construction Products. 2. Talbots Construction Project Manager will contact vendor to arrange installation as required for specific project. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion GLASS AND GLAZING 34 Bridge Street, Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\08800NorthamptonMA.doc 08800-3 1.6 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS •wowk A. General 1. Glazing systems shall be capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: a. Defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation. b. Failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight. C. Deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. 2. Temperature Change (Range): 120 degrees F, ambient; 180 degrees F, material surfaces. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS MATERIALS A. Float Glass: Clear annealed glass meeting the requirements of ASTM C1036,Type 1, Quality q3 (glazing select), Thickness as shown on drawings. B. Tempered Safety Glass: Glass meeting the requirements of ANSI Z97.1 and ASTM C1048, Condition A,Type I(transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3 (glazing select), Kind FT(fully tempered). Thickness as shown on drawings. 1. Each glass light shall bear the permanent Safety Glazing identification label in visible location at the bottom corner. Label shall be legible and visible after installation. C. Laminated Safety Glass: Clear annealed glass meeting the requirements of ASTM C1036, total laminated nominal thickness '/4-inch or 3/8-inch as indicated, laminated with 0.030-inch polyvinyl butyral (PVB) interlayer. Laminated glass shall be fabricated in accordance with and comply with ANSI Z97.1, and ASTM C1172. 1. Each glass light shall bear the permanent Safety Glazing identification label in visible location at the bottom corner. Label shall be legible and visible after installation. D. Mirror Glass: Clear float glass per ASTM C1036, Type 1 (transparent flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q (mirror select)with copper and silver coating, organic overcoating, square and polished edges, '/4-inch thick with PVB safety backing. 2.2 SEALED INSULATING GLASS UNITS A. Insulated Glass Units: Shall be fabricated in accordance with and meet the test requirements of ASTM E774 and E773 respectively. B. Total thickness of unit shall be 1-inch. C. General guideline for glass size less than 50 sq.ft. 1. Outer Pane: Tempered safety glass. Total glass thickness: '/4-inch. 2. Inner Pane: Tempered safety glass. Total glass thickness: '/4-inch. 3. Air Space: V2-inch wide, hermetically sealed.Purge interpane space with dry air. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion GLASS AND GLAZING 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\08800NorthamptonMA.doc 08800-2 SECTION 08800 GLASS AND GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 General Requirements. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide glass and glazing work and related work described in this section and as shown on the drawing, including but not limited to the following: 1. Clear float glass. 2. Tempered/laminated(safety) glass. 3. Insulating glass units. 4. Mirrors. 5. Window film. 6. Installation of window decals. 7. All related accessory items such as setting blocks, spacer shims,neoprene channels as required for complete installation of work of this section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01001. B. Warranty: Submit written warranty for types of glass units furnished. 1. Insulating Glass: a. Deterioration: Failure of hermetic seal resulting in obstruction of vision by dust,moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. b. Warranty Period: Five (5)years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers that have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. B. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. All glazing work shall conform to the specified requirements, the drawings,the manufacturer's recommendations and Consumer Product Safety Commission's Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials as most recently amended. B. Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and ate" ANSI Z97.1. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion GLASS AND GLAZING 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\08800NorthamptonMA.doc 08800-1 SET NO. 11A Door No. 12 CLOSET TO SALES AREA (MIRRORED SECRET DOOR) Hardware provided by Millwork fabricator. SET N0.12A Door No. 4 STOCK ROOM TO EXTERIOR(RECEIVING DOOR) Door No. 11 STOCK ROOM TO EXTERIOR Each Door: Qty Item& Catalog# Manufacturer Finish 1.5 PR Butts FBB 191,4.5" x 4.5" x NRP Stanley USP 1 Exit alarm, AC power, EA250OF x MS-2049S x PP-5152-3 Detex Alum to accept Arrow 7 pin cylinder 1 Cylinder 16 RCR 27 L/C (for alarm) Arrow 626 1 Exit Device: FL2100 x length reqd. x S300 Strike Precision US28 1 Door Closer 1371 LCN Alum 1 Viewer 622 Rockwood US26D 1 Set Head&jamb weatherstripping, 297AV Pemko Alum 1 Set Door bottom weatherstripping, 309AP Pemko Alum 1 Threshold (by G.C.—See specification) 1 Engraved Plastic Sign, White Letters, TFI Custom Grey Helvetica Bold Caps, Copy: "TALBOTS RECEIVING" Size: 2.5"H x 7.5"W (CSN 043) SET NO. 13A Door No. 9 STOCK ROOM TO RECORDS ROOM Qty Item&Cataio # Manufacturer Finish 1.5 PR Butts FBB 179,4.5" x 4.5" Stanley US26D 1 Privacy Lever Set, D40S-RHO 14-001 x 10-025 Schlage 626 1 Floor Stop 471 Rockwood US26D 1 Coat Hook 574 Ives B26D 3 Door Silencers#20 Ives Grey END OF SECTION Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion DOOR HARDWARE 34 Bridge Street, Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\08700NorthamptonMA.doc 08700-6 SET NO.5A Door No. 6 WOMENS TOILET ROOM TO VESTIBULE Door No. 7 MENS TOILET ROOM TO VESTIBULE Each Door: Qty Item&Catalo # Manufacturer Finish 1.5 PR Butts FBB 179,4.5" x 4.5" Stanley US26D 1 Privacy Lever Set,D40S-RHO, 14-001 X 10-025 Schlage 626 1 Closer 1371 (mt. on restroom side) LCN ALUM 1 Kickplate 8"high, 18 GA., 2000 series, Stainless Steel Baldwin 324 1 Floor Stop#471 Rockwood US26D 1 Coat Hook 574 Ives B26 3 Silencers #20 Ives Grey 1 ADA Accessible Sign: 6"x 8" x 1/8" MP plastic,#102 black,by Best Sign Systems White copy, Beveled edges, Square Corners,Vinyl foam tape mounting, Copy: "RESTROOM", 3/4" uppercase helvetica medium raised 1/32" with Braille, #950 white background. SET NO. 6A Door No. 8 VESTIBULE TO STOCK ROOM Qty Item&Catalog# Manufacturer Finish 1.5 PR Butts FBB 179,4.5" x 4.5" Stanley US26D 1 Roller Latch#0440-264 with strike Baldwin 264 1 Push Plate/Pull Handle#2275 x 2575 (10") Baldwin 264 1 Push Plate#2275 (3.5" x 15") Baldwin 264 1 Kickplate 8"high, 18 GA.,2000 series, Stainless Steel Baldwin 324 1 Closer 1371 (mount on stockroom side) LCN ALUM 1 Stop&Hold 473 Rockwood US26D 3 Silencers #20 Ives Grey 1 Aluminum Sign, Black Enamel Letters,Helvetica Bold Caps, TFI Custom US28 Copy: "OFFICE", Size: 2-1/2 H"x 7-1/2"W (CSN048) SET NO.7A Door No. 14 ELECTRIC CLOSET TO FITTING ROOM VESTIBULE Qty Item&Catalog# Manufacturer Finish 1.5 PR Butts FBB 179,4.5" x 4.5" Stanley US26D 1 Security Lockset#L1001 (keypad location x door swing) Simplex US26D I Closer 1371 (mount on electric room side) LCN Alum 1 Kickplate 8" high, 18 GA., 2000 series, Stainless Steel Baldwin 324 3 Silencers #20 Ives Grey 1 Aluminum Sign, Black Enamel Letters,Helvetica Bold Caps, TFI Custom US28 Copy: "OFFICE", Size: 2-1/2" H x 7-1/2"W (CSN048) Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion DOOR HARDWARE 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\08700NorthamptonMA.doc 08700-5 B. All hardware as listed below is furnished by Owner unless otherwise indicated. SET NO.3C Door No. 1 PETITES SALES AREA TO EXTERIOR Door No. 2 WOMAN SALES AREA TO EXTERIOR Each Pair of Doors: Qty Item&Catalog# Manufacturer Finish 3 PR Butts FBB 191, 4.5" x 4.5"NRP Stanley US3 1 Deadlock MS1852SNSI-4 X HANDING Adams Rite 335 1 Threshold Bolt 4015-18 Adams Rite N/A 1 Header Bolt 4016 X door height, W/Strike Adams Rite N/A 1 Thumb Turn 09-900, W/13502-292 cam Schlage 605 1 Lock Cylinder 1 E74-C4-RP3 W/Talbots Construction Core Best 605 2 Handle 6621 x FD, Lexington style** Baldwin 003 2 Push Plate/Flush Pull (custom-96 Modified) Rockwood 030 2 Door Closer 4111 x EDA plated arm&cover(hand as required) LCN US3 4 Kickplate #2001, 8" high x 34" long Baldwin 030 1 Dustproof Strike 572 Rockwood US3 2 Door Knocker#6960VM "Pitcher" Virginia Metal Solid Brass 2 Set Screw Covers 0129 Baldwin 030 2 Door Stop 461 Rockwood US3 1 Set Head and Jamb Weatherstrip 297 Pemko BDGV 1 Set Bottom Weatherstrip 309 Pemko GP 2 Talbot's Name Plaque(CSN300) TFI Custom Solid Brass 1 Brass Sign, Black Enamel Letters, Helvetica Bold Caps TFI Custom 605 Copy: "THIS DOOR SHALL REMAIN UNLOCKED DURING BUSINESS HOURS" Size: 1.5"H x 36"W (CSN052) "'" 1 Threshold (furnished by G.C.) See spec SET NO. 3E Door No. 3 EXISTING MISSES SALES AREA TO EXTERIOR(RED ENTRY DOOR) Each Pair of Doors: Qty Item&Catalo- # Manufacturer Finish 1 Lock Cylinder 1 E74-C4-RP3 (keep existing core Best 605 2 Handle 6621 x FD, Lexington style Baldwin 003 2 Talbot's Name Plaque(CSN300) TFI Custom Solid Brass Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion DOOR HARDWARE 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\08700NorthamptonMA.doc 08700-4 3.2 DOOR CLOSERS A. Do not locate closers on the side of doors facing corridors,passageways, or similar type areas. Where it is necessary, due to certain conditions and with the approval of the Architect, to have closers in corridors,Owner shall provide such closers with parallel or track type arms. B. Do not install on the outside of any exterior door. C. Whenever it is necessary to install a closer on the side of the door away from the butts, use parallel arm. D. Corner of soffit brackets are not permitted unless no other method of installation is possible. 3.3 THRESHOLDS A. Cut and fit threshold and floor covers to profile of frames with mitered corners and hairline joints. Join units with concealed welds or concealed mechanical joints. Cut smooth openings for spindles,bolts and similar items. B. Set metal thresholds for exterior in full bed of sealant(either butyl rubber or polyisobutylene mastic)complying with requirements specified in Section 07900 "Joint Sealants." 1. Completely fill concealed voids and exclude moisture from every source. 2. Do not plug drainage holes or block weeps. Remove excess sealant. 3. Fasten in place with flat-headed countersunk corrosion resistant screws into expansion plugs installed in holes drilled in the concrete slab 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 1. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees,the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch,measured to the leading edge of the door. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 3.6 SCHEDULE A. Catalog numbers for various items of hardware listed in the schedule of Finish Hardware are given as a means of describing the minimum requirements as to the type, design, quality, weight,mechanical construction and operation to which such hardware shall conform. oval Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion DOOR HARDWARE 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\08700NorthamptonMA.doc 08700-3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Owner furnishes all materials, unless otherwise noted. B. Entrances/Receiving Door: 1. G.C. provides thresholds for exterior applications: Model S404B (architectural Bronze) x 4" wide x door width, manufactured by Reese Enterprises, Inc. 2.2 KEYING A. Door Locks: final control keying with removable 7 pin core(cores are Owner furnished and installed). B. Hardware shall be complete with all necessary screws,bolts, anchors or other fastenings for proper application of suitable size and type, and match hardware as to materials and finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements of SDI, ANSI/NFPA 80, BHMA and DHI. B. Use the templates provided by hardware item manufacturer. C. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless specifically indicated by Owner or Architect or required to comply with governing regulations: 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 2. Conform to ANSI A117.1 for positioning requirements for the handicapped. D. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. 1. Set units level,plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. E. All butts, locks, plates, strikes, etc., shall be neatly and accurately mortised flush,properly placed and accurately aligned for smooth and quiet operation without sticking,binding, hanging, or rattling. All doors shall be hung with equal clearance at jambs and heads. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion DOOR HARDWARE 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\08700NorthamptonMA.doc 08700-2 SECTION 08700 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the General Conditions of the Contract and Division I General Requirements. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes items of finish hardware including but not limited to the following: 1. Installation of Owner furnished door hardware, weatherstripping, seals, door gaskets, door silencers, and accessory items. 2. G.C. Provided threshold at exterior front entrance and receiving door entrance. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work of this Section with other directly affected Sections involving manufacturer of any internal reinforcement for door hardware. B. Coordinate 120v electrical for remote exit alarms. Refer to hardware schedules 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Hardware Installer: Employ a qualified carpentry person to perform the work of this Section. B. Standards: Comply with BHMA A156 series standards, Grade 1,unless Grade 2 is indicated. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable building code for requirements applicable to fire rated and egress doors and frames. 1. Install door hardware for Fire-Rated door assemblies in compliance with NFPA 80. 2. Comply with provisions of Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA), "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)," ANSI Al 17.1 to accommodate handicapped persons. 3. Thresholds on egress doors: Not more than 1/2 inch high. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept inside delivery of Owner furnished hardware. B. Protect materials from damage during storage on site. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion DOOR HARDWARE 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\08700NorthamptonMA.doc 08700-1 3. Limit offsets in theoretical end to end and edge to edge alignment: 1/16-inch from flush surfaces not more than 2 inches apart or out-of-flush by more than '/4-inch. Aftk 3.3 BASE—GRANITE A. Installation of base shall be in accordance with Section 09300. 3.4 ENTRY DOORS A. Set entry door units level,plumb, and true to line, with uniform joints in proper alignment. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust door for smooth and balanced movement. B. Adjust weatherstripping to contact appropriate surfaces and form weather seal. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Water Spray Test: After completing the installation, test storefront system for water penetration according to AAMA 501.2 requirements. B. Repair or remove and replace Work that does not meet requirements or that is damaged by testing. Replace to conform to specified requirements. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean surfaces in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations; remove excess mastic, mastic smears, foreign materials and other unsightly marks. B. Clean metal surfaces exercising care to avoid damage. ---END OF SECTION --- Talbots Store No.335, Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion ALUMINUM ENTRANCE AND STOREFRONT 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29,2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\08410NorthamptonMA.doc 08410-8 3.2 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Set units level, plumb and true to line, with uniform joints in proper alignment. Support on metal shims and secure in place by bolting to clip angles, inserts and similar supports, and securely anchor to supporting structure. Use only types of equipment,ropes, wedges, spacers, shims and other items during erection that will not stain or mar the finish of units. B. Anchor securely in place,allowing for required movement, including expansion and contraction. C. Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. a. Paint clip angles and other ferrous metal parts thatwill be concealed, with a zinc-chromate paint. 2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry,protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. D. Install system to be watertight in accordance with manufacturer's standards. Manufacturer's designed flashing, or equal, as shown in published details must be used. Water deflectors must be installed on all intermediate horizontal shear blocks and sealed with mastic per manufacturer's instructions. Provide 1/8-inch pressure relief clearance between all horizontal sills and the flashing to allow the system to drain. Manufacturer's designed shim seats shall be used under sills at each setting block location. how 1. Install components to drain water passing joints and condensation and moisture occurring or migrating within the system to the exterior. 2. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. 3. Extend sill flashing continuous with splice joints; set in continuous beads of sealant. E. Sealants: 1. Use sealants as recommended by sealant manufacturer. Comply with requirements of Section 07900. 2. Seal perimeter members as shown on manufacturer's installation instructions or as required for unique job condition. Set other members with internal sealants and baffles as called for in manufacturer's installation instructions. Coordinate installation of perimeter sealant and backing materials between assemblies and adjacent construction. 3. Set continuous sill members and flashing in a full sealant bed to provide weathertight construction unless otherwise indicated. 4. Remove excess sealant from component surfaces before sealant has cured. F. Glazing: As provided in Section 08800. G. Erection Tolerances: 1. Limit variations from plum and level a. 1/8-inch in 10 feet vertically b. 1/8-inch in 20 feet horizontally 2. Limit variations from theoretical locations: '/4-inch for any member at any location. Talbots Store No.335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion ALUMINUM ENTRANCE AND STOREFRONT 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29,2005 05132 R:\MESSY\05132\specs\08410NorthamptonMA.doc 08410-7 5. Seal horizontals and direct moisture accumulation to exterior. 6. Provide flashings and other materials used internally or externally that are corrosive resistant, non-staining, non-bleeding and compatible with adjoining materials. 7. Provide manufacturer's extrusions and accessories to accommodate expansion and contraction due to temperature changes without being detrimental to appearance or performance. 8. Make provisions in framing for minimum edge clearance,nominal edge cover and nominal pocket width for thickness and type of glazing or infill used in accordance with recommendations of manufacturer and GANA Glazing Manual. D. Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing hardware. E. Shop Welding: 1. Comply with AWS recommendations. 2. Use recommended electrodes and methods to avoid distortion and discoloration. 3. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces,restore mechanical finish. 2.11 SHOP FINISH -FRAMING A. Shop applied coating on exposed surfaces and surfaces requiring coats as shown on drawings as specified and as scheduled below. 1. Exposed surfaces shall be free of scratches and other blemishes. B. High Performance Fluoropolymer Color Coating 1. Surfaces shall be cleaned and given conversion coating pretreatment prior to application of primer. 2. Color coat shall be fused to primed surfaces and oven-cured at temperature recommended by manufacturer. 3. Finish Gloss: 25-35,Medium Gloss 4. Two coat system(prime and color coat), with 1.2 mils total system thickness. 5. Color: PT 156,UC 391A856, Color to match BM No. 961, Off-White. 6. Paint system shall be one of the following: a. Acroflur by Valspar Corporation(800)406-6480. Baked on 50% PVDF (Kynar or Hylar)resin based coating meeting the performance criteria of AAMA 2604. b. Fluropon by Valspar Corporation. Baked on 70%PVDF (Kynar or Hylar) resin based coating meeting the performance criteria of AAMA 2605. C. Duranar by PPG Industries Inc. Baked on 70%PVDF(Kynar or Hylar)resin based coating meeting the performance criteria of AAMA 2605. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify dimensions, tolerances and method of attachment with other work. Talbots Store No.335, Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion ALUMINUM ENTRANCE AND STOREFRONT 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29,2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\08410NorthamptonMA.doc 08410-6 C. Spacer shims: Neoprene 50 Shore A durometer hardness, 3 inches long by '/4-inch wide by 1/4- inch thick, self adhesive one face. D. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types,replaceable,molded or extruded, that maintain uniform pressure and watertight seal. 1. Provide in manufacturers standard black color. 2.6 ALUMINUM ENTRY DOORS A. Doors are manufactured by Cline Aluminum Doors Inc., W. Bradenton, FL (941) 746-4106. B. Doors are pre-finished at fabricators shop and are complete with installed hardware with the exception of the closer and miscellaneous trims. 2.7 STRUCTURAL ADHESIVE A. "PL Premium" adhesive as manufactured by Sonneborn/Chemrex Inc. B. Granite storefront base adhesive: Exterior grade epoxy adhesive: Bonstone Anchor(A-100/B- 412X)manufactured by Bonstone Materials Corp.,Mukwonago, WI, (800)425-2214. 2.8 BASE A. Granite, furnished by G.C., as specified in Section 09300 2.9 CAULKING AND SEALANTS A. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified in Section 07900. 2.10 FABRICATION A. Coordination of Fabrication: 1. Check actual frame or door openings required in construction work by accurate field measurements before fabrication. 2. Fabricate units to withstand loads that will be applied when system is in place. B. General 1. Conceal fasteners whenever possible 2. Reinforce work as necessary for performance requirements and for support to structure. 3. Separate dissimilar metals and aluminum in contact with concrete utilizing protective coating or preformed separators that will prevent contact and corrosion. C. Aluminum Framing 1. Provide members of size, shape and profile indicated, designed to provide for glazing from exterior. 2. Fabricate frame assemblies with joints straight and tight fitting. 3. Reinforce internally with structural members as necessary to support design loads. 4. Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles, with hairline fit of contacting members. Talbots Store No.335, Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion ALUMINUM ENTRANCE AND STOREFRONT 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29,2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\08410NortharnptonMA.doc 08410-5 5. Provide nuts or washers of design having means to prevent disengagement, deforming of fastener threads is unacceptable. A%k E. Expansion Anchor Devices: lead-shield or toothed-steel, drilled-in, expansion bolt anchors. F. Protective Coatings: 1. Bituminous Paint: cold applied asphalt mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements, except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30 mil thickness per coat. 2. Alkyd type zinc-chromate primer complying with FS TT-P-645. G. Internal Sealants: types recommended by sealant manufacturer. H. Baffles at Weep Holes: type as recommended by system manufacturer and shown in published installation instructions. I. Flashings: 1. Form from sheet aluminum with same finish as extruded sections. Apply finish after fabrication. Material thickness as required to suit condition without deflection or "oil-canning" 2. Sill Flashing: to match system, shop finished. 3. Concealed Flashing: manufacturers standard corrosion-resistant nonstaining, nonbleedng flashing, compatible with adjacent materials, and type recommended by manufacturer. J. Brake metal for vertical inside and outside corner infills shall be 0.062-inch aluminum. Shop finish to match framing system. 2.4 INFILL PANELS A. Non-insulating Panels: Flat, mill edge, .020" aluminum faced panels(two sides), bonded to low density thermoplastic compound core. Total thickness of composite panel 6 mm. Alucabond panels manufactured by Alcan Composites Inc., (800) 626-3365. 1. Finish: Mill frninshed on two sides. B. Insulated Panels: "Omega Metfoam-Ply"metal faced insulated panels with foam core as manufactured by Laminators Inc (800) 523-2347. 1. Thickness: I-inch, R value: 5.9. 2. Panels shall be shop fabricated and consist of 3 layers adhesively bonded. 3. Face-sheets shall be .032 "smooth aluminum prefinished with corrosion resistant primer, color: white. 4. Insulation shall be isocyanurate structural foam. 2.5 GLASS AND GLAZING ACCESSORIES. A. Glazing: refer to Section 08800 and types shown on Drawings. B. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 70 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness,4 inches long by 3/8-inch wide by '/4-inch high. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion ALUMINUM ENTRANCE AND STOREFRONT 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29,2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\0841 ONorthamptonMA.doc 08410-4 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Accept inside delivery of Owner furnished entry doors. B. Protect framing and accessory material from damage during storage on site. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate requirements and materials with electrical for door security systems, other trades, and be responsible for compatibility of all parts and pieces relating to the work of this section with components of electrical and other related work. B. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Drawings, specifications and part identification numbers are based on Vistawall Architectural Products framing system. No other manufacturers or products will be acceptable. 2.2 FRAMING SYSTEM A. Profile: 1-3/4-inch x 5-1/4-inch nominal dimension,Vistawall system Series HP-175 "Thermal Slot"design. 2.3 FRAMING MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES A. Aluminum: ASTM B221,Alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions,ASTM B209,Alloy 5005-H34 for sheets, or other alloys and temper recommended by manufacturer appropriate for specified finish. B. Internal Reinforcing: 1. ASTM A36 for carbon steel,ASTM B308 for structural aluminum. 2. Shapes and sizes to suit installation: 3. Shop coat steel components after fabrication with alkyd type zinc-chromate primer complying with FS TT-P-645. C. Anchorage Devices: manufacturers standard formed or fabricated steel or aluminum assemblies of shapes,plates,bars or tubes. D. Fasteners: 1. Aluminum,nonmagnetic stainless steel or other materials warranted by manufacturer to be non-corrosive and compatible with components being fastened. 2. Do not use exposed fasteners, except where unavoidable for application of hardware. 3. In exposed locations, use countersunk Phillips head screws with finish matching items fastened. 4. In concealed locations, use manufacturers standard fasteners. Talbots Store No.335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion ALUMINUM ENTRANCE AND STOREFRONT 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29,2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\0841 ONorthamptonMA.doc 08410-3 C. Installer Certificate 1. Submit documentation signed by the General Contractor certifying that authorized Vistawall installers performed the installation. 1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Architects drawings are diagrammatic and do not purport to identify nor solve problems of thermal or structural movement, glazing, anchorage or moisture disposal. Requirements shown by details are intended to establish basic dimension of units, sight lines and profiles of members. B. Entrance and storefront systems, including necessary modifications shall meet specified requirements and maintain visual design concepts. 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Air Infiltration: Air leakage through fixed light areas of storefront shall not exceed 0.06 cfm per square foot of surface area when tested in accordance with ASTM E283 at differential static pressure of 1.57psf. B. Water Infiltration: No uncontrolled water leakage when tested according to ASTM E331 at minimum differential pressure of 20 percent of inward acting wind-load design pressure but not less than 6.24 lbf per square foot. 1. Drain water entering the framing system to exterior. C. Thermal Requirement: Framing system shall accommodate expansion and contraction movement due to surface temperature differentials of 180°F without causing buckling, stress on glass, failure of joint seals, excessive stress on structural elements,reduction of performance or other detrimental effects. D. Structural Requirements: 1. Deflection normal to glazing plane: limited to 1/175 of clear span or 3/4-inch, whichever is smaller. 2. Deflection parallel to glazing plane: When carrying full dead load,not to exceed amount that reduces glazing bite below 75 percent of design dimensions and that which reduces edge clearance between framing members and glazing or other fixed components to less than 1/8-inch. 3. Anchors, fasteners and braces shall be structurally stressed not more than 50% of allowable stress when maximum loads are applied. E. Attachment considerations are to take into account site peculiarities and expansion and contraction movements so there is no possibility of loosening, weakening or fracturing connection between units and building structure or between units themselves. F. Assemblies shall be free from rattles,wind whistles and noise due to thermal and structural movement and wind pressure. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with AAMA SFM-1 and manufacturer's written instructions. Talbots Store No.335, Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion ALUMINUM ENTRANCE AND STOREFRONT 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29,2005 05132 R:A MISSY\05132\specs\08410NorthamptonMA.doc 08410-2 SECTION 08410 ALUMINUM ENTRANCE AND STOREFRONT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 General Requirements. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Entrance and storefront systems, complete with reinforcing, anchors and attachment devices including but not limited to the following: 1. Aluminum exterior storefront framing system. 2. Supplementary internal supports and stiffener framing components. 3. Flashing and trim metal. 4. Storefront base. 5. Accessory items associated with framing including glazing gaskets, anchors, brackets, attachments, fasteners,reinforcing, clips, closures and any trims as required for a complete installation. 6. Installation of red entry doors. 7. Infill panels. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01001. B. Shop Drawings: No later than twenty(20)days after contract award, the site G.C. shall provide shop drawings for all storefront components and elements for Talbots review and approval. 1. Drawings for Vistawall supplied framing members and any other appurtenances supplied by Vistawall, shall be prepared by Vistawall. Contact Christopher Baker-- at Vistawall, Phone: (800) 869-4567, (972) 551-6487, Fax: (972) 551-6323. a. G.C. is responsible for field verification of dimensions as applicable. b. G.C. shall review Vistawall drawings, stamp and indicate his approval prior to submitting to Talbots. Drawings will not be reviewed unless the G.C. has indicated his review. 2. Shop drawings for other storefront components not supplied by Vistawall shall be submitted to Talbots for review and approval. 3. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the work. 4. Submit two (2)prints of each submittal. Indicate materials, component profiles, elevations, assembly methods, fastening methods,joint details, accessories, dimensions, schedule of finishes, components within the assemble, framed opening requirements and tolerances, anchorage and fasteners, type of glazing and infills, door framing reinforcing requirements and affected related work. Talbots Store No.335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion ALUMINUM ENTRANCE AND STOREFRONT 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29,2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\08410NorthamptonMA.doc 08410-1 B. Milcor Style "M", or equal, for gypsum board ceilings. C. Milcor Style "M" or equal for gypsum board wall applications. 2.3 SECURITY ACCESS PANEL A. Furnished by Talbots, installed by G.C. Size: 10-inches X 10-inches. 2.4 LOCKS/LATCHES AND HINGES A. Screw driver operated quarter turn cam latches, except as follows: 1. Fire-Rated Access Doors: UL listed self-closing and self-latching hardware. 2. Latch shall hold doors in flush, smooth plane when closed. B. Hinge: Concealed spring hinge opening door to 175 degrees. C. Security alarm access panel: Self latching type with direct action knob 2.5 FINISH A. Factory applied rust inhibitive primer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions. 1. Install plumb, level and square. 2. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels aligned with adjacent finish surfaces. B. Install fire-rated units to comply with fire-resistance rating required. Coordinate installation and field finishing with work of other trades. C. Install security access panel in location as shown on the Drawings. D. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation. 3.2 FINISH A. Field finish paint where indicated on the Drawings in accordance with Section 09900. B. Apply wall covering where indicated on the Drawings in accordance with Section 09950. --- END OF SECTION --- Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion ACCESS DOORS 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\08305NorthamptonMA.doe 08305-2 SECTION 08305 ACCESS DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 General Requirements. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide access doors for access to valves,controls, fire dampers,plumbing and other"in wall", or ceiling concealed items requiring maintenance, including but not limited to the following: 1. Access doors and frames. 2. Fire-rated access doors and frames. B. Installation of Talbots furnished security control access panel. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 and that are labeled and listed by UL, ITS, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction per test method indicated. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work with Plumbing, HVAC, and Electrical work requiring access units. B. Coordinate work with placement of wall reinforcement and blocking to receive anchor attachments. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Specifications and part identification numbers for wall and ceiling units are based on those manufactured by Milcor/Lima Register Co(888) 861-6452. Available manufacturers, subject to compliance with requirements,that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. J. L. Industries. 2. KARP Associates. 2.2 STANDARD WALL AND CEILING ACCESS UNITS—NON FIRE-RATED A. Milcor Style "M" or equal for ceramic tile,masonry and concrete wall installations. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion ACCESS DOORS 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\08305NorthamptonMA.doe 08305-1 4. In masonry construction,provide at least three wall anchors per jamb; install adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Am*. Acceptable anchors include masonry wire anchors and masonry T-shaped anchors. 5. In existing concrete or masonry construction,provide at least three completed opening anchors per jamb; install adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Set frames and secure to adjacent construction with bolts and masonry anchorage devices. 6. In metal-stud partitions,provide at least three wall anchors per jamb; install adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb.Attach wall anchors to studs with screws. 7. Set frames plumb, level, and true alignment,securely fastened to the floor and adjoining walls. 8. Coordinate with masonry and wallboard construction for anchor placement. Fill frames in masonry walls with mortar as the wall is laid up. B. Install doors in accordance with DHI. 1. Fire-Rated Doors: Install within clearances specified in NFPA 80. 2. Install doors accurately in frames, maintaining specified clearances. 3.2 TOLERANCES A. Frame Installation Tolerances: 1. Plumbness: Plus or minus 0.063 inch measured through a line intersecting comer of vertical members and the head to the floor. 2. Squareness:Plus or minus 0.063 inch measured through a line 90 degrees from one jamb at upper corner to opposite jamb. 3. Alignment: Plus or minus 0.063 inch measured on jambs, through a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. 4. Twist: Plus or minus 0.063 inch measured at face corners of jambs, on parallel lines perpendicular to plane of wall. B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/8-inch measured with straight edge, corner to corner. 3.3 HARDWARE INSTALLATION A. Install all scheduled hardware in accordance with Section 08700 Hardware. 3.4 FIELD FINISHING A. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after installation, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch up of compatible air-drying primer. B. Finish coatings shall be applied in accordance with Section 09900. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust hardware and door movement for smooth, quiet and balanced door movement. END OF SECTION Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\08110NorthamptonMA.doc 08110-5 3. All surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of dust, grease, oil, other foreign substances. Fill defects with epoxy putty, sand to smooth and even surface. 4. All exposed surfaces of exterior hollow and pressed metal work shall receive one coat of baked on prime paint in addition to the galvanizing,bonderizing process. Concealed surfaces of exterior pressed metal frames shall receive one coat of shop primer baked on, second coat of bituminous paint. G. Accessories 1. Weatherstripping and Hardware: see hardware schedule Section 08700. 2. Plaster Guards: Provide 0.016-inch-thick, steel sheet plaster guards or mortar boxes to close off interior of openings; place at back of hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation. 3. Anchors: Three per jamb, typically, of type to suit supportive construction. H. Provisions for Hardware: 1. Location of hardware shall be as follows: a. Panic Devices: Centerline of strike 40-5/16" from bottom of frame. b. Top Hinge: Not more than 11-3/4" from rabbet section of head of frame to centerline of hinge. C. Bottom Hinge: Not more than 13" from bottom of frame to centerline of hinge. d. Intermediate Hinge(s): Equally spaced between top and bottom hinge. 2. Hardware Reinforcements: Doors shall be mortised,reinforced, drilled and tapped at the factory for fully templated hardware only, in accord with the approved hardware schedule and templates provided by the hardware contractor. Where surface mounted hardware is to be applied, doors shall have reinforcing plates only; all drilling and tapping shall be done by others. Minimum gages for hardware reinforcing plates shall be as follows for hollow metal doors: a. Hinges- 1-3/4": Frame 10 gage Door 10 gage b. Surface Panic Devices: Door 12 gage (flat) 14-gage(box) Frame 12 gage (flat) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions in SDI 105, unless otherwise indicated. Set frames accurately in position,plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 1. Except for frames located in existing walls or partitions,place frames before construction of enclosing walls and ceilings. 2. For in-place gypsum board partitions, install knock-down, drywall slip-on frames. 3. Install fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\08110NorthamptonMA.doc 08110-4 b. Rigid core or polystyrene foam board, 1500 psf compressive strength, 18 psi shear strength. Strength of bond between core and steel face sheet shall ;x01*1 exceed strength of core so that delamination will not occur under operating conditions. 1) Minimum insulation value of"R" 5 for polystyrene. C. If laminated insulation is used, apply adhesive full coverage to door face. Do not use spot adhesive method. 4. Provide outswinging doors with rigid vinyl top caps. 5. Edge profiles shall be provided on both vertical edges of all doors as follows: Single- acting swing doors,beveled 1/8-inch in 2-inches. D. Fabrication of Frames—Non fire-rated 1. Furnish pressed steel combination buck and trim type frames for door openings where indicated. All frames shall be fabricated in accord with SDI-111A. 2. Frame Anchors for Wall Conditions: Provide frames with minimum of three anchors per jamb as required for adjoining wall construction. Provide anchors of not less than 18-gage steel strap or 3/16-inch diameter wire, adjustable or "T" shaped. Provide minimum 18-gage ceiling struts when required. Provide frames for 2-inch solid plaster partitions and for frames over 8'-0" high, provide 1 additional anchor for each 2-feet or fraction thereof in height with four anchors per jamb. 3. Floor Anchors: Floor anchors shall clip angle type and securely welded inside each J amb, with two holes provided at each jamb for floor anchorage. Where so scheduled or specified,adjustable floor anchors,providing not less than 2-inch height adjustment, shall be provided. 4. Exterior Frames: Provide welded unit type frames,profiles as shown of drawings. Knockdown frames will not be accepted. Supply welded in mortar guards at all hardware cutouts 5. Welded Frames: Fabricate from cold rolled steel with corners fully mitered, to hairline accuracy with face joints continuously welded and ground smooth and flush. a. Frames shall be fabricated in accordance with SDI I I IA. b. Secure headers and jambs at the corners either by internal welding of faces with continuous weld bead or by welded spliceplates. Secure joints at jambs and headers at the rabbet either by tack welding on the inside of the profile or by mechanical interlock. C. Form neat line joints at faces of frames at junction of head and jamb. d. Provide welded frames with temporary spreader bars. E. Clearances 1. Edge clearances for Non-Fire-Rated Doors: a. Between doors& frame, at head and jambs: 1/8" b. Where threshold is used: 1/4" max.between door and threshold F. Factory Finish: 1. After fabrication, thoroughly clean all doors,phosphate treat, (to assure maximum paint adhesion) and dip or spray all surfaces of the doors with a coat of rust inhibiting primer, baked on. ANSI A224.1 shall apply to the door finish. 2. Paint shall be zinc chromate primer conforming to Federal Specification TT P57, Type III. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\08110NorthamptonMA.doc 08110-3 B. Talbots separate Contractor fabricates doors with hardware reinforcement and stiffeners welded in place. C. Talbots separate Contractor fabricates frames for knock down field assembly with hardware reinforcement plates welded in place. D. Talbots furnished metal materials are factory prime finished. 2.2 DOORS AND FRAMES FURNISHED BY SITE GENERAL CONTRACTOR A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. Amweld Building Products, Inc. 2. Benchmark Commercial Doors; a division of General Products Co., Inc. 3. Ceco Door Products; a United Dominion Company. 4. Copco Door Company. 5. Curries Company. 6. Republic Builders Products. 7. Steelcraft; a division of Ingersoll-Rand. B. Materials: 1. Exterior doors, frames,reinforcements and frame components shall be manufactured from hot-rolled steel sheets conforming to ASTM A569, with hot-dip zinc-coating conforming to ASTM A924 with light commercial coating weight not less than G-60. a. Form exterior door frames of galvanized steel (A40)per ASTM A653. 2. Hollow metal panels where indicated shall be made of the same materials and constructed and finished in the same way as specified for hollow metal doors. 3. The following are minimum gages for hollow and pressed metal items: ITEM GAGE Exterior Doors: 16 Exterior Door Frames: 16 C. Fabrication—Exterior Doors: 1. Doors shall be 1'/4"thick Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B, Model 1 (Full Flush)Hollow Steel Construction in accordance with ANSUSDI 250.8. 2. Steel door panels shall be fabricated from one sheet of hot rolled steel. Doors shall be flush with visible edge seams, and shall have vertical mechanical interlocking seams on hinge and lock edges. Doors shall be provided with 14-gage top and bottom inverted steel channels spotwelded within the door. a. Seal top channel joints watertight. 3. Core Construction: Provide one of the following core constructions; Contractor's option: a. Polyurethane core foamed in place or laminated, 20 psi strength, 1.8 pcf density, R=12; 1/2 inch maximum voids in any direction. Strength of bond between core and steel face sheet shall exceed strength of core so delamination will not occur during operating conditions. 1) Minimum insulation value of"R" 8 for polyurethane. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\08110NorthamptonMA.doc 08110-2 SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the General Conditions of the Contract, and Division 1 General Requirements. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Installation of Talbots supplied steel doors, frames, and integral wood casings, fire-rated and non fire-rated. B. G.C. provided exterior door and frame at Receiving Door. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel Door and Frame Standard: Comply with ANSI/SDI-250.8,unless more stringent requirements are indicated. B. Installed frame and door assembly to conform to UL l OB for fire rated class indicated or scheduled. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Accept inside delivery of Talbots furnished doors and frames. B. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4-inch high wood blocking. Avoid using non-vented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber. If door packaging becomes wet,remove cartons immediately. Provide minimum '/fl- inch spaces between stacked doors to permit air circulation. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DOORS AND FRAMES FURNISHED BY TALBOTS A. Doors and frames famished by Talbots are indicated on the Drawings under the"Door and Opening Schedule". Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\0811 ONorthamptonMA.doc 08110-1 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes to that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so that the installation with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. 3.6 SCHEDULE A. Exterior Joints: 1. Vertical joints bordered on both sides by porous building material such as concrete, natural stone or masonry: Sealant No. 1, 2, 6, or 8. 2. Vertical joints bordered on both sides by nonporous building materials such as painted metals, anodized aluminum, mill finish aluminum, PVC, glass, or porcelain tile: Sealant No. 6, 7, or 8. 3. Masonry expansion and control joints: Sealant No. 1, 2, 6, 7 or 8. 4. Cross joints in copings and projecting stone work: Sealant No. 1, 2 or 6. 5. Vertical joints wider than 1.25 inch: Sealant No. 1 or 6. 6. Horizontal joints in walks, decks, concrete floors and drives: Sealant No. 4 or 5. 7. Horizontal joints subject to heavy traffic or point loading such as high heel traffic: Sealant No. 5. 8. Other exterior joints: Sealant No. 2. 9. Horizontal joints continually submerged in water: Sealant No. 5. 10. Vertical concealed joints in metal curtainwall, lapped joints, and metal building panels: Sealant No. 12. 11. Joints in exterior insulation and finish system: Sealant No. 2 or 8. B. Interior Joints: 1. Expansion and control joints: Sealant No. 1, 2, 3, or 11. 2. Trim or finish joints subject to minimal movement: Sealant No. 10 or 11. 3. Sanitary applications between glazed tiles. Sealant No. 9. 4. Expansion joints in horizontal traffic surfaces: Sealant No. 4 or 5. 5. Joints in horizontal traffic surfaces subject to heavy traffic loads or point loading such as fork lift or high heel traffic: Sealant No. 5 or 13. 6. Sanitary sealant applications between glazed tiles requiring FDA rating: Sealant No. 14. 7. Concealed applications requiring acoustical seal: Sealant No. 15. 8. Vertical and horizontal joints requiring USDA approval: Sealant No. 9. 9. Foamed-in-place insulating air barrier sealant for air leakage control and insulation of gaps, cracks, cavities and joints in the building envelope: Sealant No. 16. ---END OF SECTION --- Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion JOINT SEALANTS 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\07900NorthamptonMA.doc 07900-6 J. Sealant Dimensions: 1. Size joints in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions. 2. Minimum joint dimensions: 1/4 inch wide by 1/4 inch deep, except in metal-to-metal curtain wall applications when recommended by sealant manufacturer. K. Do not apply sealant until joints comply with manufacturer's requirements. 3.2 APPLICATION A. Apply sealants in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install joint backing with a blunt instrument; prevent puncturing of surface skin. C. Apply sealant with caulking gun,using proper nozzles. D. Use sufficient pressure to completely fill joints and ensure full contact of sealant to joint sides. E. Joint Tooling: 1. After joints have been filled, tool to eliminate air pockets and voids. Dry tooling is preferred; tooling agents approved by sealant manufacturer may be used if necessary. Avoid contamination of open joints below. 2. Tooling of Nonsag sealants: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth uniform beads of configuration indicated to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by the sealant manufacture. a. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C1193,unless otherwise indicated. 3. Tool surface smooth,uniform and free of ridges, wrinkles, sags, air pockets and embedded impurities. 3.3 AIR BARRIER SEALANT A. Install air barrier sealant to supplement and provide continuity of the main or primary air barrier assembly, including but not limited to the bridging, sealing and/or filling of crevices, roof-wall connections, mechanical and electrical penetrations in walls, floors and roofs. B. Use one-component foam for cracks or openings `/4-inch to 2-inches wide. Use two- component foam sealant for gaps over 2-inches wide, and for voids in hidden cavities. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove sealant from adjacent surfaces immediately. B. Do not use cleaning agents harmful to sealant or adjacent finishes. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion JOINT SEALANTS 34 Bridge Street, Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSYN05132\specs\07900NorthamptonMA.doe 07900-5 E. Concrete expansion joint filler: Pre-formed,non-extruding, cellular neoprene sponge rubber expansion joint filler: ASTM D1752,Type 1. 2.3 COLORS A. Joints around doors, windows, and other openings: Match color of adjacent wall material. If adjacent materials are two different colors, verify color match with Architect. 2.4 APPLICATION GUIDE A. The following Use codes are taken from ASTM C920: 1. Use -T: Sealant designed for use in joints in pedestrian and vehicular traffic areas such as walkways,plazas, decks and parking garages. 2. Use -NT: Sealant designed for use in joints in nontraffic areas. 3. Use -M: Sealant designed for use on concrete and masonry. 4. Use -G: Sealant designed for use on Glass. 5. Use -A: Sealant designed for use on Aluminum and metal. 6. Use -O: Sealant designed for use on non-standard substrates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Prepare surfaces to receive sealants in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Perform preparation in accordance with ASTM C804 for solvent release and ASTM C790 for latex base sealants. C. Clean joints and surfaces to receive sealant of frost, dust, loose mortar, and other foreign materials. D. Clean ferrous metals of rust, mill scale and coatings by wire brush, grinding or sandblasting. E. Remove oil, grease and temporary protective coatings with cleaners approved by sealant manufacturer.Dry wipe immediately after cleaning with clean, dry cloth before solvent evaporates from surface. F. Abrade precast concrete,poured-in-place concrete, and masonry surfaces to remove form release agents and chemical retarders that could interfere with sealant adhesion and performance. G. Brush or blow joints clean. H. Allow surfaces to dry completely before applying primer or sealant. I. Apply primer when recommended by sealant manufacturer. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion JOINT SEALANTS 34 Bridge Street, Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\07900NorthamptonMA.doc 07900-4 L. Sealant No. 12: 1. Type: Single component, non-drying, non-skinning sealant; AAMA 809.1. 2. Product: BR-96 by Pecora. M. Sealant No. 13: 1. Type: Two component, Grade S/L, high solids epoxy resin sealant; ACI 302.1R-80. 2. Shore A hardness: 85 plus or minus 10. 3. Product: EP 800 by Pecora. N. Sealant No. 14: 1. Type: Single component, moisture curing silicone sealant; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, FDA approved. 2. Movement capability: 25 percent in extension and compression. 3. Product: 863 by Pecora, 786 by Dow Corning, Sanitary 1700 by GE. O. Sealant No. 15: 1. Type: Single component,non-drying,non-skinning, non-bleeding acoustical sealant. 2. Product: BA-98 by Pecora, Acoustical Sealant by USG, Acoustical Sealant by Tremco. 3. Keep from sight line as this sealant cannot be painted. P. Sealant No. 16 (Air Barrier Sealant) 1. Type: Single or two-component polyurethane foam. 2. Two-component: "Froth-Pak"by Flexible Products Co., (770) 828-2684,Zerodraft Foam Sealant by Zerodraft, (877)272-2626. 3. Single component: "Insta-Seal"by Flexible Products Co., (770) 828-2684,. Zerodraft ` Insulating Air Sealant by Zerodraft, (877)272-2626. 4. For interior applications only,must be shielded from ultraviolet radiation. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Non-staining type, to suit application. As recommended by sealant manufacturer for project substrates. B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type,recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. C. Joint Backing: 1. For sealants 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 and 13: Non-staining, open-cell polyurethane, close- cell polyethylene, or soft,reticulated polyethylene. 2. For sealants 4, 5 and 14: Closed cell polyethylene. 3. Rigid joint fillers may be used with sealants 4 and 5 if separated from sealant by specified joint backup or bondbreaker tape. 4. Combination type backup: When combination rod with open cell interior and continuous plastic skin is required, use Dual-Rod by HMC, Inc., or approved equal. 5. Size closed cell joint backing for joint width plus 25 percent. D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive polyethylene or other tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. Width equal to joint opening. Provide where back-up material is not necessary for depth control or where a type is used that does not have release properties. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion JOINT SEALANTS 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:NISSY\05132\specs\07900NorthamptonMA.doc 07900-3 C. Sealant No. 3: 1. Type: Single component, solvent curing acrylic sealant. 2. Movement capability: 7-1/2 percent in extension and compression. 3. Product: Unicrylic 60+by Pecora. D. Sealant No. 4: 1. Type: Multi component, chemically or moisture curing polyurethane sealant; ASTM C920,Type M, Grade P, Class 25,Use T,M, A, and O. 2. Movement capability: 25 percent in extension and compression. 3. Product: NR-200 by Pecora,NR-201 by Pecora,THC-900 by Tremco. E. Sealant No. 5: 1. Type: Multi component polyurethane sealant; ASTM C920,Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, Use T, M, A, and O. 2. Shore A hardness: Between 45 and 50. 3. Product: Dynatred 40+by Pecora,THC 900/901 by Tremco, Vulkem 45/245/227 by Mameco, Sikaflex 2c/SL by Sika. F. Sealant No. 6: 1. Type: Single component, low modulus,neutral moisture curing silicone sealant; ASTM C920,Type S, Grade NS, Class 25,Use NT, M, G and A. 2. Movement capability: 50 percent in extension and compression. 3. Product: 864 by Pecora, 790 by Dow Corning, Spectrum 1 by Tremco. G. Sealant No. 7: 1. Type: Single component, medium modulus,neutral moisture curing silicone sealant; ASTM C1184 and ASTM C920,Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT,M, G and A. 2. Movement capability: 50 percent in extension and compression. 3. Product: 895 by Pecora, 791 by Dow Corning. H. Sealant No. 8: 1. Type: Single component,ultra low modulus,neutral moisture curing silicone sealant; ASTM C920,Type S, Grade NS, Class 25,Use NT,M, G, O and A. 2. Movement capability: 100 percent in extension and 50 percent in compression. 3. Product: 890 by Pecora, 790 by Dow Corning. I. Sealant No. 9: 1. Type: Single component, neutral moisture curing silicone sealant; ASTM C920,Type S, Grade NS, Class 25,USDA approved, Use NT,M, G and A. 2. Product: 898 by Pecora, 786 by Dow Corning, Sanitary 1700 by G.E., Omniplus by Sonneborn. J. Sealant No. 10: 1. Type: High-grade butyl sealant; FS TT-S-001657. 2. Product: BC-158 by Pecora. K. Sealant No. 11: 1. Type: Single component acrylic latex sealant; ASTM C834. 2. Movement capability: 7-1/2 percent in extension and compression. 3. Product: AC-20 by Pecora, 834 by Tremco, Sonolac by Sonnebom. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion JOINT SEALANTS 34 Bridge Street, Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY105132\specs\07900NorthamptonMA.doc 07900-2 SECTION 07000 JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 General Requirements. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Joint sealant work including but not limited to the following: 1. Preparing sealant substrate surfaces. 2. Sealants,joint backings and accessories. 3. Air barrier sealant. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All sealants shall meet the requirements of ASTM C920 unless otherwise specified. B. Perform work in accordance with SWRI Guide Specifications and ASTM C1193. C. Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C919. 1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 JOINT SEALANT MATERIALS A. Sealant No. 1: 1. Type: Multi component urethane sealant; ASTM C920,Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, use NT, M, A, and O. 2. Movement capability: 50 percent in extension and compression. 3. Product: Dynatrol II by Pecora, Dymeric 511 by Tremco, Sonolastic NP2 by Sonneborn, Vulken 922 by Mameco, Sikaflex-2c by Sika. B. Sealant No. 2: 1. Type: Single component, moisture curing polyurethane sealant; ASTM C920,Type S, Grade NS, Class 25,Use NT,M, A, and O. 2. Movement capability: 25 percent in extension and compression. 3. Product: Dynatrol I by Pecora, Dymonic by Tremco, Sonolastic NP1 by Sonneborn, Vulkem 921 by Mameco, Sikaflex-la by Sika. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion JOINT SEALANTS 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\07900NorthamptonMA.doc 07900-1 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Examine firestopped areas to ensure proper installation prior to concealing or enclosing firestopped areas. B. Areas of work shall remain accessible until inspection and approval by the applicable code authorities. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean up spills of liquid components. B. Neatly cut and trim materials as required. END OF SECTION Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion FIRESTOPPING 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:WISSY\05132\specs\07270NorthamptonMA.doe 07270-6 F. Accessories: Install accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position necessary to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 1. After installing fill materials, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories that are not permanent components of firestop systems. G. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques. 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. H. Place firestopping in annular space around fire dampers before installation of damper's anchoring flanges. I. Install smoke-stopping as specified for firestopping. J. Unless protected from possible loading or traffic, install firestopping materials in floors having void openings of 4 inches or more to support the same floor load requirements. K. Tool material after application but before skin forms,to a smooth surface. 1. Clean excess fill materials adjacent to openings as installation progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur. L. Protect seals from disturbance for 48 hours. 3.3 WARNING LABEL A. Label each penetration with a minimum 3 inch by 5 inch self-adhesive label containing the following information: Warning—Firestop System DO NOT DISTURB Notify Building Management of Any Damage System No. Contractor: Manufacturer: Date Installed: UL System No. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion FIRESTOPPING 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\07270NorthamptonMA.doc 07270-5 E. All firestop materials used in exposed areas shall be paintable and finished with similar surface treatments as used on the surrounding wall or floor surface. F. All materials shall have a minimum 2-year shelf life and shall not be used when said materials expire applicable shelf life. G. Firestopping materials used to fulfill the requirements of this project without limiting the generality thereof shall include intumescent wrap strips, firestop mortars,putty,non- intumescent caulks and sealants, prefabricated firestop devices,mineral wool and all other materials used in tested assemblies. H. Primer: Type recommended by fire-stopping manufacturer for specific substrate surfaces. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Provide accessories required to install fill materials that comply with requirements of tested assemblies, are approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency that performed testing, and are specified by manufacturer of tested assemblies. B. Fill Void or Cavity Materials: As classified under category XHHW in UL Fire Resistance Directory. C. Forming Materials: As classified under category XHKU in UL Fire Resistance Directory. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces to be in contact with firestopping materials of dirt, grease, oil, loose materials, rust, or other substances that may affect proper fitting or the required fire resistance. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install firestopping materials as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Prime surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. C. Seal all holes or voids made by penetrations to ensure an effective smoke barrier. D. Priming: Prime substrates when recommended in writing by firestop system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not spill primers or allow them to migrate onto adjoining surfaces. E. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of firestopping with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove firestopping smears. Remove tape immediately after installation without disturbing firestopping seal. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion FIRESTOPPING 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\07270NorthamptonMA.doc 07270-4 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver in original unopened containers or packages bearing manufacturers'name,brand designation, and product description. B. Store materials under cover and protected from damage. C. Do not use damaged materials. 1.10 SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING A. Coordinate the work of this Section with work performed under other Sections of the Project Manual. B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate firestop systems. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable manufacturers and products listed in UL Fire Resistance Directory for UL System involved,that are manufactured by one of the following: 1. 3M Fire Protection Products. 2. Bio-Fire Shield, Inc. 3. Hevi-Duty Nelson of General Signal. 4. Hilti Construction Chemicals, Inc. 5. International Protective Coatings(IPC). 2.2 MATERIALS A. Fire-stopping material shall be asbestos-free and capable of maintaining an effective barrier against flame, smoke and gasses in compliance with the requirements of ASTM E814 and UL 1479. B. Rating of the firestops shall not be less than the rating of the time-rated floor or wall assembly. 1. On insulated pipe, the fire-rating classification must not require removal of the insulation. C. Materials shall be suitable for the firestopping of penetrations made by steel, glass, plastic, and insulated pipe. 1. All firestop materials used shall be suitable and compatible with the penetrating items including the surrounding materials. 2. Firestop material, which contains solvents that would attack plastics, is not to be used. D. Self-extinguishing damming materials shall be used, as specified by the manufacturer, as part of the designated firestop system. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion FIRESTOPPING 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\07270NorthamptonMA.doc 07270-3 D. Warranty: Submit written warranty covering both material and workmanship free from defects or failure for five (5)years from date of application. E. Certificates: Submit evidence that applicator has been approved as an applicator by the manufacturer of the system proposed for use on this project. 1.5 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions shall be in accordance with Section 01001. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials shall meet the requirements specified in ASTM E814 and UL 1479 and are so classified in UL's Building Materials Directory. B. Materials shall meet and be acceptable for applicable building code. C. Materials shall meet the requirements of NFPA 101 -LIFE Safety Code and NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.7 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. F-Ratings: Provide firestop systems with F-ratings equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated as determined per ASTM E814. B. T-Ratings: Provide firestop systems with T-ratings required, as well as F-ratings,determined per ASTM E814, where systems protect penetrating items with potential to contact adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Penetrations located outside wall cavities. 2. Penetrations located outside fire-resistive shaft enclosures. 3. Penetrations located in construction containing fire-protection-rated openings. 4. Penetrating items larger than 4-inch-diameter nominal pipe or 16 sq. in. overall cross- sectional area. C. For firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage,provide products that after curing do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions both during and after constriction. D. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view,provide products with flame-spread indices of less than 25 and smoke-developed indices of less than 450, when tested per ASTM E84. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install through-penetration firestop systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Ventilate through-penetration firestop systems per manufacturers written instructions by natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation. , Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion FIRESTOPPING 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\07270NorthamptonMA.doc 07270-2 SECTION 07270 Aook FIRESTOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 General Requirements. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes firestopping materials at openings and voids in, and at periphery of fire-rated construction. 1. Provide fire-stopping at all fire-rated penetrations of floors and walls throughout the project whether such penetrations are indicated on the drawings or not. 2. Carefully examine drawings and site conditions to determine quantities, locations, types and details of all fire-stopping work described in this section. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Firestopping: A materials, or combination of materials, to retain the integrity of Time-rated construction by maintaining an effective barrier against the spread of flame, smoke, and gasses used in specific locations as follows 1. Ducts, cables, conduits, and piping penetrations through fire rated floor slab construction and through fire rated partitions. 2. Openings between and at edges of floor slabs(i.e., expansion joints and joints at curtain walls). 3. Penetrations of vertical service shafts. 4. Other locations where specifically shown on the drawings or where specified. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01001. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for all materials and prefabricated devices, providing descriptions sufficient for identification at the job site. Include UL classification and manufacturer's instructions for installation. C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing through-penetrations which indicates the firestop system to be utilized for each different fire-stopping application, indicating construction of the wall or floor assembly; size, number and material of penetrating items; firestop system designation; required F-rating, T-rating and remarks where applicable. Include all of the individual materials required for each complete system, and manufacturer's product name and number for each material. 1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency that is applicable to each through-penetration firestop system configuration for construction and penetrating items. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion FIRESTOPPING 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\07270NorthamptonMA.doc 07270-1 B. Foil-faced glass fiber composition minimum 1 pound per cubic foot density, meeting ASTM C665,Type I11, Class B, Category I and the following: ,"k 1. Flame Spread/Smoke Rating: 75/150 or less, ASTM E84. 2. Water Vapor Permeance(ASTM E96): 0.05 Perms. 3. R value: 3.3 per inch of thickness, ASTM C518. 4. Size: Thickness and width as indicated on Drawings. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Insulation Hangers: Steel pins, length as required for insulation thickness, with perforated base plate for adhesive attachment to substrate. Furnish manufacturers standard adhesive and self locking washers. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, furnish adhesively attached spindle-type insulation hangers as manufactured by one of the following: a. Spindle type insulation hangers,by Gemco (800) 331-1164. Adhesive: Tuff and hanger Adhesive. b. Series T Tactoo Insul-Hangers,by AGM Industries (800) 225-9990. Adhesive: Tactoo Adhesive. C. Stic-Klip Type N Fasteners by Eckel Industries, Canada. Adhesive: Stic- Klip Type S. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION-GENERAL A. Install glass fiber batts and blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce either friction fit, or use adhesive,or use mechanical fasteners after mechanical and electrical services have been installed. 1. Where more than one length is required to fill cavity,provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. Stagger and butt joints. B. Install sound attenuating blankets above ceilings and in stud cavities where detailed or scheduled. Butt tightly. C. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Do not allow insulation to obstruct vents. D. Use mechanical anchorage where required to provide permanent placement and support. E. Protect installed insulation. 3.2 REMEDIAL WORK A. In addition to the new work specified herein, it is the intent of this section to include the replacement of existing building insulation scheduled to remain which is damaged or removed due to the alterations and removal of existing work under this Contract. Application and workmanship shall be equal to the quality of new work as specified herein as approved by the Architect. Use specific material types at respective areas affected to provide required ratings. ---END OF SECTION--- Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion INSULATION 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\07200NorthamptonMA.doc 07200-2 SECTION 07200 INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 General Requirements. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide insulation work, including but not limited to the following: 1. Fiberglass acoustical and thermal batt and blanket type insulation. 2. Installation accessories. 1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install insulation during inclement weather or when surfaces are moist. 1.4 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Do not begin work until substrate work is complete and work of other trades that will be concealed by work of this Section has been approved. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards. 2.2 THERMAL AND SOUND ATTENUATION BATTSBLANKETS A. Unfaced glass fiber composition minimum 1 pound per cubic foot density,meeting ASTM C665, Type I and the following: 1. Flame Spread/Smoke Rating: 25/50 maximum, ASTM E84. 2. Combustibility: Non-combustible, ASTM E136. 3. R value: 3.2 per inch of thickness, ASTM C518. 4. Size: Thickness and width as indicated on Drawings. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion INSULATION 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\07200NorthamptonMA.doc 07200-1 3.3 FIELD FINISHING ;0"*` A. Field finish in accordance with Section 09900. Reference finish designators on Drawings. B. Apply specified finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces where only sealer/prime coats were applied in shop. 3.4 FIELD TOUCH UP A. Fill and touch-up exposed job made nail or screw holes, refinish raw surfaces resulting from job fitting,repair job inflicted scratches and mars and final clean the finished surfaces. END OF SECTION Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion STANDING&RUNNING TRIM 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\06450NorthamptonMA.doe 06450-3 B. Adhesive: Type recommended by AWI QS to suite application. 2.3 FINISH Awok A. Finishes are factory applied by Talbots separate Contractor. 1. Clear finished items have shop applied transparent finish. 2. Opaque finished items have shop-applied primer. 2.4 FABRICATION A. All Talbots furnished items are fabricated to AWI QS "Custom" grade. B. Trims and moldings have a water-based ink unit identification number marked on the back in a concealed location. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Verify concealed blocking has been installed to coordinate with Work of this Section. B. Allow wood items to acclimate to area. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install trim and molding units in accordance with AWI QS Section 1700. B. Set and secure materials in place,plumb and level. C. Anchor trims and moldings to blocking built-in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation. Except where pre-finished matching fastener heads are required, use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish where transparent finish is indicated. D. Miter inside corners of molded trim. Exposed end returns shall be profiled or mitered. E. Joints shall be staggered on multi-member trims. F. Install trims with minimum number of joints possible,using full-length pieces to the greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 36 inches long, except where necessary. Fill gaps, if any, between top of trim and wall with wood filler, sand smooth, and finish same as wood trim. G. Install trim with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch variation from a straight line. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion STANDING&RUNNING TRIM 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\06450NorthamptonMA.doc 06450-2 SECTION 06450 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 General Requirements. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide carpentry Work, including but not limited to: 1. Installation of interior standing and running trims, moldings and molding backers. 1.3 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Accept inside delivery of Talbots furnished materials. B. Protect materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with AWI QS "Custom"grade. B. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed architectural woodwork similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concealed blocking,reinforcements,and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that standing and running trim woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MILLWORK MATERIALS A. All millwork trims and component materials are Talbots furnished. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Of size and type to suit application. 1. Use finishing nails for exposed work, unless otherwise indicated. Countersink nail heads and fill holes with wood filler Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion STANDING &RUNNING TRIM 34 Bridge Street, Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\06450NorthamptonMA.doc 06450-1 D. Installation of Panels Directly Anchored to Walls: Anchor wall panels and trims to blocking poftl` built-in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation. Except where pre-finished matching fastener heads are required, use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish where transparent finish is indicated. E. Installation of Panels Anchored by Clips: Anchor paneling to supporting substrate with concealed panel-hanger clips. Do not use face fastening, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Install flush paneling with no more than 1/16 inch in 96-inch vertical cup or bow and 1/8 inch in 96-inch horizontal variation from a true plane. 3.3 MAPLE MERCHANDISE WALLS A. Install metal wall standards at exactly 24" O.C. B. Set panels at elevation numbers designated on packing materials. C. Sequence panel installation in accordance with sequence numbers written on back. D. Install transom panels and hardwood trims. 3.4 FIELD FINISHING A. Field finishing shall be in accordance with Section 09900 or 09950. Reference finish designators on Drawings. B. Apply specified finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces where only sealer/prime coats were applied in shop. 3.5 FIELD TOUCH UP A. Fill and touch-up exposed job made nail or screw holes with matching filler,refinish raw surfaces resulting from job fitting,repair job inflicted scratches and mars and final clean the finished surfaces. END OF SECTION Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion PANEL WORK 34 Bridge Street, Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\06420NorthamptonMA.doe 06420-3 2.2 WALL STANDARDS a A. Surface mounted wall standards: Talbots furnished. 1. Crown metal Co. #SP2741, 2 inch slots, 1 inch o.c.,keycatch wall standards system. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: 1. Of size and type to suit application. 2. Use finishing nails for exposed woodwork, unless otherwise indicated. Countersink nail heads and fill holes with wood filler B. Adhesive: Type recommended by AWI QS to suite application. 2.4 FINISH A. Finishes are factory applied by Talbots separate Contractor. 1. Clear finished items have shop applied transparent finish. 2. Opaque finished items or surfaces designated to receive wallcovering have shop- applied primer. 2.5 FABRICATION A. All Talbots furnished panel and trim items are fabricated to AWI QS "Custom"grade. B. Panels and trims have a water-based ink unit identification number marked on the back in a concealed location. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Verify concealed blocking has been installed to coordinate with Work of this Section. B. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION GENERAL A. Install wall panel and trim units in accordance with AWI QS Section 1700. B. Install woodwork level,plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces and repair damaged finish at cuts. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion PANEL WORK 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\06420NorthamptonMA.doc 06420-2 SECTION 06420 .tea PANEL WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 General Requirements. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide carpentry Work, including but not limited to: 1. Installation of interior wall panels with pre-finished maple face. 2. Installation of wall standards for panelwork. 3. Installation of panelwork trims. 1.3 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Accept inside delivery of Talbots furnished materials. B. Protect materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed architectural woodwork similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Perform Work in accordance with AWI QS "Custom"grade. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing,blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior wall panel woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 WALL PANELS AND TRIM MATERIALS A. All wall panels and trim materials are Talbots furnished. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion PANEL WORK 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\06420NorthamptonMA.doe 06420-1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install Cashwrap unit in accordance with AWI QS Section 1700. B. Install all adjustable shelves and shelf clips or pins in unit. C. Assemble components and install over locator blocking to insure a secure installation in accordance with installation instructions. D. Verify the correct operation of all electrical equipment and lighting. E. Provide final 110 volt AC electrical connection from the Cashwrap to the junction box. 3.2 CASHWRAP RESPONSIBILITY SCHEDULE RESPONSIBILITY TALBOTS TALBOTS TALBOTS TALBOTS SCHEDULE GENERAL CASEWORK - P O:S. 1 TELEPHONE CONTRACTOR CONTRACTOR CONTRACTOR CONTRACTOR (THE WORK) Supply complete X casework, inside delivery Install casework X Distribution conduit for telephone, P.O.S. X and electricity from anelboards to point of Cashwrap installation Casework integral conduit and work boxes `X for telephone, P.O.S. and electrical Casework integral electrical wiring and X devices Electrical wiring and devices from panelboard X to point of Cashwrap installation Telephone wiring and X devices P.O.S. wiring and X devices END OF SECTION Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion CASHWRAP STATION 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\06411NorthamptonMA.doc 06411-2 SECTION 06411 CASHWRAP STATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 General Requirements. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide carpentry and electrical Work, including but not limited to: 1. Installation of Cashwrap Station. 2. Final 110 volt AC electrical hook-up. B. Resurface existing backwrap indicated to remain in accordance with Section 06200. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Talbots will provide assembly instructions. 1.4 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Accept inside delivery. B. Do not use Cashwrap as a scaffold. C. Protect materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources.Store inside and in a dry location. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. All Cashwrap component materials are Talbots furnished. B. Glazing, hardware, electrical devices, electrical wiring and distribution conduit integral to the units are pre-installed by Talbots separate contractor. C. All finishes are factory applied by Talbots separate Contractor. D. Cashwrap units are fabricated to AWI QS "Custom" grade. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion CASHWRAP STATION 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\06411NorthamptonMA.doc 06411-1 E. Seal between woodwork and wall, floor, and/or ceiling imperfections. F. Install electrical components in accordance with Section 16000. 1. Provide electrical connection to approximate area of final connection. 2. Provide final electrical connection from the fixture to the junction box.. G. Set and secure materials and components in place,plumb and level. H. Adjust and clean the Work as directed by the Construction Project Manager I. Protect installed Work from damage of all types. J. Install glazing in accordance with the requirements of Section 08800. K. Install all Talbots furnished fluorescent light fixtures mounted interior or exterior on casework unless otherwise noted. 3.2 COUNTERTOPS A. Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks,wood wall cleats or aluminum wall angles or other supports into underside of countertop. B. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag,bow or other variation from a straight line. C. Secure backsplashes (if any) to walls with adhesive. Seal space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in 07900. 3.3 FIELD TOUCH UP A. Fill and touch-up exposed job made nail or screw holes,refinish raw surfaces resulting from job fitting, repair job inflicted scratches and mars and final clean the finished surfaces. ---END OF SECTION--- Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion CUSTOM CASEWORK 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\06410NorthamptonMA.doc 06410-3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. All materials are Talbots furnished unless otherwise noted. 1. Hardware, electrical devices, etc. integral to the units are pre-installed by Talbots separate contractor. 2. Casework light fixtures are Talbots furnished unless otherwise noted. B. G.C.provided materials: 1. Mirror glazing as specified in Section 08800. 2. Fasteners: type and size as required by conditions. 2.2 FABRICATION A. All Talbots furnished items are fabricated to AWI QS, "Custom" grade by Talbots separate Contractor. B. All hardware attachment locations are pre-drilled. 2.3 FINISH A. All field paint finished units are shop primed. Field finishing shall be in accordance with Section 09900. B. All laminate finished units are factory finished. C. Transparent finished units are shop finished unless noted otherwise. 2.4 CASEWORK LUMINAIRES A. Specific casework components have lighting fixtures integrally installed by the Talbots separate casework manufacturer. All other lighting fixtures are installed in the field by the G.C. Refer to drawings for details. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Follow Talbots installation instruction narrative. B. Install casework items in accordance with AWI QS Section 1700. C. Fasten woodwork to anchor or blocking built-in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation. Except where pre-finished matching fastener heads are required, use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish where transparent finish is indicated. D. Install all adjustable shelves, standards and brackets, and shelf clips or pins in cabinets. "* Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion CUSTOM CASEWORK 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\064IONorthamptonMA.doc 06410-2 SECTION 06410 CUSTOM CASEWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 General Requirements. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide carpentry work, including but not limited to the following: 1. Installation of Talbots furnished prefabricated casework including counters, (other than cashwraps) framed mirrors, desks, cabinets, display shelving, stock room wall mounted shelving,built-in and free standing merchandise bay units. 2. Installation of Talbots furnished light fixtures as shown. Final electrical hook-up for all illuminated casework components 3. Glazing and mirrors for prefabricated casework as shown on Drawings. 4. Installation accessories. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Assembly instructions provided by Talbots. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept inside delivery of Talbots furnished items. B. Protect materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. C. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed architectural woodwork similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Perform all installation Work in accordance with AWI QS, "Custom" grade. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of concealed blocking and reinforcement in partitions for support of built in casework units. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion CUSTOM CASEWORK 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\0641 ONorthamptonMA.doc 06410-1 B. Set metal thresholds for exterior in full bed of sealant(either butyl rubber or polyisobutylene mastic)complying with requirements specified in Section 07900 "Joint Sealants." 1. Completely fill concealed voids and exclude moisture from every source. 2. Do not plug drainage holes or block weeps. Remove excess sealant. 3. Fasten in place with flat-headed countersunk corrosion resistant screws into expansion plugs installed in holes drilled in the concrete slab 3.4 TEMPORARY CLOSURES A. Provide temporary protection such as wood doors,bucks, wood railings,protection on stairs, at floor and roof openings, and maintain in good condition throughout the life of Contract. 1. Protection must be in accordance with OSHA requirements. 2. Protect finish doors, frames, sills, saddles, and other finish items requiring protection. 3. Remove temporary protection when directed. B. Entrances: Provide temporary weather and watertight plywood or wood batten doors complete with necessary plank frames and equipped with suitable hinges, hasps and padlocks with keys for exterior doors and other openings into the buildings which are accessible from the ground and are not otherwise closed. 1. Maintain same in operating condition and remove from the premises when permanent closures are installed. C. Building Enclosure: Provide, erect and maintain in safe condition, temporary watertight enclosures required to maintain the proper building security and temperatures during construction. 3.5 FIELD TOUCH UP -PREFINISHED COMPONENTS A. Fill and touch-up of exposed job made nail or screw holes,refinish raw surfaces resulting from job fitting,repair job inflicted scratches and mars and final clean the finished surfaces. B. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. 3.6 REMEDIAL WORK A. In addition to the new work specified herein, it is the intent of this section to include the replacement of existing building carpentry work scheduled to remain that is damaged or removed due to the alterations and removal of existing work under this Contract. Application and workmanship shall be equal to the quality of new work as specified herein as approved by the Architect. Use specific material types at respective areas affected to provide required ratings. --- END OF SECTION --- Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion CARPENTRY 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\06200NorthamptonMA.doe 06200-7 J. Unless otherwise noted, all strapping for gypsum board on walls shall be metal. Strapping shall be shimmed out plumb and straight and fastened not over 16 inches apart. Cross- strapping shall be provided at the bottom, top, and at joints in the sheets. K. Install plywood backings for surface mounted electric,telephone and security panel boards, meter mounts,protection cabinets,motor control panels. 1. Boards shall be rigidly built and securely fastened to furred strapping at walls in approved manner. 2. See Electrical Drawings for locations and number required. 3. Oversize panel by 12 inches on all sides. L. Prepare all woodwork installed hereunder and designated to be finish painted,by cleaning and preparing as required to receive finishes specified in Section 09900 -PAINTING. 3.2 INSTALLATION—FINISH CARPENTRY A. Install the work plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required using concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet for plumb and level (including countertops); and with 1/16 inch maximum offset in flush adjoining surface, 1/8 inch maximum Dffsets in revealed adjoining surfaces. B. Work shall be in accordance with AWI QS, Section 1700. C. Scribe and cut work to fit adjoining work,refinish cut surfaces and repair damaged finish at cuts. D. Anchor woodwork to anchor or blocking built-in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation. Except where pre-finished matching fastener heads are required, use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish where transparent finish is indicated. E. Countertops: Anchor securely to base units and other support systems as indicated. F. Casework: Install without distortion so that doors and drawers will fit openings properly and be accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete the installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. G. Miter inside and outside corners. Scarf joints. H. Install continuous pieces in longest possible lengths. I. Carefully scribe work that is against other building materials, leaving gaps of 1/16 inch maximum. 3.3 HARDWARE A. Install finish hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion CARPENTRY 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\06200NorthamptonMA.doc 06200-6 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION—ROUGH CARPENTRY A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring,nailers,blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Blocking: 1. Set all blocking for storefront construction, and do necessary cutting and blocking for support of ducts,pipes, electrical boxes, conduits,miscellaneous metal items, etc. for the various subcontractors. 2. Provide concealed solid wood blocking for all wall supported mounted items, including but not limited to: a. Casework and shelving. b. Fitting rooms. C. Fire extinguisher Cabinet. d. Crown molding. e. Toilet Accessories f. Any other mounted accessories requiring support. C. Securely anchor work to substrates and structure and insure that work is capable of supporting applied work and loadings. 1. Use finishing nails for exposed work, unless otherwise indicated. Countersink nail heads and fill holes with wood filler 2. Countersink fasteners as necessary to accommodate other work. D. Grounds and nailing strips shall be furnished, installed and removed when required for heating,plumbing, and for other subcontractors where grounds and nailing strips are required. 1. Set proper grounds for attaching trim and other finish work. 2. Grounds shall be securely fastened,neatly installed,plumbed and leveled throughout. 3. Correct location of grounds and nailing strips required for the respective subcontractors shall be obtained from the subcontractor of the trade affected. E. Furnish, erect and maintain all temporary stairs,ramps, guards, enclosures,all necessary hoisting poles and devices. Provide temporary protection to safeguard life, limb and property. Install temporary frames in exterior openings. F. Install plywood in the largest possible size in both directions, having square cut ends and rigidly secured in place without buckle, warp or deformations. G. Do not rip or mill fire retardant treated(FRTW) lumber. Only end cuts, drilling holes and joining cuts are permitted. H. Do not use scarf joints, finger joints or splice plates without approval. I. Set all miscellaneous metals that are required in connection with carpentry work. Apply all necessary rough hardware including nails, bolts, screws or similar fittings required to execute the work as shown and specified. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion CARPENTRY 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\06200NorthamptonMA.doc 06200-5 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: 1. Exterior fasteners: Appropriate material in sufficient length to penetrate minimum of 1-1/2 inches into substrate, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer. 2. Interior fasteners: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type, size, material and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed where possible. 3. Anchors: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry. Expansion shield and lag bolt type for anchorage to solid masonry or concrete. B. Rough hardware shall include all nails,bolts, screws, clip angles,plates,miscellaneous fasteners, etc., as required. C. Finish hardware furnished by Owner. 2.5 FABRICATION-GENERAL A. Fabricate finish carpentry items in accordance with AWI QS, "Custom"Grade. B. Used exposed fastening devices or nails only when unavoidable. 2.6 FITTING ROOM DOOR REPLACEMENT A. New fitting room stall doors and hardware furnished by Talbots. B. Fitting Room Doors/jambs: 1. Mount new hardware units at heights indicated on the drawing. 2. Align and fit new doors in frames with uniform clearances. Do not trim stiles and rails unless authorized by Talbots. 3. Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement. Rehang doors that do not swing or operate freely. 2.7 FIRE RETARDANT TREATED WOOD (FRTW) A. All concealed interior lumber and plywood for all uses, throughout shall be fire retardant treated by chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread/smoke development rating of 25 or less. Do not use fire-retardant treatment containing ammonium phosphates. 1. Lumber shall be treated in accordance with AWPA C20, Interior Type A. 2. Plywood shall be treated in accordance with AWPA C27, Interior Type B. B. Treatment products and manufacturers: 1. Interior and weather shielded applications (above ground): a. Dricon by Arch Wood Protection, Inc., (770) 801-6600. b. Pyro-Guard by Hoover Treated Wood Products Inc. (800) 832-9663. C. FirePRO by Osmose, Inc. (800) 241-0240. 2. Exterior applications: a. "FRX"by Arch Wood Protection, Inc., (770) 801-6600. b. Exterior Fire-X by Hoover Treated Wood Products Inc. (800) 832-9663. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion CARPENTRY 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\06200NorthamptonMA.doc 06200-4 2. Plywood used for storefront or interior barricade: a. Classification: B-C, Group 2, Exterior-APA 000 PSI-95. b. Exterior utility panel,thickness as shown on drawings. 3. Plywood Sheathing for EIFS Substrate (backing for signs): APA Exterior Grade or Exposure 1 made with waterproof glue and a minimum CDX grade veneer and complying with Product Standard PS-2. 4. Plywood used for sheathing subfloor at window platforms,platform above office and paneled wall underlayment plywood: a. APA rated C-D plugged, Exposure 1, Group 2,Interior Plywood, sanded face. b. Thickness as shown on drawings. 5. Floor Underlayment: APA rated Underlayment C-C plugged Group 2 Exterior Plywood, Sanded Face. Thickness as shown on drawings. 6. MDO Plywood for light cove: APA rated exterior grade plywood(BB, Group 1)with one face of Medium Density Overlay as described in Product Standard PS-1. a. Thickness as shown on drawings. B. Pegboard: 1. "Service Tempered HBD"meeting the requirements of ANSI/AHA A135.4 2. Perforated with '/4 inch holes 1 inch on center each way. 3. Size 48 inch X 96 inch X /4 inch unless otherwise noted on drawirgs. 4. Hardboard shall have a flame spread rating of class C (III). C. Tack Panel (Located at Receiving Desk and Lunch Counter): 1. "440 Homasote Panel"high density fiberboard as manufactured by Homasote Co. (800)257-9491. ,! 2. 5/8 inch thick by size as shown on drawings. 3. Panel shall have a flame spread rating of Class C (11I). D. Plastic Laminate Overlay for backwrap (provided by G.C.) 1. Plastic Laminate Material PL-28 Manufacturer: Wilsonart,Temple,TX Product: Plastic Laminate Mfg. Series: Evolv Color Name: Silicone-EV Product Number: 4811-60 Grade: General Purpose(HGS) 2. Adhesive: Contact-flexible or P.V.A-semi-rigid adhesive. Use adhesive manufacturer's recommendation. 3. Comply with AWI Quality Standards, Guide Specifications and Quality Certification Program guidelines. Apply plastic laminate finish in frill uninterrupted sheets. 2.3 ADHESIVE A. Type recommended by AWI QS to suit application. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion CARPENTRY 34 Bridge Street, Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\06200NorthamptonMA.doe 06200-3 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store lumber and sheet material under cover, clear of the ground and with good ventilation. Support on regularly spaced level bearers on a dry firm base. Open pile to ensure free movement of air through the stack. B. Store finish carpentry materials and completed woodwork only in a dry ventilated place, protected from the weather and complying with temperature and humidity conditions specified by Standards and as required for installation areas. C. Protect sanded and finished surfaces from soiling and damage during handling and installation. Protect edges and corners of sheet materials from damage. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work with all other trades (Electrical, Mechanical, Plumbing, etc.)and do all cutting and patching required to accommodate their work. Protect all adjacent work. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMBER MATERIALS A. Lumber Framing: Sound stock,new, straight and thoroughly seasoned lumber of consistent size, free from stains,mildew,bows, twists, crooks and waves that cannot be corrected in process of bridging or nailing. All stock shall be surfaced-four-sides, Construction Grade or No. 2 Grade lumber complying with PS 20. Fire-Retardant Treated Wood(FRTW) and maximum moisture content of 19 percent. 1. Non-Load Bearing Framing: Construction grade or No. 2 Douglas Fir or Southern Pine kiln dried, appearance grade where exposed. B. Wood for Nailers, Blocking,Furring and Sleepers: 1. In general, all nailing strips, furring and strapping shall be nominal 1 inch x 3 inch in 8 feet and 12 feet length to minimize jointing. 2. Blocking shall be nominal 2 inch x 3 inch and larger stock, cut to profiles and slopes required for field conditions. 3. All concealed wall blocking shall be fire-retardant treated(FRTW). C. Exposed Lumber 1. Solid hardwoods for transparent finish for general interior use shall be Select White, Hard Maple,plain sawn, AWI Lumber Grade 1. 2. Solid hardwood for opaque finish for general interior use shall be plain sawn Yellow Poplar species, AWI Lumber Grade II. 2.2 SHEET MATERIALS A. Plywood, APA Rated for Use and Exposure: 1. Plywood for telephone, utility and electrical equipment backing panels: a. Classification: B-D, Group 2, Exposure 1-APA 000 PS 1-95. b. Plugged, square edges, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, 3/4 inch thick. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion CARPENTRY 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\06200NorthamptonMA.doc 06200-2 SECTION 06200 CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 General Requirements. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide rough and finish carpentry work, including but not limited to the following: 1. Backing panels for utilities. 2. Wood framing,nailers, concealed blocking, stops, furring, and sleepers. 3. Cutting and patching wood for all subcontractors 4. Fire-retardant treatment of wood. 5. Rework Fitting Room stall door jambs to accept new doors and hardware. Provide CPM with accurate dimensions of existing door openings as indicated on the drawings. 6. Resurfacing Backwrap countertop. 7. Temporary Work: building enclosures, barricades, bracing, centering, shoring, frames,necessary supports; protection of openings in floors,walls,roof, stairs, ramps,rails,guards athd closures. 8. All other usual items of normal rough carpentry including rough hardware, inserts, related metal components, etc., for work of this Section. 9. Installation of Talbots Furnished Items including door finish hardware. 10. Finish carpentry items,other than shop prefabricated casework; and Talbots Furnished Items. 11. Exterior shake shingles to match existing. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All finish carpentry shall comply with all "Custom Grade" specifications contained within the latest edition of the "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Guide Specifications and Quality Certification Program",of the AWI. B. Rough Carpentry Lumber: Visible grade stamp, of agency certified by National Forest Products Association(NFPA). C. Quality Mark: All treated lumber and plywood shall bear a label or imprint attesting that treatment and re-drying is in conformance with specified AWPA standards. Fire retardant treated wood shall have been tested in accordance with ASTM E84 with a flamespread index of 25 or less and show no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is continued for an additional 20-minute period. All FRTW wood shall contain an additional identification mark showing the flamespread classification. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion CARPENTRY 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\06200NorthamptonMA.doc 06200-1 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Install structural metal framing level,plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows: 1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 3.4 FIELD TOUCH-UP A. Prepare and repair damaged and abraded galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed structural metal framing with galvanized repair paint. ---END OF SECTION --- Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\05400NorthamptonMA.doc 05400-5 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to installation, inspect work of all other trades. Verify that all such work is complete and accurate to the point where this installation may properly commence. B. Verify that rough-in utilities are in proper location. 3.2 ERECTION OF FRAMING A. Provide all erection equipment,bracing,planking, field bolts,nuts, washers, drift pins, and similar materials that do not form a part of the completed construction but are necessary for its proper erection. B. Erect and anchor all structural metal framing in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C1007 and reference standards. All work shall be accurately set to established lines and elevations and rigidly fastened in place with suitable attachments to the construction of the building. All framing shall be spaced as indicated or referred to on the drawings. C. Connections: 1. All connections shall be welded and/or screw attached except that runner tracks shall be fastened to concrete with approved power-driven fasteners. 2. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. D. Holes provided in studs shall be aligned for proper passage of plumbing and electrical lines. Where studs are lighter than 16-gage,provide and install grommets, Hewco or equal, at such locations. E. Corner conditions,jambs of openings, and intersecting partitions shall be constructed so as to provide stability and adequate flange exposure to receive drywall, interior metal studding, and the like. 1. Construct corners using minimum three studs. Double stud wall openings, door jambs unless otherwise shown on the drawings. F. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing, do not torch cut. G. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with structural metal framing. Independently frame both sides of joints. H. Erect load bearing studs one piece full length. Splicing of studs is not permitted. 1. Brace, and reinforce to develop full strength, to achieve design requirements. I. Axial loaded studs shall be fully seated in the receiving tracks (maximum 1/16-inch gap between stud and track web). J. Coordinate placement of insulation in multiple stud spaces after erection. K. Install intermediate studs above and below openings to align with wall stud spacing. L. Install framing between studs for attachment of mechanical and electrical items, and to prevent stud rotation. look Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 34 Bridge Street, Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\05400NorthamptonMA.doc 05400-4 D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: "ZRC" zinc paint as manufactured by ZRC Chemical Products Company, or equal approved by the Architect. 2.4 FASTENERS A. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load. B. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain,without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load. 1. Power Actuated Fasteners used to connect track members to concrete shall have a minimum shank diameter of 0.145-inch. Embedment to be determined by conditions. Minimum of 2 per stud location. 2. Power Actuated Fasteners used to connect structural metal framing members to structural steel shall have a knurled shank with a minimum diameter of 0.145-inch. The fastener point must penetrate through steel to be acceptable. Minimum of 2 per stud location. 3. Power Actuated Fasteners in concrete or steel shall not be loaded in tension. C. Mechanical Fasteners: 1. Corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-threading steel drill screws, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A123, 1-1/4-ounces per square foot of size, type and quantity as specified by the structural engineer of the structural metal framing connections. Screws shall not be loaded in tension. Provide connection geometry to avoid tension in screws. The acceptable loading condition for screws is when the screw is loaded in shear. 2. Bolts,nuts and washers shall be non-corrosive of size, type and quantity recommended by the manufacturer required for connecting members, supporting substrates and the like.Provide expansion masonry anchor types to suit conditions. D. Welding: In conformance with AWS DL1 and AWS D1.3. 1. Welding is permitted on 18 gage or heavier material only. 2. Welding shall be the appropriate method of connecting structural metal framing members/clip angles to structural steel. Connections that are in tension shall be welded. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate assemblies of formed sections of sizes and profiles required in conformance to the AISI and AWS Standards"Structural Welding Code D1.1 and D1.3", and Codes listed above. B. Fit,reinforce, and brace framing members to suit design requirements. C. Connections shall be capable of supporting the maximum uniform load of the member for the span shown and the material specified. 1. All connections shall be designed to provide maximum strength to meet project design criteria. D. Details of all joints, techniques of welding employed, appearance and quality of welds made, and methods used to correct defective work shall conform to requirements of the AISI and AWS Codes. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\05400NorthamptonMA.doc 05400-3 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering structural metal framing that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to, the following: 1. Clark Steel Framing Industries. 2. Consolidated Systems, Inc. 3. Dietrich Industries, Inc. 4. MarinoWare; Div. Of Ware Industries, Inc. 5. Unimast, Inc. 2.2 FRAMING MATERIALS A. All framing members shall be roll formed from new sheet steel; (cold reduction steels not being acceptable), formed to profiles, shapes, gage and nominal sizes required to resist loading and designed in accordance with referenced standards and codes. B. Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, unpunched,with straight flanges, complying with ASTM C955, manufacturer's standard flange width, and minimum uncoated- steel thickness matching steel studs. C. All studs,joists and accessories, 16-gage or heavier, shall be formed from galvanized structural steel that conforms to the requirement of ASTM A653, G60, and have 50 ksi minimum yield strength. D. All studs,joists and accessories, 18-gage and lighter shall be formed from galvanized steel "' that conforms to the requirements of ASTM A653, G60, and have 33 ksi minimum yield strength. E. All galvanized studs,joists and accessories shall have a minimum G-60 coating in conformance with ASTM C955. F. All framing members shall be nominal 4-inch, 6-inch, 8-inch, and 10-inch at respective areas indicated on the drawings, with 2-inch minimum flange. G. Tracks shall conform to stud sizes and shall have a minimum of 1-5/16" flange. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Steel-framing accessories and miscellaneous members shall be formed sheet steel,thickness and gage determined by conditions and referenced standards. Shapes shall be manufacturer's standard, same finish as framing members. B. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A36/A zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A123. C. Include all bridging, bracing, plates, gussets, subgirt hat channels, vertical slide clips, kickers, diagonal tension strapping, angles and the like to complete the erection in accordance with project and code requirements. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\05400NorthamptonMA.doc 05400-2 SECTION 05400 '' STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING(SMF) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the General Conditions of the Contract, and Division 1 General Requirements. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Load bearing formed steel stud framing including but not limited to the following: 1. Interior wall and platform floor joist framing. B. This Section does not include interior non-load bearing drywall framing as specified in Section 09260. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Form, fabricate, install, and connect components in accordance with ML/SFA 540. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to applicable AWS Code. 1.4 SYSTEM DESIGN A. Architects drawings are diagrammatic and do not purport to identify nor solve issues of thermal or structural movement, weight loadings, stresses, member sizes, connections and anchorage. Requirements shown by details are intended to establish basic dimension of structures and profiles of members. B. Wall System Design: 1. Design to AISI-Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store work under this section in a manner to prevent wracking or stress of components, and to prevent mechanical damage. 1.6 SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING A. Coordinate requirements and materials with other trades and be responsible for compatibility of all parts and pieces relating to the work of this section with components of other related work. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\05400NorthamptonMA.doc 05400-1 B. Metal deck shall be anchored to supporting members by mechanical fasteners. Locate fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's instructions. AOM --- END OF SECTION --- AOWA. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion STEEL DECKING-STORAGE PLATFORM 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\05310NorthamptonMA.doc 05310-2 SECTION 05310 look STEEL DECKING-STORAGE PLATFORM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 General Requirements. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Steel floor deck and accessories for platform over Toilet and File Room. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel decking shall be fabricated from steel conforming to Section A3 of the AISI(American Iron and Steel Institute Specifications for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL DECK w A. Decks shall be ribbed "Type E Deck", sheet steel: ASTM A446, Grade B Structural Quality, non-composite type. 1. Thickness: 26 gage minimum. 2. Height of rib: 1-inch. 3. Deck shall have a coat of manufacturers standard shop primer paint. B. Vulcraft: Type No. LOE22,ribbed metal deck. C. United Steel Deck: Type No. UF1X. 2.2 MECHANICAL FASTENERS A. Manufacturers standard, corrosion-resistant, low-velocity,power actuated or pneumatically driven carbon steel fasteners, or self-drilling, self-threading screws. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Place deck panels on supporting framing and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting framing before being permanently fastened. Fasten to framing without warp or deflection. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion STEEL DECKING-STORAGE PLATFORM 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:AMISSY\05132\specs\05310NorthamptonMA.doc 05310-1 C. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. END OF SECTION Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\02050NorthamptonMA.doc 02050-6 B. Non-Structural Floor slab trenching: Size trench as required to properly accommodate electrical conduits and/or plumbing piping. 3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. General:Employ skilled workmen to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction activities and the subsequent fitting and patching required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut existing construction using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. 1. In general, where cutting, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding,not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. 2. To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine, such as a Carborundum saw or a diamond-core drill. C. Patching: Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances. 1. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. 2. Patch existing fire-rated demising walls to maintain required fire resistance. D. Floor slab patching: 1. Mix new concrete of same materials to provide concrete of same type or class as original slab concrete. 2. Use bonding agent on existing concrete surfaces that will be joined with fresh concrete. 3. Clean area with steel brush and apply bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.7 REPAIRS A. General: Promptly repair damage to adjacent construction caused by demolition operations. B. Where repairs to existing surfaces are required,patch to produce surfaces suitable for new materials. C. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining construction in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing. 3.8 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent construction of dust, dirt, and debris caused by demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before demolition operations began. B. Comply with requirements in NFPA for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 34 Bridge Street, Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\02050NorthamptonMA.doc 02050-5 2. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Owner and to authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Provide at least 72 hours'notice to Owner if shutdown of service is required during changeover. C. Temporary Protection: Erect temporary protection as indicated. 1. Erect and maintain temporary partitions to prevent spread of dust, odors, and noise to permit continued Owner or Mall occupancy. 2. In active sales,back room and storage areas where demolition work is being performed,protect merchandise and fixtures with barricades or drop cloths. Any dirt, dust or mess made from the demolition shall be cleaned prior to leaving the site for the day. Contractor shall provide their own cleaning materials, ie: vacuum, cleaning fluids, etc. 3. Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances to remain. 4. Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 5. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around demolition area and to and from occupied portions of adjacent buildings and structures. 6. Protect walls, windows,roofs, and other adjacent exterior construction that are to remain and that are exposed to demolition operations. 3.3 DEMOLITION A. Demolish in an orderly and careful manner. Protect existing improvements and supporting structural members. B. Remove demolished materials from site as work progresses, except where specifically noted otherwise. 1. Do not burn or bury materials on site. 2. Upon completion of Work, leave areas in clean condition. C. Remove temporary Work. D. Any components scheduled for reuse, shall be removed(in situations where applicable)with the utmost care to insure that they can be reused as specified. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to insure that the items scheduled for reuse are stored safely and securely. Failure on the Contractor's part to secure such items shall not result in any cost increase to Owner. 3.4 UTILITY SERVICES A. Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Where utility services are required to be removed,relocated, or abandoned,provide temporary bypass connections to maintain continuity of service to other parts of the building before proceeding with selective demolition. 3.5 FLOOR SLAB MODIFICATIONS A. Inspect the existing slab conditions to determine the amount of concrete floor slab to be removed and replaced for installation of plumbing, electrical and mechanical work. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\02050NorthamptonMA.doe 02050-4 1.8 INTENT A. No attempt is made in this section to list the entire scope of required demolition and removal operations or to describe each element to be removed. Coordinate with all related trades for disconnecting services, and to determine the scope and nature of the existing materials, equipment and finishes required for removal, based on a complete and thorough examination of the site, drawings and reference. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Cutting and Patching Material: Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces,use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible if identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used. Use materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass that of existing materials. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary safeguards, including warning signs and lights, barricades, and similar measures, for protection of the public, Owner, Contractor's employees, and existing improvements to remain. B. Install Owner furnished merchandising shelf standards where indicated. C. Erect and maintain weatherproof closures for exterior openings. D. Prevent movement of structure;provide temporary bracing and shoring required to ensure safety of existing structure. E. Notify affected utility companies before starting work and comply with their requirements. F. Mark location and termination of utilities. G. Provide appropriate temporary signage including signage for exit or building egress. 3.2 PROTECTION A. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction and components indicated to remain against damage and soiling during demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during demolition and reinstalled in their original locations after demolition operations are complete. B. Existing Utilities: Maintain utility services indicated to remain and protect them against damage during demolition operations. 1. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving adjacent occupied or operating facilities unless authorized in writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\02050NorthamptonMA.doc 02050-3 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS/PERMITS AND CODES owlok A. Conform to applicable codes and regulations of the Town of Northampton, and State of Massachusetts, federal agencies having jurisdiction for removal and demolition work, safety of structure, contaminated substances, or unsafe environmental substances, dust control, and disposal of debris. B. Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning demolition. C. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Legally dispose of removed materials and equipment, obtain proper disposal receipts for verification. D. Obtain and pay for required permits and licenses required from authorities prior to commencing demolition work. E. Do not close or obstruct egress or site access width.Do not disable or disrupt building fire or life safety systems without proper prior written notification to the Owner,Police and Fire Departments. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent and on occupied building areas. B. Cease operations immediately if structure appears to be in danger and notify Architect. Do not resume operations until directed. C. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. D. Dumpsters at the site, which are used by other Tenants, shall not be used for disposal of any debris in connection with the work under this Section. 1.7 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged,reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain, shall remain the Owner's or Landlord's property. 1. Demolished materials shall become the Contractor's property and shall be removed from the site. 2. Refer to the drawings and/or confer with the Owner to identify items to be salvaged or reused. 3. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. B. On-site storage or sale of removed items shall be prohibited. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\02050NorthamptonMA.doc 02050-2 SECTION 02050 DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the General Conditions of the Contract, and Division 1 General Requirements. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Removal of designated building equipment and fixtures; removal of designated construction; dismantling, cutting and alterations as indicated and necessary for the completion of the Work including but not limited to the following: 1. Disposal of materials. 2. Storage of removed materials. 3. Disconnecting and capping of identified utilities. 4. Salvaged items. 5. Protection of items to remain. 6. Trenching and restoration of floor slab as required. 1.3 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Sequence activities in accordance with the schedule as approved by the Talbots Construction Project Manager as required. B, Schedule Work to coincide with new construction. C. RENOVATION AREAS: All scheduled Work shall be accomplished during store non- operating hours and shall be sequenced to accommodate Owner's occupancy requirements during normal store operating hours. Coordinate construction schedule and operations with Owner. D. Coordinate, schedule and arrange with mechanical and electrical trades who shall disconnect and re-route existing services in the building affected by the removal work of this section. E. Where modification or removal of existing electrical equipment will result in outages in area not to be demolished, the Contractor shall coordinate in advance and obtain the approval of the Landlord, Talbots store manager or Talbots CPM. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project. B. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241 as applicable. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\02050NorthamptonMA.doc 02050-1 11. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred,exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. a. Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. 12. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication,paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. 13. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. 14. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. 15. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers,registers, and grills. 16. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. 17. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. D. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile,harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully. END OF SECTION Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\01700NorthamptonMA.doc 01700-6 2. Provide instruction at mutually agreed-on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation,provide similar instruction at the start of each season. 3. Schedule training with Owner, through the Construction Project Manager, with at least seven days'advance notice. 4. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction, and course content. B. Arrange to have Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical and Energy Management System Subcontractors instruct such person or persons as Owner may designate regarding the care and use of specified systems and related apparatus as well as to ensure appropriate equipment maintenance manuals are furnished. C. Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical and Energy Management Subcontractors shall make job foremen available to meet with Owner's representative on-site for a minimum of four(4) hours on the Monday or Tuesday of store-opening week. Actual time for such meeting shall be coordinated by and with Owner. Conduct each meeting independently. 3.2 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and anti-pollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturers written instructions. C. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: 1. Clean Project site,yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish,waste material,litter, and other foreign substances, if caused by Talbots Contractors. 2. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. 3. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. 4. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. 5. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition, as per construction documents. 6. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. 7. Sweep concrete floors broom-clean in unoccupied spaces. 8. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces,removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. 9. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. 10. Remove labels that are not perinanent. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 34 Bridge Street, Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSW5132\specs\01700NorthamptonMA.doc 01700-5 2. Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's information, list of spare parts, maintenance procedures,maintenance and service schedules for preventive and „,"K routine maintenance, and copies of warranties and bonds. 3. Warranty Forms/Cards: Include manufacturer's warranty cards for all equipment covered under warranty. B. Organize operation and maintenance manuals into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind and index data in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, with pocket inside the covers to receive folded oversized sheets. Identify each binder on front and spine with the printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project name, and subject matter of contents. 1.8 WARRANTIES A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated. B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11- inch paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. D. Execute and assemble transferable Warranty documents from Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Instruction: Instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. 1. Provide instructors experienced in operation and maintenance procedures. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 34 Bridge Street, Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\01700NorthamptonMA.doc 01700-4 1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. The Construction Project Manager completes the punch list and acquires signatures on site. The punch list is then forwarded to the Construction Administrator within 24 hours. The Construction Administrator distributes the punch list accordingly. B. The General Contractor prepares the space to be ready to punch on a predetermined date. The General Contractor must have Superintendent and appropriate Subcontractors available on punch list date. The General Contractor is to complete the punch list items within 7 days and/or prior to actual store opening. 1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. General: Protect Project Record Documents from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. B. Record Drawings: Maintain and submit one set of blue-or black-line white prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1. Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity that obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity,to prepare the marked-up Record Prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. b. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. 2. Mark record sets with erasable,red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at the same location. 3. Note Bulletin numbers,Change Order numbers, alternate numbers, and similar identification where applicable. 4. Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. Organize into manageable sets; bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 5. As-built drawings for the HVAC, electrical and lighting systems: One set shall be '/4 inch scale drawings for the owner, another set shall be reduced to fit on legal size paper. C. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each,ready for continued use and reference. 1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating the operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include operation and maintenance data required in individual Specification Sections and as follows: 1. Operation Data: Include emergency instructions and procedures, system and equipment descriptions,operating procedures, and sequence of operations. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\01700NorthamptonMA.doc 01700-3 1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. 1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected(punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds,maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. a. Provide originals or acceptable copies of all final sign-off approvals by officials, authorities, and agencies having jurisdiction, including: b. Occupancy Permit with all required approvals. C. Building(and where applicable),Plumbing,Heating, Electrical and Fire, final approved inspection reports. d. Where applicable, Conservation Commission and/or Wetlands Authorities final approval and acceptable notices. e. Conditional or temporary permits shall be made final before final acceptance of the work of this contract. 5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, damage or settlement surveys,property surveys, and similar final record information. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. a. Submit all keys including duplicates. Wire all keys for each lock securely together. Tag and plainly mark with lock number, equipment identification, or panel or switch number, and indicate location, such as building and room name or number. 8. Complete startup testing of all mechanical and electrical systems. 9. Submit HVAC test/adjust/remote commissioning/balance records. 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. 1.4 FINAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following: 1. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 2. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\01700NorthamptonMA.doc 01700-2 SECTION 01700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the General Conditions of the Contract, and Division 1 General Requirements. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Project Record Documents. 3. Operation manuals. 4. Maintenance manuals. 5. Warranties. 6. Instruction of Owner's personnel. 7. Final cleaning. B. Do not submit application for Substantial or final Completion without all supporting documentation. Incomplete applications will not be processed. C. Documents with required submittals vary with project and are identified in the individual specification Sections. These documents usually include but are not limited to the following: 1. Final Application for Payment with supporting documents referred to in Article 3.2 of General Requirements and Article 5 (five) of the Agreement. 2. L.C.P. (Lease Confirmation Plan) 3. Metal storefront shop drawings. 4. Insulated storefront glazing warranty. 5. Sprinkler location drawings. 6. HVAC Ductwork as-built drawings 7. HVAC Balancing report. 8. HVAC Final Report. 9. HVAC-Energy Management System Commissioning Report. 10. Fire Alarm shop drawings. 11. Duct Cleaning Certification/Project photographs. 12. "As-Built"Record Drawings. 13. Sales tax bond for non-resident Contractors. 14. Utility meter readings and copies or correspondence requesting utility billing changeover. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\01700NorthamptonMA.doc 01700-1 B. Products Specified by Naming specific Manufacturers and/or model: Products of manufacturers named and meeting Specifications,no options or substitutions allowed. 8.5 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions will only be considered when a Product becomes unavailable through no fault of the Contractor. B. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed Substitution with Contract Documents. C. Document change in cost to Owner and submit with Owner's substitution request form. PART 9 - STARTING OF SYSTEMS 9.1 STARTING SYSTEMS A. Ensure that each piece of equipment or system is ready for operation. B. Execute start up under supervision of responsible persons in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. 9.2 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of Products to Owner's personnel. 9.3 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING A. Site General Contractor shall appoint and employ services of an independent firm to perform "' testing, adjusting, and balancing. Contractor shall pay for services. B. Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the Construction Project Manager indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or noncompliance with specified requirements and with the requirements of the Contract Documents. C. Cooperate with independent firm; furnish assistance as requested. D. Retesting required because of nonconformance to specified requirements is Contractor's Cost. ---END OF SECTION--- Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\O1001NorthamptonMA.doc 01001-14 B. Location shall be at the site as determined by existing conditions and space availability and Landlord requirements. Maintain same in good condition, secure, suitably and substantially weather-tight as required for materials that may be damaged by storage in open. C. Coordinate use of storage areas and facilities. Temporary storage trailers,constructed sheds, etc., shall remain the responsibility of the G.C. and shall be removed from the site upon completion of work. Location and layout of storage facilities shall be the G.C. and be subject to approval by Owner and Landlord. PART 8 -MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 8.1 PRODUCTS A. Products: Means new material,machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming the Work, but does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying and erection of the Work. 8.2 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Owner will furnish various items as identified on the drawings or specification sections. 1. Owner will arrange and pay for delivery of Owner-furnished items according to agreed upon construction schedule. 2. After delivery, at Owner's option, inspect delivered items for damage. Contractor shall be present for and assist in Owner's inspection. 3. If Owner-furnished items are damaged, defective, or missing, Owner will arrange for replacement. 4. Owner will furnish Contractor the earliest possible delivery date for Owner-furnished products. Using Owner-furnished earliest possible delivery dates, Contractor shall designate delivery dates of Owner-furnished items in Contractor's Construction Schedule. 5. Owner is responsible for unloading Owner furnished items unless otherwise noted in individual Specification Sections. 6. Contractor is responsible for receiving and handling Owner-furnished items at Project site. 7. Contractor is responsible for protecting Owner-furnished items from damage during storage and handling, including damage from exposure to the elements. 8.3 TRANSPORTATION,HANDLING, STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Transport,handle, store, and protect Products and already delivered Talbots furnished items in a reasonable manner and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Obtain and pay for off site storage and Work areas needed for operations. C. Replace lost or damaged Talbots furnished items when loss or damage occurs while products are in Contractor's responsible control. 8.4 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standard only or by Description Only: Any Product meeting those standards or description. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\O 1001NorthamptonMA.doc 01001-13 7.14 DIGITAL CAMERA/PROGRESS PICTURES A. Provide Digital Camera capabilities on site. B. Submit weekly project progress digital photographs to the CPM. 7.15 LAPTOP COMPUTER A. Site Superintendent shall be required to have a laptop computer with internet connection available on site. 7.16 PARKING A. Arrange for temporary Owner's/Landlord's parking areas to accommodate construction personnel. B. Comply with Landlord's restrictions and Owner's rule of conduct referred to in General Conditions paragraph 3.3.5. 7.17 PROGRESS CLEANING AND WASTE REMOVAL A. Collect and maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. Dispose of materials lawfully. B. Comply with requirements in NFPA for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. C. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. D. Dumpster may be permitted, location to be coordinated with Landlord. 7.18 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION A. Owner's separate contractor provides Barricade Graphics where indicated on drawings and in paragraph(7.9 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES). 7.19 FIELD DESK A. Field Desk: Rolling desk with 3 feet x 5 feet minimum top surface. 7.20 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities,materials,prior to Substantial Completion. B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary Work. C. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. D. Record electric, water, gas, and similar meter readings to substantiate and verify Contractor's utility cost. 7.21 TEMPORARY STORAGE A. Provide appropriate size and type storage facilities if required by site conditions to accommodate both G.C. and Owner supplied items. Requirement for temporary storage facility include but is not limited to existing and operating store project remodel that do not have adequate storage facilities for materials and adequate areas of staging for the G.C. to accomplish the Work. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\O1001NorthamptonMA.doc 01001-12 7.9 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES (BARRICADES) A. Erect and Maintain temporary weatherproof and insulated closures for exterior openings to permit acceptable working conditions and protection of the Work. B. Enclosure shall be constructed to protect store from weather and maintain adequate store security. Provide locking entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft and similar violations of security C. Prime paint exposed face of barricade to receive photo mural graphics. D. Owners separate contractor will furnish and install photomural graphics. E. Coordinate installation and dismantling with local mall management. 7.10 INTERIOR ENCLOSURES (BARRICADES) A. Provide temporary partitions and ceilings as indicated to separate Work areas from Owner occupied areas, Landlord and common areas to prevent penetration of dust and moisture, to prevent damage to existing materials and equipment. B. In-store barricades: 1. Paint barricade surfaces exposed to view from Landlord or Owner occupied areas. 2. Install Owner provided surface mounted merchandising shelf standards where indicated. 3. Installation and removal of barricades must be coordinated with the Store Manager and/or Landlord. All barricade work is to be completed in one evening between the hours of the store closing and store opening. 4. When no temporary partitions are indicated, install opaque neutral color drop cloths to prevent penetration of dust and moisture into the existing and operating store. C. Barricades shall not be anchored or otherwise attached to the strip center or store floor. A fibrous material under the base plate shall be installed to protect the floor. 7.11 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual Specification sections. 1. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. 2. Prohibit the use of any fixture or furnishing or cashwrap station as a scaffold. 7.12 SECURITY A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work and existing facilities, and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft. B. Comply with Owner's rules in the General Conditions paragraph 3.3.5. C. General Contractor shall at all times be responsible for tools and construction equipment. D. Renovation of existing store areas: Owner shall employ guard service to provide watch persons at store during construction occurring at all non-open hours. 7.13 TELEPHONE/FAX SERVICE A. Provide, maintain and pay for telephone service to filed office at time of Project mobilization. B. Provide separate and dedicated telephone line and facsimile machine to field office. C. Post local fire, ambulance and police department numbers on each telephone. D. Do not use Owner's phone system. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\O1001NorthamptonMA.doc 01001-11 7.2 TEMPORARY LIGHTING FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES A. Provide and maintain temporary lighting for construction operations. B. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors, pigtails, and lamps as required. C. In renovation areas,permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction. Clean lamps and fixtures at end of construction. D. In areas of new construction, Contractor may not use Owner furnished fixtures and/or lamps for temporary lighting. 7.3 TEMPORARY HEAT(Expansion Area) A. Provide heating devices and heat as needed to maintain specified conditions for construction operations. B. Contractor to pay for cost of energy used. C. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F in areas where construction is in progress, unless indicated otherwise. 7.4 TEMPORARY VENTILATION A. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes,vapors, or gases. B. Utilize existing ventilation equipment. Extend and supplement equipment with temporary fan units as required to maintain clean air for construction operations. 7.5 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE A. Provide, maintain and pay for suitable quality water service required. Connect to existing water source for construction operations. B. Do not use the Owner's or Landlord's bathroom$as a water source or workstation. 7.6 SPRINKLER SERVICE A. The G.C. must notify the Landlord at least 48 hours before making any modifications to the existing sprinkler system, and or needing the present sprinkler system drained. 1. No wet sprinkler systems will be left drained or inoperable overnight. 7.7 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide and maintain portable toilet facilities outside the building. Coordinate with Construction Project Manager. B. Maintain in clean and sanitary condition. C. Public restrooms are not to be used by the G.C. 7.8 FIRE PROTECTION A. Until fire-protection needs are supplied by permanent facilities,provide and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities within the construction area to comply with the local fire code and the specific instructions of building or fire department personnel. B. Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended purpose. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 RAISSY\05132\specs\O 100 1 NorthamptonMA.doe 01001-10 C. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except when more OOOW stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. 6.2 TOLERANCES A. Monitor tolerance control of installed products over suppliers, manufacturers,products, site conditions,and workmanship, to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate. B. Comply fully with manufacturers'tolerances. 6.3 REFERENCES A. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current as of date of Contract Documents. B. Should specified reference standard conflict with Contract Documents,request clarification from Construction Project Manager before proceeding. 6.4 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain on site one (1)complete clean set of"Blueline"prints and Contract Documents for the sole purpose of maintaining a project record. B. Record actual revisions to the Work. Record information concurrent with construction progress. C. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each Product section a description of actual Products installed. D. Record Documents and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction. E. Submit all marked—up documents as an "AS-BUILT"record set to Constriction Project Manager within two week of completion of the Project. DO NOT SUBMIT with claim for final Application for Payment. PART 7 - CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 7.1 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY A. Definition: Power service required during entire construction term from date of commencement to date of Final Completion. B. General Contractor to provide and pay for temporary power service required from source and connections. Such costs shall be included in the Contract Sum.. C. Prior to Final Completion, disconnect temporary service and notify utility to change billing over to Owner. D. At Owner's option, for the convenience of the Owner,power for selected existing store renovations may be taken from Owner's electric service. Power consumption shall not disrupt Owner's need for continuous service. E. Provide power outlets for constriction operations, branch wiring, distribution boxes, and flexible power cords as required. F. Comply with NECA,NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\O 100 1 NorthamptonMA.doc 01001-9 B. Show milestone dates as listed in Bid Invitation. 5.3 SHOP DRAWINGS A. When specified in individual Specification sections, Shop Drawings For Review: 1. Submitted to Talbots Construction Department, Attention: Submittal Enclosed. 2. Reviewed and approved by the Construction Project Manager or his designee. B. Submit in the form of one reproducible transparency reproduction. C. Number consecutively by Project. 5.4 PRODUCT DATA A. When specified in individual Specification sections, submit one copy. B. Mark each copy to identify applicable products,models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information unique to this Project. 5.5 SAMPLES A. When specified in individual Specification sections, submit samples as follows: 1. Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product. 2. Samples shall be 8-1/2 x 11 inches in size unless otherwise specified. 5.6 MANUFACTURER INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS A. When specified in individual Specification sections, submit manufacturer printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start up, adjusting, and finishing in quantities specified for Product Data. 5.7 MANUFACTURER CERTIFICATES A. When specified in individual Specification sections, submit certifications by manufacturer to Construction Project Manager in quantities specified for Product Data. B. Indicate material or Product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data. 5.8 LEASE CONFIRMATION PLAN A. Take and record field measurements as identified on the Architect's Lease Confirmation Drawings. B. Forward completed plan to the CPM within two (2)weeks of starting construction. PART 6 - QUALITY CONTROL 6.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE -CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers,Products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. B. Comply with manufacturers'instructions. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\O 100 1 NorthamptonMA.doe 01001-8 B. Verify Landlord restrictions on who may perform cutting, coring and patching in roof, floor and demising walls. C. Submit written notification to Construction Project Manager in advance of cutting, coring or altering structural or building enclosure elements. D. Execute cutting, fitting, and patching to complete Work and to: 1. Fit the several parts together to integrate with other Work. 2. Uncover Work to install or correct ill-timed Work. 3. Remove and replace defective and nonconforming Work. 4. Remove Samples of installed Work for testing. 5. Provide openings in elements of Work for penetrations of mechanical and electrical Work. E. Cut masonry and concrete materials using masonry saw or core drill. Restore Work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. F. Concrete floor slab: G.C. shall be responsible for all cutting of the concrete floor slab or coring as required for electrical work, plumbing work, etc. G.0 shall provide all patching as required to receive the new finishes. G. Fit Work tight to adjacent elements. Maintain integrity of wall, ceiling, or floor construction; completely seal voids, firestop as required. H. Fit Work tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduits, and other penetrations through surfaces. I. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes. PART 5 - SUBMITTALS 5.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Submittals are as required by the Specifications and responsibility schedule. B. Submittal form shall identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier, and pertinent .Contract Document references including responsibility schedule cross-reference. C. Apply Contractor's certification stamp, signed or initialed by Contractor, certifying that review, verification of products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. D. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations that may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work with a cloud and conspicuous notation. E. Revise and resubmit submittals as required; identify all changes made since previous submittal with a cloud and conspicuous notation. F. Do not make submittals for items indicated "TFI" and "NIC". G. Also see "Closeout Procedures" Section 01700 for required closeout submittals. H. Refer to 3.12 in the General Conditions for further requirements. I. Track submittals on AIA form G712 Sample and Submittal Record. J. Allow 10 (ten)working days for review and approvals by the Construction Project Manager or his designee. K. Distribute"Approved" submittals to field, Subcontractors, suppliers, and Project record document file. 5.2 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES A. Submit initial progress schedule, as soon as practicable but no more than 14(fourteen) days after Bid Award notification, for Construction Project Manager's review. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\O1001NorthamptonMA.doc 01001-7 PART 4 - COORDINATION AND MEETINGS 4.1 COORDINATION A. All communication with the Architect, Store Planning Project Manager(SPM), and Owner shall be made through the Construction Project Manager(CPM). Other communication shall be made as provided in the Contract Documents and the Contractor shall endeavor to keep the Construction Project Manager aware of all communication. B. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work that are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit as closely as practicable. C. In finished areas, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. D. Coordinate space requirements and installation of Owner furnished items shown on the Drawings. E. Cooperate with the Owner's separate Contractors for Millwork Furnishing, Signs&Awnings furnished and installed,Alarm System furnishing and installation, P.O.S. system furnishing and installation, telephone system furnishing and installation,music system and other Work as indicated on the Responsibility Schedule. F. The Owner's separate Contractor will provide certain Layouts and shop Drawings to assist in coordination of interrelated Work. 4.2 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETINGS A. Construction Project Manager will schedule a preconstruction meeting after Notice of Award for all affected parties. 4.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Construction Project Manager will schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum monthly intervals. B. Construction Project Manager will preside at meetings,record minutes, and distribute copies within 10 (ten) days to those affected by decisions made. 4.4 EXAMINATION A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent Work. Beginning new Work means acceptance of existing conditions. B. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct location. 4.5 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. B. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying new material or substance in contact or bond. 4.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Employ a skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting and patching new Work; restore Work with new Products. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 34 Bridge Street, Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\O1001NorthamptonMA.doc 01001-6 B. Submit waivers of lien as referred to in Article 5 (five) of the Agreement,and Owner's lien summary form TLS-100. C. Content and Format: Utilize Schedule of Values Form 301 (TBS-100) for listing items in Application for Payment. D. Review related General Conditions in Article 9 (nine). E. Reference Talbots purchase order numbers as issued with the Agreement and subsequent Change Orders/Directives. F. Payment Period: 30 (thirty) days after application approval and certification and no sooner than 45 (forty-five)days after application. G. Incomplete applications will be returned to the Contractor for revision and resubmission. H. No application will be certified prior to the receipt of all Bid Submittals required in Article 6 (six) of the Instructions To Bidders. I. Comply with all Project Close-Out requirements including those identified in Section 01700, before making application for final payment. J. No application will be certified if submitted more than 45 (forty-five) days after Final Completion. 3.3 CHANGE PROCEDURES A. Change Order Authorizations (COA): COA's are a written instrument of the Owner. The COA shall be signed by the Contractor, Construction Project Manager and by the Senior Construction Project Manager. The Senior Construction Project Manager's signature constitutes approval for the General Contractor to proceed as directed by the COA which will include: 1. Change in work. 2. NOT TO EXCEED the amount of the adjustment, if any in the Contract sum. 3. The extent of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Time. B. Stipulated Sum Change Order:For a Change Order involving changes with no predetermined unit prices,based on Contractor's fixed price quotation or Contractor's request, as approved by Construction Project Manager. C. Unit Price Change Order: For a Change Order involving predetermined unit pricing„ the Change Order will be executed on a fixed unit price basis. For unit costs that are not predetermined, execute Work under a Stipulated Sum Change Order or Construction Change Directive. D. Change Order Forms: Owner's revision of AIA G701 (Talbots TCO-100), consecutively numbered, filled out completely, as referred to in the General Conditions Article 7 (seven). E. For a Change Order to be valid it must be written, signed by the Construction Project Manager and Contractor, and be accompanied by and referenced to a duly executed Talbots Purchase Order(unless there is no change in Contract Sum), as referred to in the General Conditions Article 7 (seven). F. Substantiate Claims for unforeseen conditions with photographs and affidavit statements with notary seals. G. The Owner shall receive change Orders not more than 14 (fourteen) days after Contractor acceptance and endorsement. Change orders not received within such a time frame shall not be valid. 3.4 ALTERNATES A. Not Used. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\01001NorthamptonMA.doc 01001-5 2.3 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES A. Limit use of premises as follows: 1. Allow work by Landlord and Work by Owner or Owner's separate Contractors. 2. Comply with provisions of Landlord rules of conduct and all other restrictions imposed by Landlord and his property managers. G. C. shall obtain a copy of Landlord's Rules and Regulations for Contractors. 3. Coordinate work with Owner's Construction Project Manager. B. Comply with Owner's rules of Conduct as referred to in the General Conditions,Article 3. C. In the new expansion space: allow Owner to occupy part of the premises for the limited purpose of receiving merchandise, fixtures, furnishings, and display props on the date indicated in the Invitation to Bid. D. In the existing operating store: The Owner will occupy the premises during the entire period of construction Work for the conduct of normal retail operations. 1. The store shall remain open, and fully operational during all phases of construction. Consideration of the Talbots customer will remain of paramount importance throughout the construction of this project. 2. All scheduled Work, including but not limited to, demolition and new construction within the Sales Area, Stock Room,Fitting Rooms or areas occupied by the store personnel shall be performed during the night hours when the store is closed. These operations shall be considered as third shift or off-hours work. Project shall be bid accordingly. Store operating hours are shall be verified with the Store Manager or CPM, and third shift construction hours shall be considered between the normal hours of store operations. EXISTING MISSES STORE OPERATING HOURS: Monday,Tuesday, Wednesday, Saturday 9:30 AM TO 6:00 PM Thursday,Friday 9:30 AM TO 8:00 PM "` Sunday 12:00 PM TO 5:00 PM E. All OSHA laws and practices as well as other applicable codes and Landlord criteria are to be observed by the G.C. and his sub-contractors. 2.4 ADDITIONAL SITE SUPERENTENDANT REQUIREMENTS A. For store renovations where work is scheduled to be performed both during the daytime (store open) and evening (store closed) hours,the G.C.will be required to provide a "Site Superintendent"on the premises whenever actively engaged in work. PART 3 - CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS 3.1 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Utilize Bid Document forms: 00301 (TBS-100), 00302 (TBS-102), and 00303 (TBS--101) as schedule of values. 1. Submit with first Application for Payment. 3.2 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Submit 2 (two) copies of each application on AIA Form G702 and G703 filled out completely and executed by company officer. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 34 Bridge Street, Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\O 100 1 NorthamptonMA.doc 01001-4 PART 2 - SUMMARY OF WORK 2.1 CONTRACT A. Contract Description: Construction of a Talbots retail store totaling 9,171 sf of space in an existing Strip Center. The concept type is Misses,Petites and Woman and the work includes partial demolition of an existing store,new storefronts,and build out of interior spaces. B. No brokerage of licenses will be allowed. C. Retailer square footage statistics for this Project are: SQUARE FOOTAGE ANALYSIS Area of Store Misses Petites Woman Gross 3989 2577 2605 Stock/Other 757 464 499 Total Sales 3232 2113 2106 Fitting Room 395 287 320 Forward Sales 2837 1826 1786 Usable Sales 2187 1513 1471 L.F. Stock 790 483 527 L.F. Hanging 88 78 68 L.F Display Window 55 32 19 2.2 WORK BY OWNER A. The Owner's Landlord is responsible to furnish and/or provide certain items of Work as indicated in the responsibility schedule and on the Drawings. B. The Owner and Owner' separate Contractors are furnishing certain products as indicated in the responsibility schedule on the Drawings. C. The Owner and Owner's separate Contractors are providing, furnished and installed,a complete computer system with P.O.S. (point-of-sale)registers,a complete burglar alarm system(installation of receiving door local alarm is by G.C.), a complete telephone system, music system and other Work as shown on the Responsibility Schedule. D. The Owner, on behalf of his Landlord and his separate Contractors, will be responsible to the General Contractor for related: 1. Layouts, Shop Drawings, data,bills of material, to assist in the coordination of Work. 2. Product transportation to site. 3. Coordination with established schedules. 4. Arrange manufacture's inspections. 5. Take-offs and ordering. E. The Contractor is responsible to the Owner for: 1. Coordinating delivery and/or installation dates. 2. Receiving products. 3. Handling, storage, security and protection. 4. Cost of items damaged,missing, improperly installed, lost. 5. Coordination of related Work and surrounding construction. 6. Specified installations including, without limitation,related unpacking. 7. Upon request, verification of Owner's Take-offs. F. Refer to Article 6 of General Conditions for important information. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\O 1001NorthamptonMA.doc 01001-3 PART 7—CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS: 7.1 Temporary Electricity. 7.2 Temporary Lighting for Construction Purposes. 7.3 Temporary Heat. 7.4 Temporary Ventilation. 7.5 Temporary Water Service. 7.6 Sprinkler Service 7.7 Temporary Sanitary Facilities. 7.8 Fire Protection 7.9 Exterior enclosures. (Barricades) 7.10 Interior enclosures. (Barricades) 7.11 Protection of installed Work. 7.12 Security. 7.13 Telephone/Fax service. 7.14 Digital Camera/Progress Photographs 7.15 Laptop Computer 7.16 Parking. 7.17 Progress Cleaning and Waste Removal. 7.18 Project Identification. 7.19 Field Desk. 7.20 Removal of Utilities,Facilities and Controls. 7.21 Temporary Storage PART 8—MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT: 8.1 Products. 8.2 Owner Furnished Products. 8.3 Transportation,Handling, Storage, and Protection. 8.4 Products Options. 8.5 Substitutions. PART 9— STARTING OF SYSTEMS: 9.1 Starting Systems. 9.2 Demonstration and Instructions. 9.3 Testing,Adjusting and Balancing. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 34 Bridge Street, Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\O1001NorthamptonMA.doc 01001-2 SECTION 01001 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Work performed under this section of the specifications shall be subject to the General Conditions of the Contract. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES PART 2—SUMMARY OF WORK: 2.1 Contract. 2.2 Work by Owner. 2.3 Contractor use of Premises. 2.4 Additional Site Superintendent Requirements PART 3 —CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS: 3.1 Schedule of values. 3.2 Applications for Payment. 3.3 Change Procedures. 3.4 Alternates. PART 4—COORDINATION AND MEETINGS: 4.1 Coordination. 4.2 Preconstruction Meetings. 4.3 Progress Meetings. 4.4 Examination. 4.5 Preparation. 4.6. Cutting and patching. PART 5 -SUBMITTALS: 5.1 Submittal Procedures. 5.2 Construction Progress Schedules. 5.3 Shop Drawings. 5.4 Product Data. 5.5 Samples. 5.6 Manufacturer Installation Instructions. 5.7 Manufacturer Certificates. 5.8 Lease Confirmation Plan. PART 6—QUALITY CONTROL: 6.1 Quality Assurance -Control of Installation. 6.2 Tolerances 6.3 References 6.4. Project Record Documents Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\01001NorthamptonMA.doe 01001-1 DOCUMENT 00701 GENERAL CONDITIONS-AIA GENERAL A. The American Institute of Architects Document"AIA Document A201-1997, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction", as modified by Talbots and dated July 20, 2004, constitutes the General Conditions and is made part of the Contract between the Owner and Contractor. B. Provisions of articles revised/amended and all provisions which are not so amended or supplemented remain in full force and effect. C. A copy of the modified "AIA Document A201-1997"General Conditions document has been previously made available to all Bidders. END OF DOCUMENT Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion ENERAL CONDITIONS -AIA 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29,2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\00701NorthamptonMA.doc 00701-1 DOCUMENT 00663 FINAL WAIVER OF LIEN (CONSTRUCTION FORM TFW-101) The undersigned,being the for the construction of (Name the trade or material supplied) at (Name of store) (Name of shopping center) having entered in an agreement with (Town or city) (State) the (Leval name on contract or purchase order) (General contractor or subcontractor) hereby certifies for itself and its successors, assigns, suppliers, laborers and subcontractors that all labor, material and services supplied, expended and committed for related to this project have been fully paid and all indebtedness in any way related to this project(even if not yet invoiced to the undersigned by a supplier or subcontractor)has been discharged. Furthermore, having been fully paid and satisfied in connection with this project, the undersigned does hereby waive,release and relinquish any and all claims or right of lien which the undersigned may now or hereafter have in connection with this project or upon the premises above described or upon any funds paid or payable in connection with the project, for labor,equipment and material, general supervision of construction of alteration, and/or otherwise and also waives and relinquishes any right to file any notice of lien related to any of the foregoing. Liability to the State of for Sales and/or Use Tax,where applicable has been discharged. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, The undersigned has caused th4s Waiver of Lien to be executed by its duly authorized officer this day of 120 COMPANY: (Company's legal name per contract) By: (Signature of executing Officer) Title: SWORN TO BEFORE ME AND SUBSCRIBED IN MY PRESENCE, at this day of , 20 (Notary Public) State of: , County of: Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion FINAL WAIVER OF LIEN 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\00663NorthamptonMA.doc 00663-1 DOCUMENT 00662 PARTIAL WAIVER OF LIEN (CONSTRUCTION FORM TPW-100) The undersigned,being the for the construction of (name the trade or material supplied) at (Name of store) (Name of shopping center) (Town or city) (State) having entered in an agreement with the (Legal name on contract or purchase order) (General contractor or subcontractor) hereby certifies for itself and its successors, assigns, suppliers, laborers and subcontractors that all labor, material and services supplied, expended and committed for related to this project have been paid through the date of execution of this affidavit and indebtedness discharged to the date of execution of this affidavit. Furthermore, for and in consideration of$ the undersigned does hereby waive,release and relinquish any and all claims or rights of lien which the undersigned may have upon the premises above described, for labor, material, general supervision or construction, general supervision of alteration or otherwise, supplied or performed through the date of this affidavit. Liability to the State of for Sales and/or Use Tax, where applicable has been discharged. ; IN WITNESS WHEREOF, The undersigned has caused this Waiver of Lien to be executed by its duly authorized officer this day of , 20 COMPANY: (Company's legal name per contract) By: (Signature of executing Officer) Title: SWORN TO BEFORE ME AND SUBSCRIBED IN MY PRESENCE, at this day of 20_. (Notary Public) State of: , County of: Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion PARTIAL WAIVER OF LIEN 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\00662NorthamptonMA.doe 00662-1 DOCUMENT 00661 LIEN SUMMARY FORM +, CONSTRUCTION FORM TLS-100 PROJECT NAME&#: GENERAL CONTRACTOR: NAME&ADDRESS TYPE OF AMOUNT RETENTION NET NET BALANCE WORK OF INCLUDING PREVIOUSLY AMOUNT TO CONTRACT CURRENT PAID THIS COMPLETE PAYMENT Subtotal Page 1 AMOUNT OF ORIGINAL CONTRACT WORK COMPLETED TO DATE(G702) EXTRAS TO CONTRACT LESS 10%RETAINED TOTAL CONTRACT AND EXTRAS NET AMOUNT EARNED CREDITS TO CONTRACT NET REVIOUSLY PAID ADJUSTED TOTAL CONTRACT NET AMOUNT THIS PAYMENT TALBOTS USE ONLY AMOUNT PREVIOUSLY PAID(TLS 100)$ AMOUNT PREVIOUSLY BILLED(G702)$ VARIANCE Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Renovation LIEN SUMMARY FORM 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\00661NorthamptonMA.doc 00661-1 DOCUMENT 00501 AGREEMENT-AIA GENERAL A. The American Institute of Architects' Document"AIA Document A101-1997"Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor where the basis of payment is a Stipulated Sum"(dated July 20, 2004), forms the basis of the contract between the Owner and Contractor. B. The successful Bidder shall execute a"Supplemental Agreement to Master Term Contract", directly with Talbots, "The Owner". The Supplemental Agreement amends the"Master Term Contract" document which consists of Talbots'modifications of the AIA Document A101-1997". C. A copy of the modified "AIA Document A101-1997"Master Term Contract document has been previously made available to all Bidders. ---END OF DOCUMENT--- Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion AGREEMENT-AIA 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\00501NorthamptonMA.doc 00501-1 DEMOLITION: HVAC: ❑ Union ❑ Union , ❑ Non-Union ❑ Non-Union LAY-IN CEILING: OTHER: ❑ Union ❑ Union ❑ Non-Union ❑ Non-Union OTHER: OTHER: ❑ Union ❑ Union N<m-LJni()n _� Ni)n-t imon OTIIEIZ: OTHER: ❑ Union ❑ Union L I Non-Union ❑ Non-Union OTHER: OTHER: ❑ Union ❑ Union ❑ Non-Union ❑ Non-Union OTHER: OTHER: ❑ Union ❑ Union ❑ Non-Union ❑ Non-Union END OF DOCUMENT Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion SUBCONTRACTOR LIST 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\00430NorthamptonMA.doc 00430-2 DOCUMENT 00430 SUBCONTRACTOR LIST CONSTRUCTION FORM TSL-101 STORE NAME &NUMBER: G.C.: STORE ADDRESS: ADDRESS: Scope of Work: New Renovation Specific Need CPR Number PHONE#: The following is a list of trades people who performed G.C. Superintendent \b'uri: at the A)OVC 11MCd Store. Include the (i DOCUMENT 00303-B BID CLARIFICATION CONSTRUCTION FORM TBS-IOTA PROJECT The Contractor certifies that there are no inclusions or exclusions contained within the Document 00303 (COI1StruCtlon Form TBS-101) \vhlch conffict\vlth the Dra\V'mgs, Specifications and Colltract DOc11111cIltS. The Contractor also certifies that if such a coniiict e.XistS, the Cost of such contliet is included III his total bid I)riec a:Id such Conflict silall not invalidate the validity u[the line: item brCLIkd0 %v11 on DOCUMCIlt 00303 (Construction Fol-111 ms-IO1). A non-monetary desi«nation inserted into the amount col>u11n of the Document 00303 (Construction Form TBS-101) shall have the same meaning, as to include the scope of vy,orlc, if so desi'-mated in the Bid Documents, in the total bid amount. The Contractor shall not use the Document 00303 (Construction Form TBS-101)to Cxcludc any portion of the Work from his bid price. The Contractor certifies that all utilities and Landlord backcharges are included in his total bid if so designated in the bid documents, and that he has not included in his bid conflicting information from the Landlord or an other source, other than Addenda issued in writing by the Owner. Signed: Date: Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion SCHED OF VALUES-EXTENDED 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\00303NorthamptonMA.doc 00303-5 DOCUMENT 00303(TBS-101) SCHEDULE OF VALUES-EXTENDED BREAKDOWN—SHARED STOCKROOM PROJECT: G.C.NAME: PART# DESCRIPTION AMOUNT PART# DESCRIPTION AMOUNT 00117 VALUE ENGINEERING $ 08400 METAI/ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEM $ 00620 PROFIT AND OVERHEAD $ 08702 HARDWARE $ 01020 CONTINGENCIES $ 08802 GLAZING(STOREFRONT&WWAS $ 01055 PERMITS $ 08814 SALES AREA MIRRORS $ 01074 SUPERVISION $ 08816 TINTED FILM ON GLASS $ 01080 INSURANCE $ 09260 METAL FRAMING AND GWB PARTITIONS $ 01086 TAXES $ 09270 METAL FRAMING AND GWB CEILING $ 01200 PROJECT MEETINGS PM $ 09310 TILE $ 01280 ENGINEERING $ 09500 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS $ 01400 SAFETY REGULATIONS $ 09550 WOOD FLOORING(NO PLY SUB FLOOR) $ 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES $ 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING S 01540 SECURITY S 09682 CARPET!SALFS AREA/FITTING ROOM(LAABOR) S 0155' IlAPPIFRS'G GRAPHICS C 0116R6 CARPF'FSTOCK ROOM VIti':A(I.:AL'OR) S 01560 CI ANINI'UP S 09903 PAINTING SAI FS FI ITING 1\00V1 S -- 01600 IiQUIPALENT,TOOLS&STAGT'G S 09006 PAINTING STOCK ROAM ARF_A CC 01"03 ,ClFNI R vI I,vn,()R N':A![.r OV'i I?!Nr;S.vI Fc.ARF_,A(IAR(W) IC i 1RF_A('ING 5 �,0 n0 SIGN,AGF �� 02510 SITE UTILITIES(TEL,E-LE.) S 10500 AWNINGS&CANOPIES S 02728 CONCRETE SAW CUTTING S 10520 MIS(.SPECIALITIFS(FIRF FXTINGUISI IF.R.FTC.) S 02905 LANDSCAPING $ 10600 REMOVABLE PAR"IITIONS .S 03110 CONCRETE PATCHING S 10630 PRF-FAB FITTING ROOMS(MATERIALS) S 03300 CONCRETE(FIGS&WALLS) $ 10632 PRE-FAB FITTING ROOMS(LABOR) $ 03400 CONCRETE(SLAB WORK) $ 10800 TOILET&BATH ACCESSORIES $ 03505 LEVELING UNDERLAYMENT $ 12300 METAL CABINETS $ 04300 BRICK $ 12510 BLINDS/SHADES $ 04400 STONE $ 14100 DUMBWAITERS $ 05100 STRUCTURAL STEEL $ 14200 ELEVATORS $ 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS $ 15310 SPRINKLER MAIN/RGH $ 05502 MISC.IRON $ 15320 SPRINKLER FINISH $ 06100 ROUGII CARPENTRY(LABOR) S 15410 ROUGH PLUMBING $ 06125 ROUGH CARPENTRY(MATERIALS) $ 15420 FINISH PLUMBING $ 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY(LABOR) $ 15430 BATHROOM FIXTURES $ 06410 W.W.A.S. (MATERIALS) $ 15780 H.V.A.C.EQUIPMENT $ 06411 W.W.A.S. (LABOR) $ 15880 H.V.A.C.DUCTWORK $ 06412 CABINETS,C/TOPS&SHELVING(MAT) $ 15942 MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT $ 06413 CABINETS,C/TOPS&SHELVING(LABOR) $ 15950 CONTROLS $ 06420 WOOD FEATURE WALL(MATERIALS) $ 16400 SERVICE TO PANELS $ 06422 WOOD FEATURE WALL(LABOR) $ 16460 TRANSFORMERS $ 06430 MERCHANDISE BAY STSTEM(MATERIAL) $ 16470 DISTRIBUTION SWITCH BOARD $ 06432 MERCHANDISE BAY SYSTEM(LABOR) $ 16474 PANELS AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS. $ 06450 STANDING&RUNNING TRIM(MATERIAL) $ 16480 RECEPTACLES $ 06452 STANDING&RUNNING TRIM(LABOR) $ 16500 LIGHTING INSTALLATION $ 06450 WOOD STOREFRONT(MATERIAL) $ 16510 LIGHTING FIXTURES(NON-TFI) $ 06462 WOOD STOREFRONT(LABOR) $ 16530 EXTERIOR LIGHTING(SUPPLY&INSTALL) $ 06620 PLASTIC COLUMN ENCLOSURES $ 16550 ACCESSORIES $ 07160 DAMPROOFING&WATERPROOFING $ 16620 EMERGENCY LIGHT AND POWER $ 07210 INSULATION $ 16720 FIRE&SMOKE SYSTEM(S) $ 07460 SIDING/CLADDING $ 16850 HEATING AND COOLING WIRING Is 07500 ROOFING SYSTEM $ DESCRIPTION 07600 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL $ ALT#1 $ 07800 ROOF ACCESS.(SKYLIGHT,HATCHES,ETC) $ ALT#2 $ 07900 JOINT SEALERS $ ALT#3 $ 08110 STEEL DOORS&FRAMES $ ALT#4 $ 08210 WOOD DOORS&FRAMES $ TOTAL INCLUDING ALTERNATIVES: Talbots Store No.335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion SCHED OF VALUES-EXTENDED 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\00303NorthamptonMA.doc 003034 DOCUMENT 00303(TBS-101) SCHEDULE OF VALUES-EXTENDED BREAKDOWN—WOMAN CONCEPT PROJECT: G.C.NAME: . PART# DESCRIPTION AMOUNT PART# DESCRIPTION AMOUNT 00117 VALUE ENGINEERING $ 08400 METAI/ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEM $ 00620 PROFIT AND OVERHEAD $ 08702 HARDWARE $ 01020 CONTINGENCIES $ 08802 GLAZING(STOREFRONT&WWAS $ 01055 PERMITS $ 08814 SALES AREA MIRRORS $ 01074 SUPERVISION $ 08816 TINTED FILM ON GLASS $ 01080 INSURANCE $ 09260 METAL FRAMING AND GWB PARTITIONS $ 01086 TAXES $ 09270 METAL FRAMING AND GWB CEILING $ 01200 PROJECT MEETINGS PM $ 09310 TILE $ 01280 ENGINEERING $ 09500 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS $ 01400 SAFETY REGULATIONS $ 09550 WOOD FLOORING(NO PLY SUB FLOOR) $ 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES $ 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING $ 01540 SECURITY S 09682 CARPET/SALES ARENTITTING ROOM(LABOR) S 01552 BARRIFRS&GRAPHICS S 006S6 CARPET STOCK ROOM ARFA(LABOR) S 01560 CI-E\NING UP S 09902 PAINTING SALL',FITTING ROOM S 01600 EQUIPMENT,TOOLS&STAGING S 09906 PAINTING STOCK ROOM AREA $ 0170' Cf-NERA1.LABOR S 00951 W,V 1,COVERING SAI_F4 AREA(I�p.nR) S Pli v I I 1!N(;R(1(A!(I_1f?O1.) _T11 - ----- --- —— ------ 0150i1 --AA-ING'�,S1'RFACING S I0-100 SIGNAGE �S 02550 Sl'TE UTILITIES(TEL,ELE.) S 10500 AWNINGS&,CANOPIES 4ETC.1 02728 CONCRETE SAW CUTTING $ 10520 MISC.SPECIALITIES(FIRE EXTINGU02905 LANDSCAPING $ 10600 REMOVABLE PARTITIONS 03110 CONCRETE PATCHING $ 10630 PRE-F,AB FITTING ROOMS(MATERIA03300 CONCRETE(FTGS&WALLS) $ 10632 PRE-FAB FITTING ROOMS(LABOR) 03400 CONCRETE(SLAB WORK) $ 10800 TOILET&BATH ACCESSORIES $ 03505 LEVELING UNDERLAYMENT $ 12300 METAL CABINETS $ 04300 BRICK $ 12510 BLINDS/SHADES $ 04400 STONE $ 14100 DUMBWAITERS $ 05100 STRUCTURAL STEEL $ 14200 ELEVATORS $ 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS $ 15310 SPRINKLER MAIN/RGH $ 05502 MISC.IRON $ 15320 SPRINKLER FINISH $ 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY(LABOR) $ 15410 ROUGH PLUMBING S 06125 ROUGH CARPENTRY(MATERIALS) $ 15420 FINISH PLUMBING $ 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY(LABOR) $ 15430 BATHROOM FIXTURES $ 06410 W.W.A.S. (MATERIALS) $ 15780 H.V.A.C.EQUIPMENT $ 06411 W.W.A.S. (LABOR) $ 15880 H.V.A.C.DUCTWORK $ 06412 CABINETS,C/TOPS&SHELVING(MAT) $ 15942 MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT $ 06413 CABINETS,C/TOPS&SHELVING(LABOR) $ 15950 CONTROLS $ 06420 WOOD FEATURE WALL(MATERIALS) $ 16400 SERVICE TO PANELS $ 06422 WOOD FEATURE WALL(LABOR) $ 16460 TRANSFORMERS $ 06430 MERCHANDISE BAY STSTEM(MATERIAL) $ 16470 DISTRIBUTION SWITCH BOARD $ 06432 MERCHANDISE BAY SYSTEM(LABOR) $ 16474 PANELS AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS. $ 06450 STANDING&RUNNING TRIM(MATERIAL) $ 16480 RECEPTACLES $ 06452 STANDING&RUNNING TRIM(LABOR) $ 16500 LIGHTING INSTALLATION $ 06450 WOOD STOREFRONT(MATERIAL) $ 16510 LIGHTING FIXTURES(NON-TFI) $ 06462 WOOD STOREFRONT(LABOR) $ 16530 EXTERIOR LIGHTING SUPPLY&INSTALL) $ 06620 PLASTIC COLUMN ENCLOSURES $ 16550 ACCESSORIES $ 07160 DAMPROOFING&WATERPROOFING $ 16620 EMERGENCY LIGHT AND POWER $ 07210 INSULATION $ 16720 FIRE&SMOKE SYSTEM(S) $ 07460 SIDING/CLADDING $ 16850 DATING AND COOLING WIRING Is 07500 ROOFING SYSTEM $ DESCRIPTION 07600 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL $ ALT#1 $ 07800 ROOF ACCESS.(SKYLIGHT,HATCHES,ETC) $ ALT#2 $ 07900 JOINT SEALERS $ ALT#3 $ 08110 STEEL DOORS&FRAMES $ ALT#4 $ 08210 WOOD DOORS&FRAMES $ TOTAL INCLUDING ALTERNATIVES: Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion SCHED OF VALUES-EXTENDED 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29 2005 05132 R:\MISSY105132\specs\00303NorthamptonMA.doc 00303-3 DOCUMENT 00303(TBS-101) SCHEDULE OF VALUES-EXTENDED BREAKDOWN—PETITES CONCEPT PROJECT: G.C.NAME: PART# DESCRIPTION AMOUNT PART# DESCRIPTION AMOUNT 00117 VALUE ENGINEERING $ 08400 METAUALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEM $ 00620 PROFIT AND OVERHEAD $ 08702 HARDWARE $ 01020 CONTINGENCIES $ 08802 GLAZING(STOREFRONT&WWAS $ 01055 PERMITS $ 08814 SALES AREA MIRRORS $ 01074 SUPERVISION $ 08816 TINTED FILM ON GLASS $ 01080 INSURANCE $ 09260 METAL FRAMING AND GWB PARTITIONS $ 01086 TAXES $ 09270 METAL FRAMING AND GWB CEILING $ 01200 PROJECT MEETINGS PM $ 09310 TILE $ 01280 ENGINEERING $ 09500 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS $ 01400 SAFETY REGULATIONS $ 09550 WOOD FLOORING(NO PLY SUB FLOOR) $ 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES $ 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING 01540 SECURITY $ 09682 CARPET/SALES AREA/FITTING ROOM(LABOR) $ 01552 BARRIFRS&GRAPHICS S 09656 CARPET STOCK ROOM AREA(I.A110R) S 01560 CLEANING IT S 09903 PAINTING SALES FITTING ROOM S 01600 EQUIPMENT,TOOLS&STAGING $ 09906 PAINTING STOCK ROOM AREA $ 01703 GE-NER.AI_1_.ABOR S 09953 WALL COVERING SAI-ES AREA(1 ABOR) g 01,00 PAVING&M'REACING � � 10ao0 SIGN.-AGE $ ---- 02550 SITE UTILITIES(TEL,ELE.) S 10500 AWNINGS&CANOPIES $ 02728 CONCRETE SAW CUTTING $ 10520 MISC.SPECIALITIES(FIRE EXTINGUISHER,ETC.) $ 02905 LANDSCAPING $ 10600 REMOVABLE PARTITIONS $ 03110 CONCRETE PATCHING $ 10630 PRE-FAB FITTING ROOMS(MATERIALS) $ 03300 CONCRETE(FTGS&WALLS) $ 10632 PRE-FAB FITTING ROOMS(LABOR) $ 03400 CONCRETE(SLAB WORK) $ 10800 TOILET&BATH ACCESSORIES $ 03505 LEVELING UNDERLAYMENT $ 12300 METAL CABINETS $ 04300 BRICK $ 12510 BLINDS/SHADES $ ,look 04400 STONE $ 14100 DUMBWAITERS $ 05100 STRUCTURAL STEEL $ 14200 ELEVATORS $ 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS $ 15310 SPRINKLER MAIN/RGH $ 05502 MISC.IRON $ 15320 SPRINKLER FINISH $ 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY(LABOR) $ 15410 ROUGH PLUMBING $ 06125 ROUGH CARPENTRY(MATERIALS) $ 15420 FINISH PLUMBING $ 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY(LABOR) $ 15430 BATHROOM FIXTURES $ 06410 W.W.A.S. (MATERIALS) $ 15780 H.V.A.C.EQUIPMENT $ 06411 W.W.A.S. (LABOR) $ 15880 H.V.A.C.DUCTWORK $ 06412 CABINETS,C/TOPS&SHELVING(MAT) $ 15942 MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT $ 06413 CABINETS,C/TOPS&SHELVING(LABOR) $ 15950 CONTROLS $ 06420 WOOD FEATURE WALL(MATERIALS) $ 16400 SERVICE TO PANELS $ 06422 WOOD FEATURE WALL(LABOR) $ 16460 TRANSFORMERS $ 06430 MERCHANDISE BAY STSTEM(MATERIAL) $ 16470 DISTRIBUTION SWITCH BOARD $ 06432 MERCHANDISE BAY SYSTEM(LABOR) $ 16474 PANELS AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS. $ 06450 STANDING&RUNNING TRIM(MATERIAL) $ 16480 RECEPTACLES $ 06452 STANDING&RUNNING TRIM(LABOR) $ 16500 LIGHTING INSTALLATION $ 06450 WOOD STOREFRONT(MATERIAL) $ 16510 LIGHTING FIXTURES(NON-TFI) $ 06462 WOOD STOREFRONT(LABOR) $ 16530 EXTERIOR LIGHTING(SUPPLY&INSTALL) $ 06620 PLASTIC COLUMN ENCLOSURES $ 16550 ACCESSORIES $ 07160 DAMPROOFING&WATERPROOFING $ 16620 EMERGENCY LIGHT AND POWER $ 07210 INSULATION $ 16720 FIRE&SMOKE SYSTEM(S) $ 07460 SIDING/CLADDING $ 16850 HEATING AND COOLING WIRING $ 07500 ROOFING SYSTEM $ DESCRIPTION 07600 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL $ ALT#1 $ 07800 ROOF ACCESS.(SKYLIGHT,HATCHES,ETC) $ ALT#2 $ 07900 JOINT SEALERS $ ALT#3 $ 08110 STEEL DOORS&FRAMES $ ALT#4 $ 08210 WOOD DOORS&FRAMES Is TOTAL INCLUDING ALTERNATIVES: Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion SCHED OF VALUES-EXTENDED 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\00303NorthamptonMA.doc 00303-2 DOCUMENT 00303(TBS-101) SCHEDULE OF VALUES-EXTENDED BREAKDOWN—MISSES CONCEPT PROJECT: G.C.NAME: PART# DESCRIPTION AMOUNT PART# DESCRIPTION AMOUNT 00117 VALUE ENGINEERING $ 08400 METAL/ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEM $ 00620 PROFIT AND OVERHEAD $ 08702 HARDWARE $ 01020 CONTINGENCIES $ 08802 GLAZING(STOREFRONT&WWAS $ 01055 PERMITS $ 08814 SALES AREA MIRRORS $ 01074 SUPERVISION $ 08816 TINTED FILM ON GLASS $ 01080 INSURANCE $ 09260 METAL FRAMING AND GWB PARTITIONS $ 01086 TAXES $ 09270 METAL FRAMING AND GWB CEILING $ 01200 PROJECT MEETINGS PM $ 1 09310 TILE $ 01280 ENGINEERING $ 09500 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS $ 01400 SAFETY REGULATIONS $ 09550 WOOD FLOORING(NO PLY SUB FLOOR) $ 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES $ 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING $ 01540 SECURITY $ 09682 CARPET/SALES AREA/FITTING ROOM(LABOR) $ 01552 BARRIERS&GRAPHICS $ 09686 CARPET STOCK ROOM AREA(LABOR) $ 01560 CLEANING UP $ 09902 PAINTING SALESTITTING ROOM S 01600 EQUIPMENT,TOOLS&STAGING $ 09906 PAINTING STOCK ROOM AREA $ 01702 GENERAL LABOR $ 099s, WALL COVI'RIN(i S.V_F.S;AREA(LABOR) 'S 02050 M N1011 I ION j 0910;6 �vv'AI_L COvTRIllt;11 fTIA'r;ROONI N vItUR) S 02500 P.-AVING&SURFACING S 10700 SIGNAGE $ 02550 SITE UTILITIES(TEL,ELE.) $ 10500 AWNINGS&CANOPIES $ 02728 CONCRETE SAW CUTTING S 10520 MISC.SPECIALITIES(FIRE EXTINGUISHER,ETC.) $ 02905 LANDSCAPING $ 10600 REMOVABLE PARTITIONS $ 03110 CONCRETE PATCHING $ 10630 PRE-FAB FITTING ROOMS(MATERIALS) $ 03300 CONCRETE(FTGS&WALLS) $ 10632 PRE-FAB FITTING ROOMS(LABOR) $ 03400 CONCRETE(SLAB WORK) $ 10800 TOILET&BATH ACCESSORIES $ 03505 LEVELING UNDERLAYMENT $ 12300 METAL CABINETS $ 04300 BRICK $ 12510 BLINDS/SHADES $ 04400 STONE $ 14100 DUMBWAITERS $ 05100 STRUCTURAL STEEL $ 14200 ELEVATORS $ 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS $ 15310 SPRINKLER MAIN/RGH $ 05502 MISC.IRON $ 15320 SPRINKLER FINISH $ 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY(LABOR) $ 15410 ROUGH PLUMBING $ 06125 ROUGH CARPENTRY(MATERIALS) $ 15420 FINISH PLUMBING $ 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY(LABOR) $ 15430 BATHROOM FIXTURES $ 06410 W.W.A.S. (MATERIALS) $ 15780 H.V.A.C.EQUIPMENT $ 06411 W.W.A.S. (LABOR) $ 15880 H.V.A.C.DUCTWORK $ 06412 CABINETS,C/TOPS&SHELVING(MAT) $ 15942 MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT $ 06413 CABINETS,C/TOPS&SHELVING(LABOR) $ 15950 CONTROLS $ 06420 WOOD FEATURE WALL(MATERIALS) $ 16400 SERVICE TO PANELS $ 06422 WOOD FEATURE WALL(LABOR) $ 16460 TRANSFORMERS $ 06430 MERCHANDISE BAY STSTEM(MATERIAL) $ 16470 DISTRIBUTION SWITCH BOARD $ 06432 MERCHANDISE BAY SYSTEM(LABOR) $ 16474 PANELS AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS. $ 06450 STANDING&RUNNING TRIM(MATERIAL) $ 16480 RECEPTACLES $ 06452 STANDING&RUNNING TRIM(LABOR) $ 16500 LIGHTING INSTALLATION $ 06450 WOOD STOREFRONT(MATERIAL) $ 16510 LIGHTING FIXTURES(NON-TFI) $ 06462 WOOD STOREFRONT(LABOR) $ 16530 EXTERIOR LIGHTING(SUPPLY&INSTALL) $ 06620 PLASTIC COLUMN ENCLOSURES $ 16550 ACCESSORIES $ 07160 DAMPROOFING&WATERPROOFING $ 16620 EMERGENCY LIGHT AND POWER $ 07210 INSULATION $ 16720 FIRE&SMOKE SYSTEM(S) $ 07460 SIDING/CLADDING $ 16850 HEATING AND COOLING WIRING Is 07500 ROOFING SYSTEM $ DESCRIPTION 07600 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL $ ALT#1 $ 07800 ROOF ACCESS.(SKYLIGHT,HATCHES,ETC) $ ALT#2 $ 07900 JJOINTSEALERS $ ALT#3 $ 08110 STEEL DOORS&FRAMES Is ALT#4 $ 08210 WOOD DOORS&FRAMES 1$ TOTAL INCLUDING ALTERNATIVES: Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion SCHED OF VALUES-EXTENDED 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\00303NorthamptonMA.doc 00303-1 DOCUMENT 00302 SCHEDULE OF VALUES-UNIT RATES CONSTRUCTION FORM TBS-102 PROJECT: G.C.NAME: It is the General Contractor' responsibility to determine local labor conditions. No adjustment will be allowed to rates once contract is awarded. SUPERINTENDENT $ PER HOUR LABORER $ PER HOUR MASON $ PER HOUR FRAMING CARPENTER $ PER HOUR FINISH CARPENTER $ PER HOUR GLAZTERS $ PER HOTTR PAINTER $ P[.1: IIOUIZ CARPET/TILE LAYER $ PER HOUR PLASTERER $ PER HOUR HVAC MECHANIC $ PER HOUR SHEET METAL WORKER $ PER HOUR SPRINKLER INSTALLER $ PER HOUR PLUMBER $ PER HOUR ELECTRICIAN $ PER HOUR ASBESTOS WORKER $ PER HOUR SHIFT DIFFERENTIAL X UNIT RATE OR 8>7 OVERTIME(OVER 40 HOURS) X UNIT RATE ** GENERAL CONTRACTOR'S PROFIT&OVERHEAD (%NOT TO EXCEED BASE BID RATE) % ** Time sheet must be provided for operative billed ** Insert hourly/unit rate for each associated trade. If trade is not used,then insert N/A for not apply. *** Hourly/unit rates will be used for processing change orders. (MATERIALS ONLY) 3"x 42 x 1/2"MAPLE FLOORING $ PER SQ. FT. 5/8"GYPSUM BOARD (REGULAR) $ PER SQ. FT. 5/8" GYPSUM BOARD (FIR-E-X) $ PER SQ. FT 3/8"PLYWOOD UNDERLAYMENT $ PER SQ. FT. 3/4"PLYWOOD SHEATHING $ PER SQ. FT. Talbots Store No.335,M.Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion SCHEDULE OF VALUES-UNIT RATES 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29,2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\00302NorthamptonMA.doc 00302-1 DOCUMENT 00301 SCHEDULE OF VALUES-DIVISIONAL BREAKDOWN CONSTRUCTION FORM TBS-100 PROJECT: It is the General Contractor's responsibility LOCATION: to determine labor conditions.No adjustments will be allowed once a contract is awarded. G.C.: ADDRESS: All items must be Bid -do not group items. PHONE#: FAX#: Bids must include applicable sales tax. BID BID BID BID BID AMOUNT AMOUNT AMOUNT AMOUNT AMOUNT #144 ITEM TRADE(S)DESCRIPTION #1 #2 #3 #4 CONCEPT: MISSES PETITES WOMAN STOCh TOTAL 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 02 SITE CONSTRUCTION 03 CONCRETE 04 MASONRY 05 METALS 06 WOOD&PLASTIC 07 THERMAL&MOIST. CONTROL 08 DOORS AND WINDOWS 09 FINISHES 10 SPECIALTIES I 1 EQUIPMENT 12 FURNISHINGS 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS 15 MECHANICAL 16 ELECTRICAL 01 PROFIT&OVERHEAD TOTAL BASE BID: ALTERNATE PRICES: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. TOTAL WITH ALTERNATIVES *Contractors are required to submit their bids on Talbots Document Sheets 00301 (TBS 100),00303 (TBS-101 Extended Breakdown) and Document sheet 00302(TBS-102 Unit Rates). Failure to submit all bid forms could result in rejection of bid. Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation, Peites/Woman Expansion SCHEDULE OF VALUES 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29. 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\00301NorthamptonMA.doc 00301-1 C. Address and phone number of Bidder(P.O. Box not acceptable, must be location of company , officer). D. Authorized signature Title: Date: Corporation Sea]: State license number: END OF SECTION Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion BID FORM, BASE BID 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\00300NorthamptonMA.doc 00300-2 DOCUMENT 00300 BID FORM,BASE BID From: Bidder To: Talbots One Talbots Drive Hingham, MA 02043 Attention: Constriction Bid Administrator 1.0 The Bidder Represents: A. That lie has received and examined the Bidding Documents for Talbots Misses Store Renovation and Petites and Woman Expansion Fit Up which includes the Project Manual dated December 29, 2005, the Drawings dated December 29, 2005 and all Addenda issued to date. The undersigned has received Addenda numbered: (List all Addendum numbers). 2.0 Proposed Contract Sum A. Contract Sum(Base Bid):$ , In words: BASE BID SHOWN ABOVE SHALL NOT INCLUDE ANY BUILDING PERMIT FEES ASSOCIATED WITH THIS PROJECT. COST OF BUILDING PERMIT FEES SHALL BE ADDRESSED IN THE FIRST CHANGE ORDER TO THE CONTRACT. B. The Base Bid is an extension of the breakdown prices submitted on the attached Bid Forms: 00301, and 00302. C. A separate and complete Bid Form 00303 must be submitted for each store concept(Misses, Petites,Woman and Shared Stocroom), divided as shown on the drawings. 3.0 Bidder's Data: A. Name of Bidder B. Form of Business: Circle and complete as appropriate. Individual Partnership Corporation, State of incorporation. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion BID FORM, BASE BID 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\00300NorthamptonMA.doc 00300-1 i" §7.2.3 The bonds shall be dated on or after the date of the Contract. §7.2.4 The Bidder shall require the attorney-in-fact who executes the required bonds on behalf of the surety to affix thereto a certified and current copy of the power of attorney. ARTICLE 8 FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR Unless otherwise required in the Bidding Documents,the Agreement for the Work will be written on AIA Document A101,Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor Where the Basis of Payment Is a Stipulated Sum. AIA Document A701 TM—1997.Copyright ©1970,1974,1978,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA'" Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA" 7 Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:45:18 on 02/16/2005 under Order No.1000104037_1 which expires on 3/8/2005,and is not for resale. User Notes: (2029173999) ifinaneial affangenients have been made to fulfill the Ownef:'s obligations undeF the Centfaet.Unless sueh reasenab4e evidenee is fuf:nished,the Biddef will Fwt be requif:ed to execute the AgFeement between the Owner and contfaeteF. §6.3 SUBMITTALS §6.3.1 The Bidder shall,as soon as practicable o. _s stipulated in,tie Bidding n P r.--.-•�-.••• ••.,..•,....••s Documents,—and within 14 calendar days after notification of selection for the award of a Contract,furnish to the Owner through the Architect in writing: .1 a designation of the Work to be performed with the Bidder's own forces; .2 names of the manufacturers,products,and the suppliers of principal items or systems of materials and equipment proposed for the Work;and .3 names of persons or entities(including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design)proposed for the principal portions of the Work. All information above shall be submitted on Talbots Document No.00430 which is included in the Project Manual .4 names of the Contractor's Project Manager and Field Superintendent. .5 cons true tion/progress schedule. .6 copies of Building Permits and similar authorizations or certifications .7 certificate of insurance on AIA G715. .8 shop drawing and submittal schedule. .9 sales tax bond for all states that require a bond by statute law. §6.3.2 The Bidder will be required to establish to the satisfaction of the Arm and Owner the reliability and responsibility of the persons or entities proposed to furnish and perform the Work described in the Bidding Documents. Approval of the Contractor's Superintendent(and any change in employment)must be obtained by the Owner's Construction Project Manager(CPM). §6.3.3 Prior to the execution of the Contract,the Afehiteet Owner will notify the Bidder in writing if either the Owner or ^_ehiteet Owner after due investigation,has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the - Bidder.If the Owner or ^ ethas reasonable objection to a proposed person or entity,the Bidder may,at the Bidder's option,(1)withdraw the Bid or(2)submit an acceptable substitute person or entity with an adjustment in the Base Bid or Alternate Bid to cover the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution.The Owner may accept ,, the adjusted bid price or disqualify the Bidder.in the event of either withdFawal oF disqualification,bid seeurity-*ig be fOF.-iced nvcvczvrn,-rccv: §6.3.4 Persons and entities proposed by the Bidder and to whom the Owner and Arehitect have has made no reasonable objection must be used on the Work for which they were proposed and shall not be changed except with the written consent of the Owner and A.,.r.:teet.Owner. ARTICLE 7 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND §7.1 BOND REQUIREMENTS §7.1.1 If stipulated in the Bidding Documents,the Bidder shall furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and payment of all obligations arising thereunder.Bonds may be secured through the Bidder's usual sources. §7.1.2 If the furnishing of such bonds is stipulated in the Bidding Documents,the cost shall be included in the Bid. If the furnishing of such bonds is required after receipt of bids and before execution of the Contract,the cost of such bonds shall be added to the Bid in determining the Contract Sum. §7.1.31f the Owner requires that bonds be secured from other than the Bidder's usual sources,changes in cost will be adjusted as provided in the Contract Documents. §7.2 TIME OF DELIVERY AND FORM OF BONDS §7.2.1 The Bidder shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner not later than three days following the date of execution of the Contract.If the Work is to be commenced prior thereto in response to a letter of intent,the Bidder shall,prior to commencement of the Work,submit evidence satisfactory to the Owner that such bonds will be furnished and delivered in accordance with this Section 7.2.1. §7.2.2 Unless otherwise provided,the bonds shall be written on AIA Document A312,Performance Bond and Payment Bond.Both bonds shall be written in the amount of the Contract Sum. AIA Document A701 TM-1997.Copyright ©1970,1974,1978,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA" 6 Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:45:18 on 02/16/2005 under Order No.1000104037_1 which expires on 3/8/2005,and is not for resale. User Notes: (2029173999) §4.3.2 Bids shall be deposited at the designated location prior to the time and date for receipt of Bids. Bids received after the time and date for receipt of Bids will be returned unopened. §4.3.3 The Bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at the location designated for receipt of Bids. §4.3.4 Oral,telephonic,telegraphic,facsimile or other electronically transmitted bids will not be o sidered..considered unless pre-approved by the Director of Talbots Construction. §4.4 MODIFICATION OR WITHDRAWAL OF BID §4.4.1 A Bid may not be modified,withdrawn or canceled by the Bidder during the stipulated time period identified in Owner's Invitation To Bid Document No.00020)following the time and date designated for the receipt of Bids, and each Bidder so agrees in submitting a Bid. §4.4.2 Prior to the time and date designated for receipt of Bids,a Bid submitted may be modified or withdrawn by notice to the party receiving Bids at the place designated for receipt of Bids.Such notice shall be in writing over the signature of the Bidder.Written confirmation over the signature of the Bidder shall be received,and date-and time- stamped by the receiving party on or before the date and time set for receipt of Bids.A change shall be so worded as not to reveal the amount of the original Bid. §4.4.3 Withdrawn Bids may be resubmitted up to the date and time designated for the receipt of Bids provided that they are then fully in conformance with these Instructions to Bidders. §4.4.4 Bid security,if required,shall be in an afflaunt suffieie nt fi the Bid as resubmitted. ARTICLE 5 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS §5.1 OPENING OF BIDS diseretion of the 0,Amer,if stipulated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid,the :Bids ived on ime will be publiely pened and will be Fead aloud.privately. An abstract of the Bids a}-same information may,at the discretion of the Owner,be made available to the Bidders. §5.2 REJECTION OF BIDS The Owner shall have the right to reject any or all Bids.A Bid not accompanied by a required bid security or by other data required by the Bidding Documents,or a Bid which is in any way incomplete or irregular is subject to rejection. §5.3 ACCEPTANCE OF BID(AWARD) §5.3.1 It is the intent of the Owner to award a Contract to the lowest qualified Bidder provided the Bid has been submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Bidding Documents and does not exceed the funds available. The Owner shall have the right to waive informalities and irregularities in a Bid received and to accept the Bid which,in the Owner's judgment,is in the Owner's own best interests. §5.3.2 The Owner shall have the right to accept Alternates in any order or combination,unless otherwise specifically provided in the Bidding Documents,and to determine the low Bidder on the basis of the sum of the Base Bid and Alternates accepted. ARTICLE 6 POST-BID INFORMATION §6.1 CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT Bidders to whom award of a Contract is under consideration shall submit to the Architect,upon request,a properly executed AIA Document A305,Contractor's Qualification Statement,unless such a Statement has been previously required and submitted as a prerequisite to the issuance of Bidding Documents. §6.2 OWNER'S The Ov,npr shall, at the Fequest of the Bidder to whom award of a Contraet is undef eEmsidef:atien and na latelF than seven days prior to the expifation of the tifne for-withdFawal of Bids,furnish to the Bidder reasonable evideflee that AIA Document A701 w—1997.Copyright©1970,1974,1978,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA'" Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this Ale 5 Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:45:18 on 02/16/2005 under Order No.1000104037_1 which expires on 318/2005,and is not for resale. User Notes: (2029173999) §3.4.4 Each Bidder shall ascertain prior to submitting a Bid that the Bidder has received all Addenda issued,and the Bidder shall acknowledge their receipt in the Bid. ARTICLE 4 BIDDING PROCEDURES §4.1 PREPARATION OF BIDS §4.1.1 Bids shall be submitted on the forms included with the Bidding Documents. §4.1.2 All blanks on the bid form shall be legibly executed in a non-erasable medium. §4.1.3 Sums shall be expressed in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy,the amount written in words shall govern. §4.1.4 Interlineations,alterations and erasures must be initialed by the signer of the Bid. §4.1.5 All requested Alternates shall be bid.If no change in the Base Bid is required,enter"No Change." §4.1.6 Where two or more Bids for designated portions of the Work have been requested,the Bidder may,without forfeiture of the bid security,state the Bidder's refusal to accept award of less than the combination of Bids stipulated by the Bidder.The Bidder shall make no additional stipulations on the bid form nor qualify the Bid in any other manner. §4.1.7 Each copy of the Bid shall state the legal name of the Bidder and the nature of legal form of the Bidder.The Bidder shall provide evidence of legal authority to perform within the jurisdiction of the Work.Each copy shall be signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the Bidder to a contract.A Bid by a corporation shall further give the state of incorporation and have the corporate seal affixed.A Bid submitted by an agent shall have a current power of attorney attached certifying the agent's authority to bind the Bidder. §4.2 BID S€CORFr 4.1.8 Submit with Bid,photocopies of state,city,town,building and construction licenses or applicable registration(where required),verifying the Bidder is properly licensed to perform the Work where the project is located. §4.2.1 Eaeh Bid shall be aeeenipanied by a bid seeurity in!he fefm and aRiount required if so stipulated in the instructions to BiddeFS.The Bidder-pledges to enteF into a Contmet with the Owner on the teffns slated in the Bi an i d will, if required,furnish bonds covering the faithful pefformanee of the Gentmet and payment of all obligations ar sing thefeundeF. Should the Bidder-refuse to enter into sueh Cefitr-aet er fail to fumish sueh bends if FeqUiFed,the afflouns of the bid seeur4ty shall be feFfeited to the Owner-as liquidated damages,not as a penalty.The amount ef the bid seewity shall not be forfeited to the QwneF in the event the Owner-fails to comply with Seetion 6-.2-. §4.2.2 if a sur-ety bond is Fequifed,it shall be-ATitten on AIA Doeument A3 10,Bid Bond,unless othefwise provided in the Bidding Doeuments,and the attorney in fact who exeeutes the bond on behalf of the surety shall affix to the §4.2.3 The Owner will have the right to r-etain the bid seeur-ity of Bidders to whem an award is being eonsidef:ed until either-(a)the Gentraet has been exeeuted and bonds,if required,have been furnished,or(b)the speeified time has elapsed so that Bids fnay be withdrawn or(e)all Bids have been rejeeted. L §4.3 SUBMISSION OF BIDS §4.3.1 All copies of the Bid,the bid security,if any,and any other documents required to be submitted with the Bid shall be enclosed in a sealed opaque envelope.The envelope shall be addressed to the party receiving the Bids and shall be identified with the Project name,the Bidder's name and address and,if applicable,the designated portion of the Work for which the Bid is submitted.If the Bid is sent by mail,the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate mailing envelope with the notation"SEALED BID ENCLOSED"on the face thereof. AIA Document A701 TM—1997.Copyright©1970,1974,1978,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA*Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' 4 Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:45:18 on 02/16/2005 under Order No.1000104037_1 which expires on 3/8/2005,and is not for resale. User Notes: (2029173999) refunded.electronic format. §3.1.2 Bidding Documents will not be issued directly to Sub-bidders unless specifically offered in the Adver-tisement of Invitation to Bid,or in supplementary instructions to bidders. §3.1.3 Bidders shall use complete sets of Bidding Documents in preparing Bids;neither the Owner nor Architect assumes responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents. §3.1.4 The Owner and Architect may make copies of the Bidding Documents available on the above terms for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work.No license or grant of use is conferred by issuance of copies of the Bidding Documents. §3.2 INTERPRETATION OR CORRECTION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS §3.2.1 The Bidder shall carefully study and compare the Bidding Documents with each other,and with other work being bid concurrently or presently under construction to the extent that it relates to the Work for which the Bid is submitted,shall examine the site and local conditions,and shall at once report to the Architect errors, inconsistencies or ambiguities discovered. §3.2.2 Bidders and Sub-bidders requiring clarification or interpretation of the Bidding Documents shall make a written request which shall reach the Architect at least seven days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. §3.2.3 Interpretations,corrections and changes of the Bidding Documents will be made by Addendum. Interpretations,corrections and changes of the Bidding Documents made in any other manner will not be binding, and Bidders shall not rely upon them. §3.3 SUBSTITUTIONS §3.3.1 The materials,products and equipment described in the Bidding Documents establish a standard of required function,dimension,appearance and quality to be met by any proposed substitution. §3.3.2 No substitution will be considered prior to receipt of Bids unless written request for approval has been received by the Architect at least ten days prior to the date for receipt of Bids.Such requests shall include the name of the material or equipment for which it is to be substituted and a complete description of the proposed substitution including drawings,performance and test data,and other information necessary for an evaluation. A statement setting forth changes in other materials,equipment or other portions of the Work,including changes in the work of other contracts that incorporation of the proposed substitution would require,shall be included.The burden of proof of the merit of the proposed substitution is upon the proposer.The Architect's decision of approval or disapproval of a proposed substitution shall be final. §3.3.3 If the Architect approves a proposed substitution prior to receipt of Bids,such approval will be set forth in an Addendum.Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner. §3.3.4 No substitutions will be considered after the Contract award unless specifically provided for in the Contract Documents. §3.4 ADDENDA §3.4.1 Addenda will be transmitted to all who are known by the issuing office to have received a complete set of Bidding Documents. §3.4.2 Copies of Addenda will be made available for inspection wherever Bidding Documents are on file for that purpose. §3.4.3 Addenda will be issued no later than four days prior to the date for receipt of Bids except an Addendum withdrawing the request for Bids or one which includes postponement of the date for receipt of Bids. AIA Document A701TM—1997.Copyright ©1970,1974,1978,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA 3 Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:45:18 on 02/16/2005 under Order No.1000104037_1 which expires on 3/8/2005,and is not for resale. User Notes: (2029173999) ARTICLE 1 DEFINITIONS _00k §1.1 Bidding Documents include the Bidding Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents.The Bidding Requirements consist of the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid,Instructions to Bidders,Supplementary Instructions to Bidders,the bid form,and other sample bidding and contract forms.The proposed Contract Documents consist of the form of Agreement between the Owner and Contractor,Conditions of the Contract(General,Supplementary and other Conditions),Drawings,Specifications and all Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract. §1.2 Definitions set forth in the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction,AIA Document A201,or in other Contract Documents are applicable to the Bidding Documents. §1.3 Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued by the Architect prior to the execution of the Contract which modify or interpret the Bidding Documents by additions,deletions,clarifications or corrections. §1.4 A Bid is a complete and properly executed proposal to do the Work for the sums stipulated therein,submitted in accordance with the Bidding Documents. §1.5 The Base Bid is the sum stated in the Bid for which the Bidder offers to perform the Work described in the Bidding Documents as the base,to which Work may be added or from which Work may be deleted for sums stated in Alternate Bids. §1.6 An Alternate Bid(or Alternate)is an amount stated in the Bid to be added to or deducted from the amount of the Base Bid if the corresponding change in the Work,as described in the Bidding Documents,is accepted. §1.7 A Unit Price is an amount stated in the Bid as a price per unit of measurement for materials,equipment or services or a portion of the Work as described in the Bidding Documents. §1.8 A Bidder is a person or entity who submits a Bid and who meets the requirements set forth in the Bidding Documents. §1.9 A Sub-bidder is a person or entity who submits a bid to a Bidder for materials,equipment or labor for a portionR, of the Work. ARTICLE 2 BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS §2.1 The Bidder by making a Bid represents that: §2.1.1 The Bidder has read and understands the Bidding Documents or Contract Documents,to the extent that such documentation relates to the Work for which the Bid is submitted,and for other portions of the Project,if any,being bid concurrently or presently under construction. §2.1.2 The Bid is made in compliance with the Bidding Documents. §2.1.3 The Bidder has visited the site,become familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and has correlated the Bidder's personal observations with the requirements of the proposed Contract Documents. 2.1.3.1 The Bidder has contacted the Landlord Tenant Coordinator and has become familiar with the Landlord's Rules and Restrictions for site access. §2.1.4 The Bid is based upon the materials,equipment and systems required by the Bidding Documents without exception. I 2.1.5 The Bidder has read and understands the Bidding Documents and the Bid is made in accordance therewith. ARTICLE 3 BIDDING DOCUMENTS §3.1 COPIES §3AA Bidders may obtain complete sets of the Bidding Documents from the issuing office designated in the Advertisement Invitation to Bid in the number and for the deposit sum,if any,stated they-ein.The de ,..... ,:n do R-A-Unded-to Bidders who submit a bona fide Bid and f:etufn the Bidding Documents in good condition withift ten days after f:eeeipt of Bids.The cost of i:eplaeement of missing or damaged doeuniefits will be dedueted fiom the AIA Document A701 TM—1997.Copyright ©1970,1974,1978,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA*Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA S. 2 Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:45:18 on 02/16/2005 under Order No.1000104037_1 which expires on 3/8/2005,and is not for resale. User Notes: (2029173999) AIA Document A701TM — 1997 Instructions to Bidders for the following PROJECT: (Name and location or address): General Construction Contract THE OWNER: This document has important (Name and address): legal consequences. Talbots Inc. One Talbots Drive Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to Hingham,Massachusetts 02043 its completion or modification. THE ARCHITECT: (Name and address): TALBOTS AMENDED EDITION FEBRUARY 1, 2005 TABLE OF ARTICLES 1 DEFINITIONS 2 BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS 3 BIDDING DOCUMENTS 4 BIDDING PROCEDURES 5 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS 6 POST-BID INFORMATION 7 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 8 FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR AIA Document A701 TM'—1997.Copyright ©1970,1974,1978,1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA" Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 16:45:18 on 02/16/2005 under Order No.1000104037_1 which expires on 3/8/2005,and is not for resale. User Notes: (2029173999) SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS: 1. Technical questions about the Specifications or Drawings must be put in writing and directed to the Architect. Verbal questions are not acceptable. 2. Appointments for the pre-bid conference and questions about the administration of the Bid should be directed to the Owner's Construction Project Manager. END OF INVITATION look Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion INVITATION TO BID 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\00020NorthamptonMA.doc 00020-3 6. Bidding shall be conducted in recognition of the following schedule: Out to Bid: December 29, 2005 Bids Due(12:00 noon): January 19,2006 Site available From: February 6,2006 To: May 4, 2006 HVAC operational &tested: April 24, 2006 Talbots Fixtures due on site May 5, 2006 Substantial Completion: May 4, 2006 Merchandising by Talbots begins: May 6, 2006 Punchlist and final completion: May 16, 2006 Existing Misses Store Remains open during renovation New expansion stores open: May 11. 2006 Construction Black-Out Dates (Existing Misses Store Remodel) March 13, 2006 to March 25, 2006 7 BIDDERS NOTE: a. For existing store operating hours and requirement for additional Site Superintendent refer to Document 01001. b. This project has a 13 week schedule. 8. Bids may not be withdrawn for 30 (thirty) days from the Bid due date and in accordance with Paragraph 4.4.1 of the Instructions to Bidders AIA form A701-1997 edition (Amended 2/1/2005). 9. Bids received that do not comply with the "Instructions To Bidders"will not be considered. 10. Bidders are strongly urged to make an appointment with the Talbots Construction Project Manager for a pre-bid conference. Pre-bid conferences will be held, upon request, at the Construction Project Manager's offices at a mutually agreed upon date.. CONSIDERATION OF BIDS: 1. The opening of the Bids shall be private. 2. Notwithstanding,the requirements of Article 5 of the Instructions to Bidders: A. The Owner reserves the right to reject any and all proposals without reason. B. Bidders agree that Bids are submitted based on the understanding that they be prepared to start Work immediately upon award. POST BID INFORMATION: 1. Bidders may be required to submit a qualification statement on AIA Form A305. 2. An abstract of competitive Bids shall not be made available. PERFORMANCE BONDS: 1. The Owner shall have the right prior to the signing of the Contract to require the Contractor to furnish Bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract in such form as the Owner may prescribe and with all such sureties as they may approve. The cost of the Bonds shall be paid by the Owner in addition to the Base Bid amount but shall not exceed 1.50% of the Base Bid. FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR: 1. A bilateral stipulated sum Agreement shall be executed between the Owner and successful bidder. The document to be used will be prepared by Talbots and be AIA Document A101-1997 edition (Talbots Revision 7/20/2004). Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion INVITATION TO BID 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\00020NorthamptonMA.doc 00020-2 DOCUMENT 00020 INVITATION TO BID Date: December 29, 2005 Project: Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion Project No. 05132 Address: 34 Bridge Street Northampton, Massachusetts 01060 Owner: The Talbots Incorporated One Talbots Drive Hingham, MA 02043 Mr. Bruce C. Soderholm, Sr. V.P. Architect: Bradford E. Prescott,AIA One Talbots Drive Hingham, MA 02043 You are invited to submit a Bid on the Contract for Construction of an existing Talbots Misses Store Renovation and New Construction of a Petites/Woman Expansion Areas totaling 9,171 square feet of space in an existing retail strip center. The work includes architectural,mechanical, electrical,partial demolition of an existing store,new storefronts, and build out of interior spaces. One complete set of reproducible Bid documents is provided to the Owner's selected Bidders free of charge. The Bidder,by accepting this invitation,represents that he has read and understands the bidding documents and that the Bid shall be made in accordance therewith. BIDDING PROCEDURE: To receive consideration all proposals must be submitted in the following manner: 1. The Bids must be on the"Bid Form"and"Schedule of Values"forms distributed herein and must comply with A701 Instructions to Bidders. 2. All blank spaces must be filled in including unit cost breakdowns by store concept(Misses, Petites, Woman, Shared Stockroom).No exceptions! 3. Submit with bid,photocopies of state/city license or applicable registration (where required),verifying the bidding General Contractor is properly licensed to perform work where the Project is located. 4. There is no Bid security deposit required. 5. One original signed copy of the proposal must be submitted to(no faxed bids accepted): Talbots One Talbots Drive Hingham, MA 02043 Attn: Construction Department Bid Administrator Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion INVITATION TO BID 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29,2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\00020NorthamptonMA.doc 00020-1 SECTION TITLE PAGES DATE DIVISION 10: SPECIALTIES 10005 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 2 12/29/05 10430 SIGNS 11 12/29/05 10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS,ACCESSORIES 3 12/29/05 10537 AWNINGS 8 12/29/05 10631 FITTING ROOM PARTITION SYSTEM 4 12/29/05 10670 STORAGE SHELVING 2 12/29/05 10800 TOILET ACCESSORIES 2 12/29/05 DIVISION 11: EQUIPMENT 11005 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT 1 12/29/05 11100 LOOSE FIXTURES 1 12/29/05 DIVISION 15: MECHANICAL 15300 FIRE PROTECTION 6 12/29/05 15400 PLUMBING 7 12/29/05 15500 HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 15 12/29/05 15890 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM CLEANING 2 12/29/05 15950 ENERGY MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEM 7 12/29/05 DIVISION 16: ELECTRICAL 16000 ELECTRICAL 12 12/29/05 16500 LIGHTING EQUIPMENT 3 12/29/05 16501 LAMPS 3 12/29/05 16720 FIRE AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM 9 12/29/05 16721 INTRUSION DETECTION 2 12/29/05 16741 TELEPHONE SYSTEM 2 12/29/05 16744 P.O.S. DATA SYSTEMS 2 12/29/05 16770 MUSIC SYSTEMS 2 12/29/05 END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS t.< Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion TABLE OF CONTENTS 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\00003NorthamptonMA.doc 00003-4 SECTION TITLE PAGES DATE DIVISION 7: THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07200 INSULATION 2 12/29/05 07270 FIRESTOPPING 6 12/29/05 07900 JOINT SEALERS 6 12/29/05 DIVISION 8: DOOR AND WINDOWS 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 5 12/29/05 08305 ACCESS DOORS 2 12/29/05 08410 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 8 12/29/05 08700 DOOR HARDWARE 6 12/29/05 08800 GLASS AND GLAZING 6 12/29/05 DIVISION 9: FINISHES 09260 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 10 12/29/05 09300 TILE-THINSET 8 12/29/05 09510 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 6 12/29/05 09555 WOOD FLOORING 4 12/29/05 09650 RESILIENT BASE 2 12/29/05 09680 CARPET 6 12/29/05 09900 PAINTING 10 12/29/05 09955 WALL COVERINGS 4 12/29/05 V Y, ��rs1Y f yW.. Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion TABLE OF CONTENTS 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\00003NorthamptonMA.doc 00003-3 SECTION TITLE PAGES DATE DIVISION 1: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01001 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 14 12/29/05 01700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 6 12/29/05 DIVISION 2: SITE WORK 02050 DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 6 12/29/05 02051 DIVISION 5: METALS 05310 STEEL DECKING—STORAGE PLATFORM 2 12/29/05 05400 STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 5 12/29/05 DIVISION 6: WOOD AND PLASTIC 06200 CARPENTRY 7 12/29/05 06410 CUSTOM CASEWORK 3 12/29/05 06411 CASHWRAP STATIONS 2 12/29/05 06420 PANELWORK 3 12/29/05 06450 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM 3 12/29/05 y Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion TABLE OF CONTENTS 34 Bridge Street, Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\00003NorthamptonMA.doc 00003-2 DOCUMENT 00003 TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION TITLE PAGES DATE INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION 00001 DIRECTORY 6 12/29/05 00003 TABLE OF CONTENTS 4 12/29/05 BIDDING REQUIREMENTS 00020 INVITATION TO BID 3 12/29/05 A701 INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS (Talbots version 10/25/2005) 7 REV 1997 00300 BID FORM, BASE BID 2 12/29/05 00301 SCHEDULE OF VALUES-DIVISIONAL BREAKDOWN 1 12/29/05 00302 SCHEDULE OF VALUES-UNIT RATES 1 12/29/05 00303 SCHEDULE OF VALUES-EXTENDED BREAKDOWN 5 12/29/05 00430 SUBCONTRACTOR LIST 2 12/29/05 CONTRACT FORMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT 00501 AGREEMENT-AIA 1 12/29/05 00661 LIEN SUMMARY FORM 1 12/29/05 00662 PARTIAL WAIVER OF LIEN 1 12/29/05 00663 FINAL WAIVER OF LIEN 1 12/29/05 00701 GENERAL CONDITIONS -AIA 1 12/29/05 > �-%4 Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion TABLE OF CONTENTS 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\00003NorthamptonMA.doc 00003-1 HALF SIZE PAPER DOCUMENT DISTRIBUTION (PRINTS ONLY) o � c o ; > X o d °' o b o w w 5w DRAWING NO 49 A1.7 A4.1 Sheets A1.8 A4.2 RECIPIENT Talbots Project SPM 1 Randy Osgood Talbots Project CPM 1 Tim Dempsey Talbots Project Architect 1 Bradford Prescott Talbots Project Coordinator 1 Donna Collins Talbots Project Leader 1 Bryce Hillman Talbots Senior CPM 1 Stuart Argus Talbots MEP Engineer 1 Michael Murphy Talbots Const.Services Mgr. , Malcolm Hargrave Stores Administration 1 1 Anne Sweeney Talbots Advertising 1 1 Heather Oles Territorial Managing Director 1 Regional Director j 1 District Manager 1 Visual Merchandising Claudia Story TOTALS ] 4 1 6 Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion DIRECTORY 34 Bridge Street, Northampton,MA December 29,2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\OOOO1NorthamptonMA.doc 00001-6 FULL SIZE PAPER DOCUMENT DISTRIBUTION ad o ° b a`. � Q0.l Drawing No. Recipient 49 Sheets Talbots Project CPM I 1 Tim Dempsey Talbots Project SPM 1 Randy Osgood Talbots TH Coordinator 1 1 Stephen Wright Project Architect 1 1 Landlord 1 1 Hampshire Property Building Department 2 2 TOTALS 6 7 Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation, Petites/Woman Expansion DIRECTORY 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\00001 NorthamptonMA.doc 00001-5 ELECTRONIC DISTRIBUTION , DRAWINGS PROJECT BULLETIN/ MANUAL ADDENDUM Recipient 49 Sheets Talbots Project CPM I 1 Tim Dempsey Talbots Const/Cost 1 Chris Aretino Bidders(Each) 1 1 5 MEP Engineer 1 ] LMG Consulting Engineers EIVICS Integrator 1 RETEC,Glenn Stowers Millwork/Cash-rap Vendor 1 Herrick&White TFI Carpet Vendor 1 Allegheny Flooring TFI Carpet Vendor 1 J&J Industries Sound System Vendor I DMX TFI Rolling Stock Shelving 1 Copeland&Laird TFI Wood Floring Vendor 1 Design Flooring Distributors TFI Signage/Awning Vendor Mandeville Signs Awning Manufacturer 1 Awning Inovations 1 TFI Lighting Vendor 1 Capitol Lighting Supply Metal Storefront Mfg. 1 1 V istawall HVAC Major Equip Supplier 1 Lennox Industries Linda Crawford 1 HVAC Maint.Contractor First Service Networks I 1 Duct Cleaning Vendor 1 D&V Cleaning/America Talbots Loss Prevention Dan Boucher 1 Talbots Communications Karen Johnson 1 Talbots P.O.S. Ed Patane I Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation,Petites/Voman Expansion DIRECTORY 34 Bridge Street, Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\00001 NorthamptonMA.doc 00001-4 Duct Cleaning Vendor Duct&Vent Cleaning of America, Inc Phone: (800)442-8368 Fax(413) 733-1997 Millwork, Cashwrap Herrick&White, Ltd. &Fixture Supplier: Phone: (401) 658-0440 Fax: (401)658-1438 P.O.S. Contractor: Spencer Electric Co. Phone: (508) 885-9778 Aluminum Storefront Vistawall Architectural Products Manufacturer: Contact: Mr. Chris Baker Phone: (800) 869-4567 Fax: (972) 551-6323 HVAC Units Lennox Industries Inc.,National Accounts Contact: Ms. Linda Crawford Phone: (800) 367-6285 Fax: (972)497-5112 e-mail : linda.erawford i)lennoxind.com Awning Contractor: Contact Talbots TFI Coordinator Sign Contractor: Contact Talbots TFI Coordinator Telephone System Contact Talbots Telecommunications, Contractor: Karen Johnson Phone: (813) 829-6030 Carpet Supplier: Contact: TFI Coordinator Entry Mat Supplier Contact: TFI Coordinator Door Hardware Supplier: Contact: TFI Coordinator Light Fixture Supplier: Contact: TFI Coordinator Wall Standard Supplier: Contact: TFI Coordinator Wallcovering Supplier: Contact: TFI Coordinator Wood Flooring Supplier: Contact: TFI Coordinator Backroom Free Standing Contact: TFI Coordinator Shelving Supplier: Moveable Stockroom Contact: TFI Coordinator System Contractor: Barricade Graphic Contractor: Contact: TFI Coordinator Aluminum Door Supplier: Contact: TFI Coordinator Banner Track Supplier: Contact: TFI Coordinator Talbots Store No. 335, Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion DIRECTORY 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\OOOO1NorthamptonMA.doc 00001-3 Architect: Bradford E Prescott,AIA Talbots Store Planning and Design One Talbots Drive, Hingham,MA 02043 . Contact: Bryce Hillman Phone: (781) 741-4699 Fax: (781) 741-7171 MEP Engineers: LMG Consulting Engineers, Inc. 78 Beaver Road Wethersfield, Connecticut 06106 Ramon Paguada, Project Manager Phone: (860) 721-7234 Fax: (860) 529-6700 Email: WWW.RPaguda @lmga.com Owner: The Talbots Inc. One Talbots Drive, Hingham,MA 02043 Phone: (781)-749-7600 Fax: (781) 741-4845 Construction Project Tim Dempsey Manager Phone: (508) 947-5030 Fax: (508) 947-5034 Store Planning& Randy Osgood Design Project Manager Phone: (781) 741-4752 Fax: (781) 741-7171 Landlord: Hampshire Property Management Group Inc. 15 Brewster Court Northampton, Massachusetts 01060 Contact: Eric Suher Phone: (413) 582-9970 Fax: "Talbots Furnished Items" TFI Coordinator Coordination: (781) 741-4036 The following is a list of Talbots separate Contractors and suppliers who have Prime Contracts with the Owner to perform Work on this Project and Suppliers whose Work is coordinated under"Talbots Furnished item" (TFI): Alarm Contractor: Contact Talbots Loss Prevention Coordinator Phone: (781) 741-4460 Sound System DMX Music Contractor: Phone: (206) 329-1400 Fax: (206) 329-9952 HVAC Maintenance First Service Networks Contractor Phone: (800)453-5353 Energy Management Retec, Inc. Control System Contact: Mr. Glenn Stowers Integrator Phone: (888) 849-9944 Fax: (508) 668-5708 Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion DIRECTORY 34 Bridge Street,Northampton, MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\00001 NorthamptonMA.doc 00001-2 DOCUMENT 00001 DIRECTORY PROJECT MANUAL including Specifications for the construction of TALBOTS STORE NO.335 EXISTING MISSES STORE RENOVATION NEW PETITES and WOMAN STORE EXPANSION 34 BRIDGE STREET NORTHAMPTON,MASSACHUSETTS Prepared by: Talbots Store Planning&Design One Talbots Drive Hingham,Massachusetts 02043 Date of issue: December 29,2005 Revisions: [None] Talbots Store No. 335,Misses Renovation,Petites/Woman Expansion DIRECTORY 34 Bridge Street,Northampton,MA December 29, 2005 05132 R:\MISSY\05132\specs\OOOOINorthamptonMA.doc 00001-1 r,r s�,1 117 pc9��C (, 70C Apr AV n STORE PLANNING A D CONSTRUCTION PROJECT MANUAL TALBOTS STORE NO.335 Rr�d.e,�n t EXISTING MISSES RENOVATION NEW PETITES EXPANSION NEW WOMAN EXPANSION 34 BRIDGE STREET NORTHAMPTON,MASSACHUSETTS a*' TALBOTS PROJECT NO. 05132 DECEMBER 29, 2005